Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisA fully comprehensive reference combining digital communications and RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits) in one complete volume There are many books which focus on the physical implementation of the RF/analog part of transceivers, such as the CMOS design, or the signal processing involved in digital communications. However, there islittle material dedicated to transceiver architecture and system design. Similarly, much of the existing literature looks at concepts useful for dimensioning, yet offers little practical information on how to proceed for dimensioning a line-up from scratch, and on the reasons for proceeding that way. This book redresses the balance by explaining the architecture of transceivers and their dimensioning from the perspective of a RFIC architect from within industry. It bridges the gap between digital communication systems and radiofrequency integrated circuit design, covering wireless transceiver architecture and system design from Table of ContentsForeword ix Glossary xiv I Somewhere between Maxwell and Shannon 1 Chapter 1. The digital communications point of view 3 1.1 Bandpass signal representation 4 1.2 Bandpass noise representation 36 1.3 Digital modulations examples 48 1.4 First transceivers architecture 73 Chapter 2. The Electromagnetism point of view 79 2.1 Free space radiation 79 2.2 Conducted propagation 107 2.3 The propagation channel 126 Chapter 3. The wireless standards point of view 161 3.1 Medium access strategies 161 3.2 Metrics for transmitters 169 3.3 Metrics for receivers 187 II Implementation limitations 205 Chapter 4. Noise 207 4.1 Analogue electronic noises 208 4.2 Noisy devices characterization 211 4.3 LO phase noise 259 4.4 Linear EVM 294 4.5 Quantization noise 298 4.6 Analogue vs. digital worlds conversions 322 Chapter 5. Nonlinearity 345 5.1 Smooth AM-AM conversion 346 5.2 Hard AM-AM conversion 440 5.3 AM-PM conversion, memory effect 449 5.4 Baseband devices 464 Chapter 6. RF Impairments 467 6.1 Frequency conversion 468 6.2 Gain and phase imbalance 489 6.3 Mixers implementation 508 6.4 Frequency planning 540 6.5 DC offset, LO leakage 548 III Transceivers dimensioning 553 Chapter 7. Transceivers budgets 555 7.1 Considered transceiver architecture 556 7.2 Budgeting a transmitter 557 7.3 Budgeting a receiver 599 Chapter 8. Transceivers architectures 661 8.1 Transmitters 661 8.2 Receivers 717 Chapter 9. Algorithms for transceivers 735 9.1 Transmit side 735 9.2 Receive side 774 Appendix 1. Correlations 799 Appendix 2. Stationarity 809 Appendix 3. Moments of normal random vectors 815 Bibliography 821 Index 829

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn in-demand cloud computing skills from industry experts Deploying and Managing a Cloud Infrastructure is an excellent resource for IT professionals seeking to tap into the demand for cloud administrators. This book helps prepare candidates for the CompTIA Cloud+ Certification (CV0-001) cloud computing certification exam. Designed for IT professionals with 2-3 years of networking experience, this certification provides validation of your cloud infrastructure knowledge. With over 30 years of combined experience in cloud computing, the author team provides the latest expert perspectives on enterprise-level mobile computing, and covers the most essential topics for building and maintaining cloud-based systems, including: Understanding basic cloud-related computing concepts, terminology, and characteristics Identifying cloud delivery solutions and deploying new infrastructure Managing cloud technologies, services, and networks Table of ContentsIntroduction xxiii Chapter 1 Understanding Cloud Characteristics 1 Basic Terms and Characteristics 2 Elasticity 2 On-Demand Self-service/JIT 3 Templating 4 Pay as You Grow 6 Pay-as-You-Grow Theory vs. Practice 7 Chargeback 8 Ubiquitous Access 9 Metering Resource Pooling 10 Multitenancy 11 Cloud Bursting 13 Rapid Deployment 14 Object Storage Concepts 16 File-Based Data Storage 16 Object Storage 18 Structured vs. Unstructured Data 18 REST APIs 19 Summary 25 Chapter Essentials 26 Chapter 2 To Grasp the Cloud—Fundamental Concepts 27 The True Nature of the Cloud 28 Elastic 29 Massive 29 On Demand 29 Virtualized 30 Secure 30 Always Available 30 Virtualization and Scalability 31 The True Definer of Cloud Computing 32 Serving the Whole World 32 The Cloud Hypervisor 33 Type 1 and Type 2 33 Use Cases and Examples 34 Benefits of Hypervisors 35 Hypervisor Security Concerns 35 Proprietary vs. Open Source 36 Moore’s Law, Increasing Performance, and Decreasing Enterprise Usage 36 Xen Cloud Platform (Open Source) 37 KVM (Open Source) 38 OpenVZ (Open Source) 38 VirtualBox (Open Source) 39 Citrix XenServer (Proprietary) 39 VMware vSphere/ESXi (Proprietary) 39 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Hyper-V 41 Consumer vs. Enterprise Use 41 Workstation vs. Infrastructure 43 Key Benefits of Implementing Hypervisors 46 Shared Resources 46 Elasticity 46 Network and Application Isolation 47 Foundations of Cloud Computing 48 Infrastructure 48 Platform 49 Applications 50 Enabling Services 50 Summary 50 Chapter Essentials 51 Chapter 3 Within the Cloud: Technical Concepts of Cloud Computing 53 Technical Basics of Cloud and Scalable Computing 54 Defining a Data Center 55 Traditional vs. Cloud Hardware 62 Determining Cloud Data Center Hardware and Infrastructure 65 Optimization and the Bottom Line 70 The Cloud Infrastructure 78 Open Source 79 Proprietary 84 Summary 85 Chapter Essentials 86 Chapter 4 Cloud Management 87 Understanding Cloud Management Platforms 88 What It Means for Service Providers 90 Planning Your Cloud 90 Building Your Cloud 94 Running Your Cloud 95 What This Means for Customers 95 Service-Level Agreements 97 Policies and Procedures 97 Planning the Documentation of the Network and IP 98 Implementing Change Management Best Practices 100 Managing the Configuration 105 Managing Cloud Workloads 111 Managing Workloads Right on the Cloud 111 Managing Risk 112 Securing Data in the Cloud 113 Managing Devices 114 Virtualizing the Desktop 115 Enterprise Cloud Solution 116 Summary 116 Chapter Essentials 119 Chapter 5 Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring 121 Performance Concepts 122 Input/Output Operations per Second (IOPS) 123 Read vs. Write Files 124 File System Performance 125 Metadata Performance 127 Caching 130 Bandwidth 131 Throughput: Bandwidth Aggregation 132 Jumbo Frames 134 Network Latency 135 Hop Counts 136 Quality of Service (QoS) 137 Multipathing 137 Load Balancing 138 Scaling: Vertical vs. Horizontal vs. Diagonal 138 Disk Performance 140 Access Time 140 Data Transfer Rate 142 Disk Tuning 143 Swap Disk Space 144 I/O Tuning 144 Performance Management and Monitoring Tools 146 Hypervisor Configuration Best Practices 149 Impact of Configuration Changes 151 Common Issues 152 Summary 153 Chapter Essentials 154 Chapter 6 Cloud Delivery and Hosting Models 157 Private 158 Full Private Cloud Deployment Model 158 Semi-private Cloud Deployment Model 159 Public 160 Hybrid 160 Community 161 On-Premises vs. Off-Premises Hosting 161 On-Premises Hosting 162 Off-Premises Hosting 162 Miscellaneous Factors to Consider When Choosing between On- or Off-Premises Hosting 163 Comparing Total Cost of Ownership 166 Accountability and Responsibility Based on Delivery Models 168 Private Cloud Accountability 168 Public Cloud Accountability 169 Responsibility for Service Impairments 170 Accountability Categories 170 Security Differences between Models 171 Multitenancy Issues 171 Data Segregation 173 Network Isolation 173 Functionality and Performance Validation 174 On-Premises Performance 174 Off-Premises Performance 174 Types of Testing 175 Orchestration Platforms 175 Summary 177 Chapter Essentials 178 Chapter 7 Practical Cloud Knowledge: Install, Configure, and Manage 181 Setting Up the Cloud 183 Creating, Importing, and Exporting Templates and Virtual Machines 183 Creating Virtual Machine Templates 184 Importing and Exporting Service Templates 186 Installing Guest Tools 188 Snapshots and Cloning 189 Image Backups vs. File Backups 193 Virtual Network Interface Card 195 Virtual Disks 198 Virtual Switches 199 Configuring Virtual Machines for Several VLANs 201 Virtual Storage Area Network 203 Virtual Resource Migration 204 Establishing Migration Requirements 204 Migrating Storage 206 Scheduling Maintenance 208 Reasons for Maintenance 208 Virtual Components of the Cloud 209 Virtual Network Components 209 Shared Memory 210 Virtual CPU 211 Storage Virtualization 211 Summary 214 Chapter Essentials 215 Chapter 8 Hardware Management 221 Cloud Hardware Resources 222 BIOS/Firmware Configurations 222 Minimum Memory Capacity and Configuration 223 Number of CPUs 223 Number of Cores 224 NIC Quantity, Speeds, and Configurations 225 Internal Hardware Compatibility 225 Storage Media 226 Proper Allocation of Hardware Resources (Host) 227 Proper Virtual Resource Allocation (Tenant/Client) 232 Management Differences between Public, Private, and Hybrid Clouds 234 Public Cloud Management 234 Private Cloud Management 235 Hybrid Cloud Management 236 Tiering 236 Performance Levels of Each Tier 237 Policies 238 RAID Levels 238 File Systems 239 Summary 241 Chapter Essentials 242 Chapter 9 Storage Provisioning and Networking 245 Cloud Storage Concepts 246 Object Storage 246 Metadata 247 Data/Blob 248 Extended Metadata 248 Replicas 248 Policies and Access Control 248 Understanding SAN and NAS 249 Cloud vs. SAN Storage 250 Cloud Storage 251 Advantages of Cloud Storage 252 Cloud Provisioning 252 Migrating Software Infrastructure to the Cloud 253 Cloud Provisioning Security Concerns 253 Storage Provisioning 255 Network Configurations 256 Network Optimization 259 Cloud Storage Technology 260 Data Replication 261 Amazon Elastic Block Store (EBS) 262 Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) 264 OpenStack Swift 266 Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS) 266 Choosing from among These Technologies 277 Cloud Storage Gateway 278 Cloud Security and Privacy 280 Security, Privacy, and Attack Surface Area 280 Legal Issues (Jurisdiction and Data) 282 Supplier Lifetime (Vendor Lock-In) 283 Summary 284 Chapter Essentials 284 Chapter 10 Testing and Deployment: Quality Is King 287 Overview of Deployment Models 288 Private Cloud 288 Community Cloud 289 Public Cloud 289 Hybrid Cloud 290 Cloud Management Strategies 290 Private Cloud Strategies 291 Community Cloud Strategies 291 Public Cloud Strategies 292 Hybrid Cloud Strategies 292 Management Tools 293 Cloud Architecture 294 The Need for Cloud Architectures 294 Technical Benefits 295 Business Benefits 295 Cloud Deployment Options 296 Environment Provisioning 296 Deploying a Service to the Cloud 298 Deployment Testing and Monitoring 301 Creating and Deploying Cloud Services 304 Creating and Deploying a Cloud Service Using Windows Azure 305 Deploying and Managing a Scalable Web Service with Flume on Amazon EC2 309 Summary 321 Chapter Essentials 322 Chapter 11 Cloud Computing Standards and Security 323 Cloud Computing Standards 324 Why Do Standards Matter? 324 Current Ad Hoc Standards 325 Security Concepts and Tools 326 Security Threats and Attacks 326 Obfuscation 329 Access Control List 329 Virtual Private Network 330 Firewalls 330 Demilitarized Zone 333 Encryption Techniques 334 Public Key Infrastructure 335 Internet Protocol Security 336 Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security 336 Ciphers 337 Access Control Methods 338 Role-Based Access Control 338 Mandatory Access Control 338 Discretionary Access Control 339 Rule-Based Access Controls 339 Multifactor Authentication 339 Single Sign-On 339 Federation 340 Implementing Guest and Host Hardening Techniques 340 Disabling Unneeded Ports and Services 340 Secure User Credentials 343 Antivirus Software 344 Software Security Patching 344 Summary 345 Chapter Essentials 345 Chapter 12 The Cloud Makes It Rain Money: The Business in Cloud Computing 347 The Nature of Cloud Business 348 The Service Nature of the Cloud 348 Making Money with Open-Source Software 349 White Label Branding 350 Cloud Service Business Models 351 Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) 351 Platform as a Service (PaaS) 352 Software as a Service (SaaS) 353 Data as a Service (DaaS) 354 Communication as a Service (CaaS) 355 Monitoring as a Service (MaaS) 355 Business Process as a Service (BPaaS) 355 Anything as a Service (XaaS) 356 Service Model Accountability and Responsibility 356 The Enterprise Cloud 359 Enterprise Applications 359 Cloud Collaboration 360 Collaborating with Telepresence 361 Disaster Recovery 364 Preparing for Failure: Disaster Recovery Plan 365 Backup Sites and Geographical Diversity 366 Change-Over Mechanism: Failover and Failback 369 Business Continuity and Cloud Computing 369 Business Continuity in the Cloud 370 Workshifting in the Cloud 371 Bring Your Own Device 371 Summary 372 Chapter Essentials 373 Chapter 13 Planning for Cloud Integration: Pitfalls and Advantages 375 Work Optimization 376 Optimizing Usage, Capacity, and Cost 376 Which Service Model Is Best for You? 379 The Right Cloud Model 381 Private Cloud 381 Public Cloud 383 Hybrid Cloud 384 Adapting Organizational Culture for the Cloud 385 Finding Out the Current Culture 385 Mapping Out an Adaption Plan 386 Culture Adaption, Propagation, and Maintenance 387 Potholes on the Cloud Road 389 Roadblocks to Planning 389 Convincing the Board 391 Summary 394 Chapter Essentials 394 Appendix The CompTIA Cloud+ Certification Exam 397 Preparing for the Exam 398 Taking the Exam 399 Reviewing the Exam Objectives 400 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers power electronics, in depth, by presenting the basic principles and application details, which can be used both as a textbook and reference book. Introduces a new method to present power electronics converters called Power Blocks Geometry (PBG) Applicable for courses focusing on power electronics, power electronics converters, and advanced power converters Offers a comprehensive set of simulation results to help understand the circuits presented throughout the book Table of ContentsPreface xi Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Background 3 1.3 History of Power Switches and Power Converters 4 1.4 Applications of Power Electronics Converters 6 1.5 Summary 9 References 9 Chapter 2 Power Switches and Overview of Basic Power Converters 10 2.1 Introduction 10 2.2 Power Electronics Devices as Ideal Switches 11 2.2.1 Static Characteristics 12 2.2.2 Dynamic Characteristics 12 2.3 Main Real Power Semiconductor Devices 16 2.3.1 Spontaneous Conduction/Spontaneous Blocking 17 2.3.2 Controlled Conduction/Spontaneous Blocking Devices 18 2.3.3 Controlled Conduction/Controlled Blocking Devices 19 2.3.4 Spontaneous Conduction/Controlled Blocking Devices 22 2.3.5 List of Inventors of the Major Power Switches 24 2.4 Basic Converters 25 2.4.1 dc–dc Conversion 28 2.4.2 dc–ac Conversion 33 2.4.3 ac–dc Conversion 43 2.4.4 ac–dc Conversion 49 2.5 Summary 50 References 52 Chapter 3 Power Electronics Converters Processing AC Voltage and Power Blocks Geometry 56 3.1 Introduction 56 3.2 Principles of Power Blocks Geometry (PBG) 58 3.3 Description of Power Blocks 62 3.4 Application of PBG in Multilevel Configurations 67 3.4.1 Neutral-Point-Clamped Configuration 68 3.4.2 Cascade Configuration 72 3.4.3 Flying Capacitor Configuration 75 3.4.4 Other Multilevel Configurations 79 3.5 Application of PBG in ac–dc–ac Configurations 81 3.5.1 Three-Phase to Three-Phase Configurations 82 3.5.2 Single-Phase to Single-Phase Configurations 85 3.6 Summary 85 References 87 Chapter 4 Neutral-Point-Clamped Configuration 88 4.1 Introduction 88 4.2 Three-Level Configuration 89 4.3 PWM Implementation (Half-Bridge Topology) 93 4.4 Full-Bridge Topologies 95 4.5 Three-Phase NPC Converter 98 4.6 Nonconventional Arrangements by Using Three-Level Legs 101 4.7 Unbalanced Capacitor Voltage 108 4.8 Four-Level Configuration 112 4.9 PWM Implementation (Four-Level Configuration) 115 4.10 Full-Bridge and Other Circuits (Four-Level Configuration) 118 4.11 Five-Level Configuration 119 4.12 Summary 124 References 124 Chapter 5 Cascade Configuration 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 Single H-Bridge Converter 126 5.3 PWM Implementation of a Single H-Bridge Converter 129 5.4 Three-Phase Converter—One H-Bridge Converter Per Phase 140 5.5 Two H-Bridge Converters 144 5.6 PWM Implementation of Two Cascade H-Bridges 146 5.7 Three-Phase Converter—Two Cascade H-Bridges Per Phase 149 5.8 Two H-Bridge Converters (Seven- and Nine-Level Topologies) 162 5.9 Three H-Bridge Converters 164 5.10 Four H-Bridge Converters and Generalization 169 5.11 Summary 169 References 170 Chapter 6 Flying-Capacitor Configuration 172 6.1 Introduction 172 6.2 Three-Level Configuration 173 6.3 PWM Implementation (Half-Bridge Topology) 177 6.4 Flying Capacitor Voltage Control 179 6.5 Full-Bridge Topology 181 6.6 Three-Phase FC Converter 183 6.7 Nonconventional FC Converters with Three-Level Legs 186 6.8 Four-Level Configuration 189 6.9 Generalization 196 6.10 Summary 197 References 198 Chapter 7 Other Multilevel Configurations 199 7.1 Introduction 199 7.2 Nested Configuration 200 7.3 Topology with Magnetic Element at the Output 205 7.4 Active-Neutral-Point-Clamped Converters 211 7.5 More Multilevel Converters 214 7.6 Summary 218 References 219 Chapter 8 Optimized PWM Approach 221 8.1 Introduction 221 8.2 Two-Leg Converter 222 8.2.1 Model 222 8.2.2 PWM Implementation 223 8.2.3 Analog and Digital Implementation 228 8.2.4 Influence of 𝜇 for PWM Implementation 231 8.3 Three-Leg Converter and Three-Phase Load 233 8.3.1 Model 233 8.3.2 PWM Implementation 235 8.3.3 Analog and Digital Implementation 236 8.3.4 Influence of 𝜇 for PWM Implementation in a Three-Leg Converter 236 8.3.5 Influence of the Three-Phase Machine Connection over Inverter Variables 238 8.4 Space Vector Modulation (SVPWM) 243 8.5 Other Configurations with CPWM 247 8.5.1 Three-Leg Converter—Two-Phase Machine 247 8.5.2 Four-Leg Converter 249 8.6 Nonconventional Topologies with CPWM 252 8.6.1 Inverter with Split-Wound Coupled Inductors 252 8.6.2 Z-Source Converter 254 8.6.3 Open-End Winding Motor Drive System 257 8.7 Summary 261 References 261 Chapter 9 Control Strategies for Power Converters 264 9.1 Introduction 264 9.2 Basic Control Principles 265 9.3 Hysteresis Control 271 9.3.1 Application of the Hysteresis Control for dc Motor Drive 275 9.3.2 Hysteresis Control for Regulating an ac Variable 278 9.4 Linear Control—dc Variable 279 9.4.1 Proportional Controller: RL Load 279 9.4.2 Proportional Controller: dc Motor Drive System 280 9.4.3 Proportional-Integral Controller: RL Load 283 9.4.4 Proportional-Integral Controller: dc Motor 285 9.4.5 Proportional-Integral-Derivative Controller: dc Motor 286 9.5 Linear Control—ac Variable 288 9.6 Cascade Control Strategies 289 9.6.1 Rectifier Circuit: Voltage-Current Control 289 9.6.2 Motor Drive: Speed-Current Control 290 9.7 Summary 293 References 293 Chapter 10 Single-Phase to Single-Phase Back-to-Back Converter 295 10.1 Introduction 295 10.2 Full-Bridge Converter 296 10.2.1 Model 296 10.2.2 PWM Strategy 297 10.2.3 Control Approach 298 10.2.4 Power Analysis 299 10.2.5 dc-link Capacitor Voltage 301 10.2.6 Capacitor Bank Design 304 10.3 Topology with Component Count Reduction 307 10.3.1 Model 307 10.3.2 PWM Strategy 308 10.3.3 dc-link Voltage Requirement 309 10.3.4 Half-Bridge Converter 310 10.4 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Parallel) 310 10.4.1 Model 311 10.4.2 PWM Strategy 315 10.4.3 Control Strategy 316 10.5 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Series) 318 10.6 Summary 321 References 321 Chapter 11 Three-Phase to Three-Phase and Other Back-to-Back Converters 324 11.1 Introduction 324 11.2 Full-Bridge Converter 325 11.2.1 Model 325 11.2.2 PWM Strategy 327 11.2.3 Control Approach 328 11.3 Topology with Component Count Reduction 330 11.3.1 Model 330 11.3.2 PWM Strategies 331 11.3.3 dc-link Voltage Requirement 332 11.3.4 Half-Bridge Converter 332 11.4 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Parallel) 332 11.4.1 Model 333 11.4.2 PWM 338 11.4.3 Control Strategies 339 11.5 Topologies with Increased Number of Switches (Converters in Series) 340 11.6 Other Back-To-Back Converters 340 11.7 Summary 344 References 344 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisPractical guide that can be used by executives to make well-informed decisions on cybersecurity issues to better protect their business Emphasizes, in a direct and uncomplicated way, how executives can identify, understand, assess, and mitigate risks associated with cybersecurity issues Covers ''What to Do When You Get Hacked?'' including Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery planning, Public Relations, Legal and Regulatory issues, and Notifications and Disclosures Provides steps for integrating cybersecurity into Strategy; Policy and Guidelines; Change Management and Personnel Management Identifies cybersecurity best practices that executives can and should use both in the office and at home to protect their vital information Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxiii 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Defining Cybersecurity 1 1.2 Cybersecurity is a Business Imperative 2 1.3 Cybersecurity is an Executive-Level Concern 4 1.4 Questions to Ask 4 1.5 Views of Others 7 1.6 Cybersecurity is a Full-Time Activity 7 2.0 Why Be Concerned? 9 2.1 A Classic Hack 9 2.2 Who Wants Your Fortune? 12 2.3 Nation-State Threats 13 2.3.1 China 13 2.3.2 Don’t Think that China is the Only One 17 2.4 Cybercrime is Big Business 20 2.4.1 Mercenary Hackers 20 2.4.2 Hacktivists 25 2.4.3 The Insider Threat 26 2.4.4 Substandard Products and Services 29 2.5 Summary 36 3.0 Managing Risk 37 3.1 Who Owns Risk in Your Business? 37 3.2 What are Your Risks? 38 3.2.1 Threats to Your Intellectual Property and Trade Secrets 38 3.2.2 Technical Risks 42 3.2.3 Human Risks 47 3.3 Calculating Your Risk 54 3.3.1 Quantitative Risk Assessment 55 3.3.2 Qualitative Risk Assessment 63 3.3.3 Risk Decisions 71 3.4 Communicating Risk 77 3.4.1 Communicating Risk Internally 78 3.4.2 Regulatory Communications 79 3.4.3 Communicating with Shareholders 86 3.5 Organizing for Success 89 3.5.1 Risk Management Committee 89 3.5.2 Chief Risk Officers 90 3.6 Summary 91 4.0 Build Your Strategy 95 4.1 How Much “Cybersecurity” Do I Need? 95 4.2 The Mechanics of Building Your Strategy 97 4.2.1 Where are We Now? 99 4.2.2 What do We have to Work with? 103 4.2.3 Where do We Want to be? 104 4.2.4 How do We Get There? 107 4.2.5 Goals and Objectives 108 4.3 Avoiding Strategy Failure 111 4.3.1 Poor Plans, Poor Execution 111 4.3.2 Lack of Communication 113 4.3.3 Resistance to Change 114 4.3.4 Lack of Leadership and Oversight 117 4.4 Ways to Incorporate Cybersecurity into Your Strategy 118 4.4.1 Identify the Information Critical to Your Business 119 4.4.2 Make Cybersecurity Part of Your Culture 119 4.4.3 Consider Cybersecurity Impacts in Your Decisions 119 4.4.4 Measure Your Progress 120 4.5 Plan For Success 121 4.6 Summary 123 5.0 Plan For Success 125 5.1 Turning Vision into Reality 125 5.1.1 Planning for Excellence 127 5.1.2 A Plan of Action 128 5.1.3 Doing Things 131 5.2 Policies Complement Plans 140 5.2.1 Great Cybersecurity Policies for Everyone 140 5.2.2 Be Clear about Your Policies and Who Owns Them 188 5.3 Procedures Implement Plans 190 5.4 Exercise Your Plans 191 5.5 Legal Compliance Concerns 193 5.6 Auditing 195 5.7 Summary 196 6.0 Change Management 199 6.1 Why Managing Change is Important 199 6.2 When to Change? 201 6.3 What is Impacted by Change? 205 6.4 Change Management and Internal Controls 209 6.5 Change Management as a Process 214 6.5.1 The Touhill Change Management Process 215 6.5.2 Following the Process 216 6.5.3 Have a Plan B, Plan C, and maybe a Plan D 220 6.6 Best Practices in Change Management 220 6.7 Summary 224 7.0 Personnel Management 227 7.1 Finding the Right Fit 227 7.2 Creating the Team 229 7.2.1 Picking the Right Leaders 230 7.2.2 Your Cybersecurity Leaders 233 7.3 Establishing Performance Standards 237 7.4 Organizational Considerations 240 7.5 Training for Success 242 7.5.1 Information Every Employee Ought to Know 242 7.5.2 Special Training for Executives 246 7.6 Special Considerations for Critical Infrastructure Protection 249 7.7 Summary 258 8.0 Performance Measures 261 8.1 Why Measure? 261 8.2 What to Measure? 267 8.2.1 Business Drivers 267 8.2.2 Types of Metrics 271 8.3 Metrics and the C-Suite 272 8.3.1 Considerations for the C-Suite 273 8.3.2 Questions about Cybersecurity Executives Should Ask 275 8.4 The Executive Cybersecurity Dashboard 277 8.4.1 How Vulnerable Are We? 277 8.4.2 How Effective Are Our Systems and Processes? 282 8.4.3 Do We Have the Right People, Are They Properly Trained, and Are They Following Proper Procedures? 286 8.4.4 Am I Spending the Right Amount on Security? 287 8.4.5 How Do We Compare to Others? 288 8.4.6 Creating Your Executive Cybersecurity Dashboard 289 8.5 Summary 291 9.0 What To Do When You Get Hacked 293 9.1 Hackers Already Have You Under Surveillance 293 9.2 Things to do Before it’s Too Late: Preparing for the Hack 295 9.2.1 Back Up Your Information 296 9.2.2 Baseline and Define What is Normal 296 9.2.3 Protect Yourself with Insurance 297 9.2.4 Create Your Disaster Recovery and Business Continuity Plan 298 9.3 What to do When Bad Things Happen: Implementing Your Plan 299 9.3.1 Item 1: Don’t Panic 300 9.3.2 Item 2: Make Sure You’ve Been Hacked 301 9.3.3 Item 3: Gain Control 302 9.3.4 Item 4: Reset All Passwords 303 9.3.5 Item 5: Verify and Lock Down All Your External Links 304 9.3.6 Item 6: Update and Scan 305 9.3.7 Item 7: Assess the Damage 305 9.3.8 Item 8: Make Appropriate Notifications 307 9.3.9 Item 9: Find Out Why It Happened and Who Did It 309 9.3.10 Item 10: Adjust Your Defenses 310 9.4 Foot Stompers 310 9.4.1 The Importance of Public Relations 310 9.4.2 Working with Law Enforcement 315 9.4.3 Addressing Liability 317 9.4.4 Legal Issues to Keep an Eye On 318 9.5 Fool Me Once… 319 9.6 Summary 320 10.0 Boardroom Interactions 323 Appendix A: Policies 347 Appendix B: General Rules for Email Etiquette: Sample Training Handout 357 Glossary 361 Select Bibliography 371 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines the governance challenges of cybersecurity through twelve, real-world case studies Through twelve detailed case studies, this superb collection provides an overview of the ways in which government officials and corporate leaders across the globe are responding to the challenges of cybersecurity. Drawing perspectives from industry, government, and academia, the book incisively analyzes the actual issues, and provides a guide to the continually evolving cybersecurity ecosystem. It charts the role that corporations, policymakers, and technologists are playing in defining the contours of our digital world. Rewired: Cybersecurity Governance places great emphasis on the interconnection of law, policy, and technology in cyberspace. It examines some of the competing organizational efforts and institutions that are attempting to secure cyberspace and considers the broader implications of the in-place and unfolding effortstracing how different notions of cTable of ContentsNotes on Contributors xi Acknowledgments xv Introduction xvii 1 Cybersecurity Information‐Sharing Governance Structures: An Ecosystem of Diversity, Trust, and Trade‐offs 1Elaine Sedenberg and Jim Dempsey 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Taxonomy of Information‐sharing Governance Structures and Policies 4 1.2.1 Government‐centric Sharing Models 4 1.2.2 Government‐Prompted, Industry‐Centric Sharing Models 8 1.2.3 Corporate‐initiated, Peer‐based Groups 10 1.2.4 Small, Highly Vetted, Individual‐based Groups 10 1.2.5 Open Communities and Platforms 11 1.2.6 Proprietary Products and Commercialized Services 12 1.3 Discussion and Conclusions 13 1.3.1 Trust and the Trade‐offs 13 1.3.2 The Ecosystem and the Role of the Federal Government 14 Acknowledgments 15 Notes 15 2 Cybersecurity Governance in the GCC 19James Shires 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Why the GCC? 20 2.3 Key Cybersecurity Incidents 21 2.4 Government Organizations 22 2.5 Strategies, Laws, and Standards 24 2.6 The Cybersecurity Industry 26 2.7 Conclusion 28 Acknowledgments 29 Notes 29 3 The United Kingdom’s Emerging Internet of Things (IoT) Policy Landscape 37Leonie Maria Tanczer, Irina Brass, Miles Elsden, Madeline Carr, and Jason Blackstock 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 The IoT’s Risks and Uncertainties 39 3.3 Adaptive Policymaking in the Context of IoT 41 3.4 The UK Policy Landscape 42 3.5 The IoT and its Governance Challenges 46 3.6 Conclusion 48 Notes 49 4 Birds of a Feather: Strategies for Collective Cybersecurity in the Aviation Ecosystem 57Emilian Papadopoulos and Evan Sills 4.1 Introduction: The Challenge of Ecosystem Risk 57 4.1.1 Aviation Is a National and Global Target 58 4.1.1.1 The Cyber Harm 59 4.1.1.2 Economic Harm 60 4.1.1.3 Political/Governmental Harm 60 4.1.1.4 Reputational Harm 60 4.1.1.5 Physical Harm 61 4.1.1.6 Psychological and Emotional Harm 61 4.1.2 Domestic and International Challenges of Aviation Governance 61 4.2 Progress So Far 63 4.2.1 The AIAA’s Decision Paper, “The Connectivity Challenge: Protecting Critical Assets in a Networked World” (August 2013) 64 4.2.2 The Aviation Information Sharing and Analysis Center (A‐ISAC) (September 2014) 66 4.2.3 The Civil Aviation Cybersecurity Action Plan (December 2014) 66 4.2.4 Connecting the Dots on Connectivity (2015) 67 4.2.5 Hackers Allege Aircraft Vulnerabilities (2015) 67 4.2.6 United Airlines Opens Bug Bounty Program (2015) 68 4.2.7 Aviation Security World Conference (2015) 68 4.2.8 Conferences and Organizations Mature (2015 and Beyond) 69 4.2.9 Industry Takes the Lead (2017) 70 4.3 Aviation’s Tools for Cyber Risk Governance 70 4.4 The Path Forward 71 4.4.1 Collective Third‐Party Risk Management 71 4.4.2 Secure Design 72 4.4.3 Information Sharing, “Plus” 73 4.4.4 International Norms and Standards 74 4.5 Conclusion 75 Notes 75 5 An Incident‐Based Conceptualization of Cybersecurity Governance 81Jacqueline Eggenschwiler 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Conceptualizing Cybersecurity Governance 82 5.3 Case Studies 84 5.3.1 RUAG 84 5.3.1.1 Background 84 5.3.1.2 Events 85 5.3.1.3 Learnings 86 5.3.2 The Conficker Working Group 86 5.3.2.1 Background 86 5.3.2.2 Events 86 5.3.2.3 Learnings 88 5.3.3 Symantec’s Cybersecurity Practices 89 5.3.3.1 Background 89 5.3.3.2 Events 89 5.3.3.3 Learnings 89 5.4 Utility and Limitations 90 5.5 Conclusion 92 Notes 92 6 Cyber Governance and the Financial Services Sector: The Role of Public–Private Partnerships 97Valeria San Juan and Aaron Martin 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Governance, Security, and Critical Infrastructure Protection 98 6.3 Financial Services Information Sharing and Analysis Center 100 6.4 Financial Services Sector Coordinating Council 104 6.5 Financial Systemic Analysis and Resilience Center 108 6.6 Lessons for Cybersecurity Governance 109 6.6.1 Lesson One: Affirmation of PPP Model, but Focus and Clarity Needed 109 6.6.2 Lesson Two: Addressing Systemic Risk Requires more than Just Information Sharing 110 6.6.3 Lesson Three: Limitations of PPPs in Regulated Industries 111 6.7 Conclusion 111 Acknowledgments 111 Notes 112 7 The Regulation of Botnets: How Does Cybersecurity Governance Theory Work When Everyone Is a Stakeholder? 117Samantha A. Adams, Karine e Silva, Bert‐Jaap Koops, and Bart van der Sloot 7.1 Introduction 117 7.2 Cybersecurity 119 7.3 Botnets 121 7.3.1 Preventing New Infections 122 7.3.2 Mitigating Existing Botnets 122 7.3.3 Minimizing Criminal Profit 123 7.4 Governance Theory 124 7.5 Discussion: Governance Theory Applied to Botnet Mitigation 127 7.6 Conclusion 132 Acknowledgment 133 Notes 133 8 Governing Risk: The Emergence of Cyber Insurance 137Trey Herr 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Where Did Cyber Insurance Come From? 139 8.2.1 Understanding Insurance 140 8.2.2 Risk Pool 140 8.2.3 Premiums 140 8.2.4 Insurer 141 8.2.5 Insurable Risk 141 8.2.6 Comparisons to Terrorism 142 8.3 Security Standards in the Governance Process 143 8.3.1 Government‐Developed Standards 144 8.3.2 Private Sector Standards 145 8.4 The Key Role of Risk 146 8.5 Enforcing Standards: Insurance Becomes Governance 147 8.5.1 Model of Modern Market Governance 148 8.5.2 Cyber Insurance: Governing Risk Through Standard Setting and Enforcement 149 8.6 Conclusion and Implications 151 Notes 153 9 Containing Conficker: A Public Health Approach 157Michael Thornton 9.1 Introduction 157 9.2 The Conficker Infection 158 9.3 A Public Health Alternative 162 9.3.1 Populations, Not Individuals 162 9.3.2 Shared and Overlapping Problems 163 9.3.3 Balancing Efficacy and Individual Rights 166 9.4 A Public Health Approach to Conficker 169 9.5 Conclusion 171 Notes 171 10 Bug Bounty Programs: Institutional Variation and the Different Meanings of Security 175Andreas Kuehn and Ryan Ellis 10.1 Introduction: Conspicuously Absent 175 10.2 Scope and Aims 176 10.3 A Market for Flaws: Bug Bounty Programs 177 10.3.1 Case I, Microsoft: Rethinking the Market for Flaws 178 10.3.2 Case II, Google: Matching the Wisdom of Crowds and the Wisdom of Experts 180 10.3.3 Case III, Facebook: Transaction Costs and Reputational Benefits 183 10.4 Conclusion 185 Notes 188 11 Rethinking Data, Geography, and Jurisdiction: A Common Framework for Harmonizing Global Data Flow Controls 195Jonah Force Hill and Matthew Noyes 11.1 Introduction 195 11.2 The Challenge of Extraterritorial Data 197 11.2.1 The Challenge to Law Enforcement 197 11.2.2 Alternative Approaches to MLATs 201 11.2.3 The Challenge to Regulators 203 11.2.3.1 Content and Speech 203 11.2.3.2 Privacy and Data Protection 205 11.3 The Threat of Data Localization 206 11.4 A New Approach to Data Flow Controls 207 11.4.1 Control Points Analysis 208 11.4.2 A Common Framework for Data Flow Controls 209 11.5 Recommendations 212 11.5.1 Recommendation One: Establish a Common Framework for Data Flow Controls Through the Development of International Standards, Norms, and Principles 212 11.5.2 Recommendation Two: Formalize Agreed‐upon Standards, Norms, and Principles Through the Adoption of Voluntary and Treaty‐Based International Agreements 214 11.5.3 Recommendation Three: Reform Domestic Law and Policy Frameworks Consistent with Agreed‐upon Standards, Norms, and Principles 215 11.5.4 Recommendation Four: Focus First on Specific Policy Matters of Broad International Consensus, Then Move on to the more Contentious Issues 216 11.6 Additional Challenges 217 11.7 Conclusion 218 Acknowledgments 218 Notes 219 12 Private Ordering Shaping Cybersecurity Policy: The Case of Bug Bounties 231Amit Elazari Bar On 12.1 Introduction 231 12.2 Are Bug Bounties Operating as a “Private” Safe Harbor? Key Findings of the Legal Terms Survey 234 12.2.1 The Bug Bounty Economy Anti‐Hacking Legal Landscape 234 12.2.1.1 The CFAA 234 12.2.1.2 The DMCA 235 12.2.1.3 The Department of Justice Framework for a Vulnerability Disclosure Program for Online Systems 235 12.2.2 Bug Bounty Legal Terms: General Structure 236 12.2.3 The Bug Bounty Catch 22 238 12.2.4 Safe Harbor Language Matters 240 12.3 Policy Recommendations: Toward a Private Safe Harbor 242 12.3.1 Increase of Terms Salience 242 12.3.2 Clear Safe Harbor Language 243 12.3.3 Standardization of Bug Bounty Legal Terms Across Platforms, Industries, and Sponsors 244 12.3.4 Improved Disclosures and Educational Efforts 245 12.3.5 Individual Hackers as Collective Bargainers 246 12.4 Conclusion 246 Acknowledgments 247 Notes 247 Bibliography 265 Index 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a comprehensive study on OPS networks, its architectures, and developed techniques for improving its quality of switching and managing quality of service.Table of ContentsList of Figures xix List of Tables xxxv Preface xxxvii References xli Acknowledgments xliii Acronyms xlv Glossary li List of Symbols liii 1 Introduction to Optical Packet Switched (OPS) Networks 1 1.1 Optical Fiber Technology 1 1.2 Why Optical Networks? 5 1.3 Optical Networking Mechanisms 7 1.4 Overview of OPS Networking 19 1.5 Optical OFDM based Elastic Optical Networking (EON) 44 1.6 Summary 55 References 57 2 Contention Avoidance in OPS Networks 67 2.1 Software based Contention Avoidance Schemes 68 2.2 Hardware based Schemes 121 2.3 Formulation of Even Traffic Transmission in Slotted OPS 128 2.4 Summary 141 References 143 3 Contention Resolution in OPS Networks 149 3.1 Hardware based Contention Resolution Schemes 150 3.2 Software based Contention Resolution Schemes 204 3.3 Summary 224 References 225 4 Hybrid Contention Avoidance/Resolution in OPS Networks 233 4.1 Hybrid Contention Resolution Schemes 234 4.2 Hybrid Contention Resolution and Avoidance Schemes 244 4.3 Summary 283 References 285 5 Hybrid OPS Networks 289 5.1 Hybrid Asynchronous and Synchronous OPS Networks 290 5.2 Hybrid OPS and OCS Networks 291 5.3 Comparison of Hybrid OPS Schemes 310 5.4 Summary 311 References 313 6 Metro OPS Networks 317 6.1 OPS in Star Topology 317 6.2 OPS in Ring Topology 372 6.3 Summary 382 References 383

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of high-performance pattern recognition techniques and approaches to Computational Molecular Biology This book surveys the developments of techniques and approaches on pattern recognition related to Computational Molecular Biology. Providing a broad coverage of the field, the authors cover fundamental and technical information on these techniques and approaches, as well as discussing their related problems. The text consists of twenty nine chapters, organized into seven parts: Pattern Recognition in Sequences, Pattern Recognition in Secondary Structures, Pattern Recognition in Tertiary Structures, Pattern Recognition in Quaternary Structures, Pattern Recognition in Microarrays, Pattern Recognition in Phylogenetic Trees, and Pattern Recognition in Biological Networks. Surveys the development of techniques and approaches on pattern recognition in biomolecular data Discusses pattern recognitTable of ContentsLIST OF CONTRIBUTORS xxi PREFACE xxvii I PATTERN RECOGNITION IN SEQUENCES 1 1 COMBINATORIAL HAPLOTYPING PROBLEMS 3Giuseppe Lancia 1.1 Introduction / 3 1.2 Single Individual Haplotyping / 5 1.2.1 The Minimum Error Correction Model / 8 1.2.2 Probabilistic Approaches and Alternative Models / 10 1.3 Population Haplotyping / 12 1.3.1 Clark’s Rule / 14 1.3.2 Pure Parsimony / 15 1.3.3 Perfect Phylogeny / 19 1.3.4 Disease Association / 21 1.3.5 Other Models / 22 References / 23 2 ALGORITHMIC PERSPECTIVES OF THE STRING BARCODING PROBLEMS 28Sima Behpour and Bhaskar DasGupta 2.1 Introduction / 28 2.2 Summary of Algorithmic Complexity Results for Barcoding Problems / 32 2.2.1 Average Length of Optimal Barcodes / 33 2.3 Entropy-Based Information Content Technique for Designing Approximation Algorithms for String Barcoding Problems / 34 2.4 Techniques for Proving Inapproximability Results for String Barcoding Problems / 36 2.4.1 Reductions from Set Covering Problem / 36 2.4.2 Reduction from Graph-Coloring Problem / 38 2.5 Heuristic Algorithms for String Barcoding Problems / 39 2.5.1 Entropy-Based Method with a Different Measure for Information Content / 39 2.5.2 Balanced Partitioning Approach / 40 2.6 Conclusion / 40 Acknowledgments / 41 References / 41 3 ALIGNMENT-FREE MEASURES FOR WHOLE-GENOME COMPARISON 43Matteo Comin and Davide Verzotto 3.1 Introduction / 43 3.2 Whole-Genome Sequence Analysis / 44 3.2.1 Background on Whole-Genome Comparison / 44 3.2.2 Alignment-Free Methods / 45 3.2.3 Average Common Subword / 46 3.2.4 Kullback–Leibler Information Divergence / 47 3.3 Underlying Approach / 47 3.3.1 Irredundant Common Subwords / 48 3.3.2 Underlying Subwords / 49 3.3.3 Efficient Computation of Underlying Subwords / 50 3.3.4 Extension to Inversions and Complements / 53 3.3.5 A Distance-Like Measure Based on Underlying Subwords / 53 3.4 Experimental Results / 54 3.4.1 Genome Data sets and Reference Taxonomies / 54 3.4.2 Whole-Genome Phylogeny Reconstruction / 56 3.5 Conclusion / 61 Author’s Contributions / 62 Acknowledgments / 62 References / 62 4 A MAXIMUM LIKELIHOOD FRAMEWORK FOR MULTIPLE SEQUENCE LOCAL ALIGNMENT 65Chengpeng Bi 4.1 Introduction / 65 4.2 Multiple Sequence Local Alignment / 67 4.2.1 Overall Objective Function / 67 4.2.2 Maximum Likelihood Model / 68 4.3 Motif Finding Algorithms / 70 4.3.1 DEM Motif Algorithm / 70 4.3.2 WEM Motif Finding Algorithm / 70 4.3.3 Metropolis Motif Finding Algorithm / 72 4.3.4 Gibbs Motif Finding Algorithm / 73 4.3.5 Pseudo-Gibbs Motif Finding Algorithm / 74 4.4 Time Complexity / 75 4.5 Case Studies / 75 4.5.1 Performance Evaluation / 76 4.5.2 CRP Binding Sites / 76 4.5.3 Multiple Motifs in Helix–Turn–Helix Protein Structure / 78 4.6 Conclusion / 80 References / 81 5 GLOBAL SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT WITH A BOUNDED NUMBER OF GAPS 83Carl Barton, Tomáš Flouri, Costas S. Iliopoulos, and Solon P. Pissis 5.1 Introduction / 83 5.2 Definitions and Notation / 85 5.3 Problem Definition / 87 5.4 Algorithms / 88 5.5 Conclusion / 94 References / 95 II PATTERN RECOGNITION IN SECONDARY STRUCTURES 97 6 A SHORT REVIEW ON PROTEIN SECONDARY STRUCTURE PREDICTION METHODS 99Renxiang Yan, Jiangning Song, Weiwen Cai, and Ziding Zhang 6.1 Introduction / 99 6.2 Representative Protein Secondary Structure Prediction Methods / 102 6.2.1 Chou–Fasman / 103 6.2.2 GOR / 104 6.2.3 PHD / 104 6.2.4 PSIPRED / 104 6.2.5 SPINE-X / 105 6.2.6 PSSpred / 105 6.2.7 Meta Methods / 105 6.3 Evaluation of Protein Secondary Structure Prediction Methods / 106 6.3.1 Measures / 106 6.3.2 Benchmark / 106 6.3.3 Performances / 107 6.4 Conclusion / 110 Acknowledgments / 110 References / 111 7 A GENERIC APPROACH TO BIOLOGICAL SEQUENCE SEGMENTATION PROBLEMS: APPLICATION TO PROTEIN SECONDARY STRUCTURE PREDICTION 114Yann Guermeur and Fabien Lauer 7.1 Introduction / 114 7.2 Biological Sequence Segmentation / 115 7.3 MSVMpred / 117 7.3.1 Base Classifiers / 117 7.3.2 Ensemble Methods / 118 7.3.3 Convex Combination / 119 7.4 Postprocessing with A Generative Model / 119 7.5 Dedication to Protein Secondary Structure Prediction / 120 7.5.1 Biological Problem / 121 7.5.2 MSVMpred2 / 121 7.5.3 Hidden Semi-Markov Model / 122 7.5.4 Experimental Results / 122 7.6 Conclusions and Ongoing Research / 125 Acknowledgments / 126 References / 126 8 STRUCTURAL MOTIF IDENTIFICATION AND RETRIEVAL: A GEOMETRICAL APPROACH 129Virginio Cantoni, Marco Ferretti, Mirto Musci, and Nahumi Nugrahaningsih 8.1 Introduction / 129 8.2 A Few Basic Concepts / 130 8.2.1 Hierarchy of Protein Structures / 130 8.2.2 Secondary Structure Elements / 131 8.2.3 Structural Motifs / 132 8.2.4 Available Sources for Protein Data / 134 8.3 State of the Art / 135 8.3.1 Protein Structure Motif Search / 135 8.3.2 Promotif / 136 8.3.3 Secondary-Structure Matching / 137 8.3.4 Multiple Structural Alignment by Secondary Structures / 138 8.4 A Novel Geometrical Approach to Motif Retrieval / 138 8.4.1 Secondary Structures Cooccurrences / 138 8.4.2 Cross Motif Search / 143 8.4.3 Complete Cross Motif Search / 146 8.5 Implementation Notes / 149 8.5.1 Optimizations / 149 8.5.2 Parallel Approaches / 150 8.6 Conclusions and Future Work / 151 Acknowledgment / 152 References / 152 9 GENOME-WIDE SEARCH FOR PSEUDOKNOTTED NONCODING RNAs: A COMPARATIVE STUDY 155Meghana Vasavada, Kevin Byron, Yang Song, and Jason T.L. Wang 9.1 Introduction / 155 9.2 Background / 156 9.2.1 Noncoding RNAs and Their Secondary Structures / 156 9.2.2 Pseudoknotted ncRNA Search Tools / 157 9.3 Methodology / 157 9.4 Results and Interpretation / 161 9.5 Conclusion / 162 References / 163 III PATTERN RECOGNITION IN TERTIARY STRUCTURES 165 10 MOTIF DISCOVERY IN PROTEIN 3D-STRUCTURES USING GRAPH MINING TECHNIQUES 167Wajdi Dhifli and Engelbert Mephu Nguifo 10.1 Introduction / 167 10.2 From Protein 3D-Structures to Protein Graphs / 169 10.2.1 Parsing Protein 3D-Structures into Graphs / 169 10.3 Graph Mining / 172 10.4 Subgraph Mining / 173 10.5 Frequent Subgraph Discovery / 173 10.5.1 Problem Definition / 174 10.5.2 Candidates Generation / 176 10.5.3 Frequent Subgraph Discovery Approaches / 177 10.5.4 Variants of Frequent Subgraph Mining: Closed and Maximal Subgraphs / 178 10.6 Feature Selection / 179 10.6.1 Relevance of a Feature / 179 10.7 Feature Selection for Subgraphs / 180 10.7.1 Problem Statement / 180 10.7.2 Mining Top-k Subgraphs / 180 10.7.3 Clustering-Based Subgraph Selection / 181 10.7.4 Sampling-Based Approaches / 181 10.7.5 Approximate Subgraph Mining / 181 10.7.6 Discriminative Subgraph Selection / 182 10.7.7 Other Significant Subgraph Selection Approaches / 182 10.8 Discussion / 183 10.9 Conclusion / 185 Acknowledgments / 185 References / 186 11 FUZZY AND UNCERTAIN LEARNING TECHNIQUES FOR THE ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION OF PROTEIN TERTIARY STRUCTURES 190Chinua Umoja, Xiaxia Yu, and Robert Harrison 11.1 Introduction / 190 11.2 Genetic Algorithms / 192 11.2.1 GA Model Selection in Protein Structure Prediction / 196 11.2.2 Common Methodology / 198 11.3 Supervised Machine Learning Algorithm / 201 11.3.1 Artificial Neural Networks / 201 11.3.2 ANNs in Protein Structure Prediction / 202 11.3.3 Support Vector Machines / 203 11.4 Fuzzy Application / 204 11.4.1 Fuzzy Logic / 204 11.4.2 Fuzzy SVMs / 204 11.4.3 Adaptive-Network-Based Fuzzy Inference Systems / 205 11.4.4 Fuzzy Decision Trees / 206 11.5 Conclusion / 207 References / 208 12 PROTEIN INTER-DOMAIN LINKER PREDICTION 212Maad Shatnawi, Paul D. Yoo, and Sami Muhaidat 12.1 Introduction / 212 12.2 Protein Structure Overview / 213 12.3 Technical Challenges and Open Issues / 214 12.4 Prediction Assessment / 215 12.5 Current Approaches / 216 12.5.1 DomCut / 216 12.5.2 Scooby-Domain / 217 12.5.3 FIEFDom / 218 12.5.4 Chatterjee et al. (2009) / 219 12.5.5 Drop / 219 12.6 Domain Boundary Prediction Using Enhanced General Regression Network / 220 12.6.1 Multi-Domain Benchmark Data Set / 220 12.6.2 Compact Domain Profile / 221 12.6.3 The Enhanced Semi-Parametric Model / 222 12.6.4 Training, Testing, and Validation / 225 12.6.5 Experimental Results / 226 12.7 Inter-Domain Linkers Prediction Using Compositional Index and Simulated Annealing / 227 12.7.1 Compositional Index / 228 12.7.2 Detecting the Optimal Set of Threshold Values Using Simulated Annealing / 229 12.7.3 Experimental Results / 230 12.8 Conclusion / 232 References / 233 13 PREDICTION OF PROLINE CIS–TRANS ISOMERIZATION 236Paul D. Yoo, Maad Shatnawi, Sami Muhaidat, Kamal Taha, and Albert Y. Zomaya 13.1 Introduction / 236 13.2 Methods / 238 13.2.1 Evolutionary Data Set Construction / 238 13.2.2 Protein Secondary Structure Information / 239 13.2.3 Method I: Intelligent Voting / 239 13.2.4 Method II: Randomized Meta-Learning / 241 13.2.5 Model Validation and Testing / 242 13.2.6 Parameter Tuning / 242 13.3 Model Evaluation and Analysis / 243 13.4 Conclusion / 245 References / 245 IV PATTERN RECOGNITION IN QUATERNARY STRUCTURES 249 14 PREDICTION OF PROTEIN QUATERNARY STRUCTURES 251Akbar Vaseghi, Maryam Faridounnia, Soheila Shokrollahzade, Samad Jahandideh, and Kuo-Chen Chou 14.1 Introduction / 251 14.2 Protein Structure Prediction / 255 14.2.1 Secondary Structure Prediction / 255 14.2.2 Modeling of Tertiary Structure / 256 14.3 Template-Based Predictions / 257 14.3.1 Homology Modeling / 257 14.3.2 Threading Methods / 257 14.3.3 Ab initio Modeling / 257 14.4 Critical Assessment of Protein Structure Prediction / 258 14.5 Quaternary Structure Prediction / 258 14.6 Conclusion / 261 Acknowledgments / 261 References / 261 15 COMPARISON OF PROTEIN QUATERNARY STRUCTURES BY GRAPH APPROACHES 266Sheng-Lung Peng and Yu-Wei Tsay 15.1 Introduction / 266 15.2 Similarity in the Graph Model / 268 15.2.1 Graph Model for Proteins / 270 15.3 Measuring Structural Similarity VIA MCES / 272 15.3.1 Problem Formulation / 273 15.3.2 Constructing P-Graphs / 274 15.3.3 Constructing Line Graphs / 276 15.3.4 Constructing Modular Graphs / 276 15.3.5 Maximum Clique Detection / 277 15.3.6 Experimental Results / 277 15.4 Protein Comparison VIA Graph Spectra / 279 15.4.1 Graph Spectra / 279 15.4.2 Matrix Selection / 281 15.4.3 Graph Cospectrality and Similarity / 283 15.4.4 Cospectral Comparison / 283 15.4.5 Experimental Results / 284 15.5 Conclusion / 287 References / 287 16 STRUCTURAL DOMAINS IN PREDICTION OF BIOLOGICAL PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTIONS 291Mina Maleki, Michael Hall, and Luis Rueda 16.1 Introduction / 291 16.2 Structural Domains / 293 16.3 The Prediction Framework / 293 16.4 Feature Extraction and Prediction Properties / 294 16.4.1 Physicochemical Properties / 296 16.4.2 Domain-Based Properties / 298 16.5 Feature Selection / 299 16.5.1 Filter Methods / 299 16.5.2 Wrapper Methods / 301 16.6 Classification / 301 16.6.1 Linear Dimensionality Reduction / 301 16.6.2 Support Vector Machines / 303 16.6.3 k-Nearest Neighbor / 303 16.6.4 Naive Bayes / 304 16.7 Evaluation and Analysis / 304 16.8 Results and Discussion / 304 16.8.1 Analysis of the Prediction Properties / 304 16.8.2 Analysis of Structural DDIs / 307 16.9 Conclusion / 309 References / 310 V PATTERN RECOGNITION IN MICROARRAYS 315 17 CONTENT-BASED RETRIEVAL OF MICROARRAY EXPERIMENTS 317Hasan O¢gul 17.1 Introduction / 317 17.2 Information Retrieval: Terminology and Background / 318 17.3 Content-Based Retrieval / 320 17.4 Microarray Data and Databases / 322 17.5 Methods for Retrieving Microarray Experiments / 324 17.6 Similarity Metrics / 327 17.7 Evaluating Retrieval Performance / 329 17.8 Software Tools / 330 17.9 Conclusion and Future Directions / 331 Acknowledgment / 332 References / 332 18 EXTRACTION OF DIFFERENTIALLY EXPRESSED GENES IN MICROARRAY DATA 335Tiratha Raj Singh, Brigitte Vannier, and Ahmed Moussa 18.1 Introduction / 335 18.2 From Microarray Image to Signal / 336 18.2.1 Signal from Oligo DNA Array Image / 336 18.2.2 Signal from Two-Color cDNA Array / 337 18.3 Microarray Signal Analysis / 337 18.3.1 Absolute Analysis and Replicates in Microarrays / 338 18.3.2 Microarray Normalization / 339 18.4 Algorithms for De Gene Selection / 339 18.4.1 Within–Between DE Gene (WB-DEG) Selection Algorithm / 340 18.4.2 Comparison of the WB-DEGs with Two Classical DE Gene Selection Methods on Latin Square Data / 341 18.5 Gene Ontology Enrichment and Gene Set Enrichment Analysis / 343 18.6 Conclusion / 345 References / 345 19 CLUSTERING AND CLASSIFICATION TECHNIQUES FOR GENE EXPRESSION PROFILE PATTERN ANALYSIS 347Emanuel Weitschek, Giulia Fiscon, Valentina Fustaino, Giovanni Felici, and Paola Bertolazzi 19.1 Introduction / 347 19.2 Transcriptome Analysis / 348 19.3 Microarrays / 349 19.3.1 Applications / 349 19.3.2 Microarray Technology / 350 19.3.3 Microarray Workflow / 350 19.4 RNA-Seq / 351 19.5 Benefits and Drawbacks of RNA-Seq and Microarray Technologies / 353 19.6 Gene Expression Profile Analysis / 356 19.6.1 Data Definition / 356 19.6.2 Data Analysis / 357 19.6.3 Normalization and Background Correction / 357 19.6.4 Genes Clustering / 359 19.6.5 Experiment Classification / 361 19.6.6 Software Tools for Gene Expression Profile Analysis / 362 19.7 Real Case Studies / 364 19.8 Conclusions / 367 References / 368 20 MINING INFORMATIVE PATTERNS IN MICROARRAY DATA 371Li Teng 20.1 Introduction / 371 20.2 Patterns with Similarity / 373 20.2.1 Similarity Measurement / 374 20.2.2 Clustering / 376 20.2.3 Biclustering / 379 20.2.4 Types of Biclusters / 380 20.2.5 Measurement of the Homogeneity / 383 20.2.6 Biclustering Algorithms with Different Searching Schemes / 387 20.3 Conclusion / 391 References / 391 21 ARROW PLOT AND CORRESPONDENCE ANALYSIS MAPS FOR VISUALIZING THE EFFECTS OF BACKGROUND CORRECTION AND NORMALIZATION METHODS ON MICROARRAY DATA 394Carina Silva, Adelaide Freitas, Sara Roque, and Lisete Sousa 21.1 Overview / 394 21.1.1 Background Correction Methods / 395 21.1.2 Normalization Methods / 396 21.1.3 Literature Review / 397 21.2 Arrow Plot / 399 21.2.1 DE Genes Versus Special Genes / 399 21.2.2 Definition and Properties of the ROC Curve / 400 21.2.3 AUC and Degenerate ROC Curves / 401 21.2.4 Overlapping Coefficient / 402 21.2.5 Arrow Plot Construction / 403 21.3 Significance Analysis of Microarrays / 404 21.4 Correspondence Analysis / 405 21.4.1 Basic Principles / 405 21.4.2 Interpretation of CA Maps / 406 21.5 Impact of the Preprocessing Methods / 407 21.5.1 Class Prediction Context / 408 21.5.2 Class Comparison Context / 408 21.6 Conclusions / 412 Acknowledgments / 413 References / 413 VI PATTERN RECOGNITION IN PHYLOGENETIC TREES 417 22 PATTERN RECOGNITION IN PHYLOGENETICS: TREES AND NETWORKS 419David A. Morrison 22.1 Introduction / 419 22.2 Networks and Trees / 420 22.3 Patterns and Their Processes / 424 22.4 The Types of Patterns / 427 22.5 Fingerprints / 431 22.6 Constructing Networks / 433 22.7 Multi-Labeled Trees / 435 22.8 Conclusion / 436 References / 437 23 DIVERSE CONSIDERATIONS FOR SUCCESSFUL PHYLOGENETIC TREE RECONSTRUCTION: IMPACTS FROM MODEL MISSPECIFICATION, RECOMBINATION, HOMOPLASY, AND PATTERN RECOGNITION 439Diego Mallo, Agustín Sánchez-Cobos, and Miguel Arenas 23.1 Introduction / 440 23.2 Overview on Methods and Frameworks for Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction / 440 23.2.1 Inferring Gene Trees / 441 23.2.2 Inferring Species Trees / 442 23.3 Influence of Substitution Model Misspecification on Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction / 445 23.4 Influence of Recombination on Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction / 446 23.5 Influence of Diverse Evolutionary Processes on Species Tree Reconstruction / 447 23.6 Influence of Homoplasy on Phylogenetic Tree Reconstruction: The Goals of Pattern Recognition / 449 23.7 Concluding Remarks / 449 Acknowledgments / 450 References / 450 24 AUTOMATED PLAUSIBILITY ANALYSIS OF LARGE PHYLOGENIES 457David Dao, Tomáš Flouri, and Alexandros Stamatakis 24.1 Introduction / 457 24.2 Preliminaries / 459 24.3 A Naïve Approach / 462 24.4 Toward a Faster Method / 463 24.5 Improved Algorithm / 467 24.5.1 Preprocessing / 467 24.5.2 Computing Lowest Common Ancestors / 468 24.5.3 Constructing the Induced Tree / 468 24.5.4 Final Remarks / 471 24.6 Implementation / 473 24.6.1 Preprocessing / 473 24.6.2 Reconstruction / 473 24.6.3 Extracting Bipartitions / 474 24.7 Evaluation / 474 24.7.1 Test Data Sets / 474 24.7.2 Experimental Results / 475 24.8 Conclusion / 479 Acknowledgment / 481 References / 481 25 A NEW FAST METHOD FOR DETECTING AND VALIDATING HORIZONTAL GENE TRANSFER EVENTS USING PHYLOGENETIC TREES AND AGGREGATION FUNCTIONS 483Dunarel Badescu, Nadia Tahiri, and Vladimir Makarenkov 25.1 Introduction / 483 25.2 Methods / 485 25.2.1 Clustering Using Variability Functions / 485 25.2.2 Other Variants of Clustering Functions Implemented in the Algorithm / 487 25.2.3 Description of the New Algorithm / 488 25.2.4 Time Complexity / 491 25.3 Experimental Study / 491 25.3.1 Implementation / 491 25.3.2 Synthetic Data / 491 25.3.3 Real Prokaryotic (Genomic) Data / 495 25.4 Results and Discussion / 501 25.4.1 Analysis of Synthetic Data / 501 25.4.2 Analysis of Prokaryotic Data / 502 25.5 Conclusion / 502 References / 503 VII PATTERN RECOGNITION IN BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS 505 26 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS FOR MODELING BIOLOGICAL INTERACTION NETWORKS 507Christos Makris and Evangelos Theodoridis 26.1 Introduction / 507 26.2 Measures/Metrics / 508 26.3 Models of Biological Networks / 511 26.4 Reconstructing and Partitioning Biological Networks / 511 26.5 PPI Networks / 513 26.6 Mining PPI Networks—Interaction Prediction / 517 26.7 Conclusions / 519 References / 519 27 BIOLOGICAL NETWORK INFERENCE AT MULTIPLE SCALES: FROM GENE REGULATION TO SPECIES INTERACTIONS 525Andrej Aderhold, V Anne Smith, and Dirk Husmeier 27.1 Introduction / 525 27.2 Molecular Systems / 528 27.3 Ecological Systems / 528 27.4 Models and Evaluation / 529 27.4.1 Notations / 529 27.4.2 Sparse Regression and the LASSO / 530 27.4.3 Bayesian Regression / 530 27.4.4 Evaluation Metric / 531 27.5 Learning Gene Regulation Networks / 532 27.5.1 Nonhomogeneous Bayesian Regression / 533 27.5.2 Gradient Estimation / 534 27.5.3 Simulated Bio-PEPA Data / 534 27.5.4 Real mRNA Expression Profile Data / 535 27.5.5 Method Evaluation and Learned Networks / 536 27.6 Learning Species Interaction Networks / 540 27.6.1 Regression Model of Species interactions / 540 27.6.2 Multiple Global Change-Points / 541 27.6.3 Mondrian Process Change-Points / 542 27.6.4 Synthetic Data / 544 27.6.5 Simulated Population Dynamics / 544 27.6.6 Real World Plant Data / 546 27.6.7 Method Evaluation and Learned Networks / 546 27.7 Conclusion / 550 References / 550 28 DISCOVERING CAUSAL PATTERNS WITH STRUCTURAL EQUATION MODELING: APPLICATION TO TOLL-LIKE RECEPTOR SIGNALING PATHWAY IN CHRONIC LYMPHOCYTIC LEUKEMIA 555Athina Tsanousa, Stavroula Ntoufa, Nikos Papakonstantinou, Kostas Stamatopoulos, and Lefteris Angelis 28.1 Introduction / 555 28.2 Toll-Like Receptors / 557 28.2.1 Basics / 557 28.2.2 Structure and Signaling of TLRs / 558 28.2.3 TLR Signaling in Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia / 559 28.3 Structural Equation Modeling / 560 28.3.1 Methodology of SEM Modeling / 560 28.3.2 Assumptions / 561 28.3.3 Estimation Methods / 562 28.3.4 Missing Data / 562 28.3.5 Goodness-of-Fit Indices / 563 28.3.6 Other Indications of a Misspecified Model / 565 28.4 Application / 566 28.5 Conclusion / 580 References / 581 29 ANNOTATING PROTEINS WITH INCOMPLETE LABEL INFORMATION 585Guoxian Yu, Huzefa Rangwala, and Carlotta Domeniconi 29.1 Introduction / 585 29.2 Related Work / 587 29.3 Problem Formulation / 589 29.3.1 The Algorithm / 591 29.4 Experimental Setup / 592 29.4.1 Data sets / 592 29.4.2 Comparative Methods / 593 29.4.3 Experimental Protocol / 594 29.4.4 Evaluation Criteria / 594 29.5 Experimental Analysis / 596 29.5.1 Replenishing Missing Functions / 596 29.5.2 Predicting Unlabeled Proteins / 600 29.5.3 Component Analysis / 604 29.5.4 Run Time Analysis / 604 29.6 Conclusions / 605 Acknowledgments / 606 References / 606 INDEX 609

Read more less

Book SynopsisDetails the paradigms of opportunistic spectrum sharing and white space access as effective means to satisfy increasing demand for high-speed wireless communication and for novel wireless communication applications This book addresses opportunistic spectrum sharing and white space access, being particularly mindful of practical considerations and solutions. In Part I, spectrum sharing implementation issues are considered in terms of hardware platforms and software architectures for realization of flexible and spectrally agile transceivers. Part II addresses practical mechanisms supporting spectrum sharing, including spectrum sensing for opportunistic spectrum access, machine learning and decision making capabilities, aggregation of spectrum opportunities, and spectrally-agile radio waveforms. Part III presents the ongoing work on policy and regulation for efficient and reliable spectrum sharing, including major recent steps forward in TV White Space (TTable of ContentsLIST OF CONTRIBUTORS xi INTRODUCTION xvOliver Holland, Hanna Bogucka, and Arturas Medeisis ACRONYMS xxiii PART I FLEXIBLE RADIO HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PLATFORMS SUPPORTING SPECTRUM SHARING 1 1 The Universal Software Radio Peripheral (USRP) Family of Low-Cost SDRs 3Matt Ettus and Martin Braun 2 On the GNU Radio Ecosystem 25Thomas W. Rondeau 3 Wireless Open-Access Research Platform (WARP) for Flexible Radio 49Junaid Ansari and Petri Mähönen 4 A Dynamically Reconfigurable Software Radio Framework: Iris 81Paul Sutton 5 OpenAirInterface and ExpressMIMO2 for Spectrally Agile Communication 99Bassem Zayen, Florian Kaltenberger, and Raymond Knopp 6 CORAL Cognitive WiFi Networking System: Case Studies of Rural Applications in India 123John Sydor PART II PRACTICAL MECHANISMS SUPPORTING SPECTRUM SHARING 141 7 Cooperative Sensing of Spectrum Opportunities 143Giuseppe Caso, Luca De Nardis, Ragnar Thobaben, and Maria-Gabriella Di Benedetto 8 A Machine-Learning Approach Based on Bio-Inspired Intelligence 167Dimitrios Karvounas, Aimilia Bantouna, Andreas Georgakopoulos, Kostas Tsagkaris, Vera Stavroulaki, and Panagiotis Demestichas 9 Spectrally Agile Waveforms 191Alexander M. Wyglinski, Adrian Kliks, Pawel Kryszkiewicz, Amit P. Sail, and Hanna Bogucka 10 Aggregation of Spectrum Opportunities 221Florian Kaltenberger, Theodoros A. Tsiftsis, Fotis Foukalas, Shuyu Ping, and Oliver Holland 11 Policies for Efficient Spectrum Sharing 239Liljana Gavrilovska, Vladimir Atanasovski, and Gianmarco Baldini PARTIII REGULATORY SOLUTIONS FOR SPECTRUM SHARING 257 12 International Regulatory Framework for Spectrum and Spectrum Sharing 259Peter Anker 13 Regulations for Spectrum Sharing in the USA 277Lee Pucker 14 UK Framework for Access to TV White Spaces 313Hamid Reza Karimi 15 Spectrum Sharing Using Geo-Location Databases 339Jeffrey C. Schmidt and Peter Stanforth 16 Novel Licensing Schemes 369Oliver Holland, Arturo Basaure, and Wataru Yamada PARTIV SPECTRUM SHARING BUSINESS SCENARIOS AND ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS 391 17 Economic and Game Theoretic Models for Spectrum Sharing 393Hamed Ahmadi, Irene Macaluso, Zaheer Khan, Hanna Bogucka, and Luiz A. DaSilva 18 Business Benefits of Licensed Shared Access (LSA) for Key Stakeholders 407Marja Matinmikko, Hanna Okkonen, Seppo Yrjölä, Petri Ahokangas, Miia Mustonen, Marko Palola, Vânia Gonçalves, Anri Kivimäki, Esko Luttinen, and Jukka Kemppainen 19 Initial Standardization of Disruptive Innovations in Radiocommunication Technology in Consortia 425Dirk-Oliver von der Emden 20 Spectrum as a Platform: a Critical Assessment of the Value Promise of Spectrum Sharing Solutions 453Olivier Rits, Simon Delaere, and Pieter Ballon PART V SPECTRUM SHARING DEPLOYMENT SCENARIOS IN PRACTICE 479 21 TV White Spaces with Geo-Location Database Access: Practical Considerations and Trials in Europe 481Rogério Dionísio, José Ribeiro, Jorge Ribeiro, Paulo Marques, and Jonathan Rodriguez 22 Developments and Practical Field Trials of TVWS Technologies 513Kentaro Ishizu, Keiichi Mizutani, Takeshi Matsumura, Ha-Nguyen Tran, Stanislav Filin, Hirokazu Sawada, and Hiroshi Harada 23 Cognitive Wireless Regional Area Network Standard 551Apurva Mody, Gerald Chouinard, Stephen J. Shellhammer, Monisha Ghosh, and Dave Cavalcanti 24 ETSI Opportunistic Spectrum Sharing Technology for (TV) White Spaces 605Markus Dominik Mueck, Naotaka Sato, Chen Sun, Martino Freda, Pekka Ojanen, Dong Zhou, Junfeng Xiao, Rogério Pais Dionisio, and Paulo Marques 25 The IEEE Dynamic Spectrum Access Networks Standards Committee (DySPAN-SC) and IEEE 1900 Working Groups 631Oliver Holland, Hiroshi Harada, Ha-Nguyen Tran, Bernd Bochow, Masayuki Ariyoshi, Matthew Sherman, Michael Gundlach, Stanislav Filin, and Adrian Kliks 26 Spectrum to Unlash Machine-to-Machine Uptake 649Mischa Dohler and Yue Gao CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE WORK 679Oliver Holland, Hanna Bogucka, and Arturas Medeisis INDEX 689

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers all the key areas of wind resource assessment technologies from an engineer's perspective Focuses on wind analysis for wind plant siting, design and analysis Addresses all aspects from atmospheric boundary layer characteristics, to wind resource measurement systems, uncertainties in measurements, computations and analyses, to plant performance Covers the basics of atmospheric science through to turbine siting, turbine responses, and to environmental impacts Contents can be used for research purposes as well as a go-to reference guide, written from the perspective of a hands-on engineer Topic is of ongoing major international interest for its economic and environmental benefits Table of ContentsPreface xiii Introduction xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Author xix List of Symbols xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Wind Resource Assessment as a Discipline 2 1.2 Micro-siting Briefing 2 1.3 Cascade of Wind Regime 3 1.3.1 Global Scale Wind Regime 3 1.3.2 Synoptic Scale Wind Regime 5 1.3.3 Meso-scale Wind Regime 5 1.3.4 Local Scale Wind Regime 6 1.4 Uncertainty of Wind Resource 7 1.5 Scope of the Book 9 References 9 2 Concepts and Analytical Tools 11 2.1 Surface Roughness and Wind Profile 11 2.1.1 Roughness Length 11 2.1.2 Vertical Wind Profile 14 2.1.3 Internal Boundary Layer 15 2.1.4 Roughness Change Model 16 2.1.5 Displacement Height 17 2.1.6 Wind Shear 18 2.2 Speed-up Effect of Terrain 20 2.2.1 Horizontal Speed-up Profile 20 2.2.2 Vertical Speed-up on Hill Top 22 2.2.3 Orographic Categorisation of Terrain 24 2.2.4 Ruggedness Index 27 2.3 Shelter Effect of Obstacles 28 2.3.1 Reduced Wind Speed 29 2.3.2 Increased Turbulence Intensity 31 2.4 Summary 32 References 33 3 Numerical Wind Flow Modelling 35 3.1 Modelling Concept Review 36 3.1.1 Wind Flow Concepts 36 3.1.2 Governing Equations 37 3.1.3 Meshing the Computational Domain 41 3.2 Linearised Numerical Flow Models 42 3.2.1 Jackson–Hunt Model 42 3.2.2 WAsP Model: The Principle 43 3.2.3 WAsP Model: Limitations 46 3.2.4 WAsP Model: Improving the Results 48 3.3 Mass-Consistent Models 50 3.4 CFD Models 50 3.4.1 Meteodyn WT and WindSim 51 3.4.2 Validation of CFD models 52 3.5 Meso Scale NWP Models 53 3.6 Inherent Uncertainties in Wind Flow Modelling 55 3.7 Summary 56 References 56 4 Wind Park Physics and Micro-siting 61 4.1 Wind Power Density 61 4.2 Wind Power Conversion 63 4.2.1 Betz’s Limit 63 4.2.2 Power Coefficient 65 4.2.3 Thrust Coefficient 65 4.2.4 Wind Turbine Power Curve 66 4.2.5 Power Curve Adjustment 67 4.3 Wind Turbine Wake Effects 68 4.3.1 Analytical Structure of Wake 68 4.3.2 Reduced Velocity Wake Models 70 4.3.3 Added Turbulence Wake Models 73 4.3.4 Deep Array Wake Models 75 4.3.5 Wake Effects in Complex Terrain 77 4.4 Wind Turbine Micro-siting 78 4.4.1 Park Efficiency 79 4.4.2 Capacity Factor 80 4.4.3 Site-Specific Wind Conditions 80 4.4.4 Wind Turbine Selection 82 4.4.5 Site Survey 83 4.4.6 Wind Sector Management 86 4.5 Summary 87 References 87 5 Wind Statistics 91 5.1 Statistics Concepts Review 91 5.1.1 Random Variables 91 5.1.2 Sample Mean and Standard Deviation 92 5.1.3 Probability Density Distribution 92 5.2 Wind Data Time Series 93 5.2.1 Mean Wind Speed 94 5.2.2 Turbulence Intensity 95 5.2.3 Wind Direction 97 5.3 Mean Wind Speed of the Whole Time Series 99 5.4 Weibull Distribution 100 5.4.1 Weibull Probability Density Function 100 5.4.2 Weibull Cumulative Distribution Function 101 5.4.3 Rayleigh Distribution 103 5.5 Estimating Weibull Parameters 104 5.5.1 Linear Regression Method 104 5.5.2 Mean-Standard Deviation Method 105 5.5.3 Maximum Likelihood Estimate Method 105 5.5.4 Medians Method 106 5.5.5 Power Density Method 107 5.5.6 Quality of the Weibull Fit 108 5.6 Extreme Wind Statistics 110 5.6.1 Independent Extreme Wind Events 110 5.6.2 Gumbel Method 111 5.6.3 Peaks-Over-Threshold Method 116 5.6.4 Extreme Wind Gusts 117 5.7 Summary 118 References 118 6 Measure–Correlate–Predict 121 6.1 Wind Data Correlation 122 6.1.1 Correlation Coefficient 122 6.1.2 Physical Interpretations of the Correlation 122 6.1.3 The Impact of Averaging Interval 123 6.2 Wind Data Regression and Prediction 125 6.2.1 Regression Equation and Residual 125 6.2.2 Data Validation 127 6.2.3 Data Resampling 128 6.3 MCP Methodology for Wind Energy 129 6.3.1 Linear Regression 129 6.3.2 Variance Ratio Method 130 6.3.3 Weibull Scale Method 131 6.3.4 Mortimer Method 132 6.3.5 WindPRO Matrix Method 132 6.3.6 Artificial Neural Networks 134 6.4 MCP Uncertainty 135 6.4.1 Reducing MCP Uncertainty 135 6.4.2 Estimating MCP Uncertainty 135 6.4.3 Overlapping Period 136 6.5 Sources of Reference Data 137 6.5.1 Meteorological Stations 137 6.5.2 Reanalysis Data 138 6.6 Summary 139 References 140 7 Wind Park Production Estimate 143 7.1 Gross and Net AEP 143 7.1.1 Wake Losses 144 7.1.2 Availability Losses 145 7.1.3 Power Curve Performance 145 7.1.4 Environmental Losses 146 7.1.5 Electrical Losses 147 7.1.6 Curtailments 147 7.2 AEP Uncertainty Analysis 148 7.2.1 Defining Uncertainty 148 7.2.2 Combining Uncertainties 150 7.2.3 From Wind Speed Uncertainty to AEP Uncertainty 151 7.2.4 P90, P75 and P50 AEP 151 7.3 Natural Variability of Wind 153 7.3.1 Inter-Annual Wind Speed Variability 153 7.3.2 Long-Term Stability of Windiness 154 7.4 Uncertainty in Wind Measurement 155 7.5 Uncertainty in Wind Flow Modelling 156 7.5.1 Vertical Extrapolation 156 7.5.2 Horizontal Extrapolation 158 7.5.3 Wind Resource Similarity 159 7.5.4 Deploying Multiple Masts 160 7.6 A Case Study 162 7.7 Wind Resource Assessment Report 163 7.8 Summary 165 References 166 8 Measuring theWind 169 8.1 Representativeness of the Met Mast 169 8.1.1 Similar Wind Climate 170 8.1.2 Similar Topography 172 8.1.3 Similar Shelter Effect 172 8.2 Cup Anemometer Physics 173 8.2.1 Horizontal Wind Speed 174 8.2.2 Vertical Sensitivity 174 8.2.3 Dynamic Response in Turbulent Winds 175 8.2.4 Nonlinearity and Mechanical Friction 177 8.2.5 Sheared Flow Effect 178 8.2.6 Cup Anemometer Design 178 8.3 Met Mast Installation 179 8.3.1 Tower Shadow 179 8.3.2 Boom and Ancillary Effect 181 8.3.3 Wind Direction Vane 181 8.3.4 Air Temperature and Other Parameters 183 8.3.5 Good Practice 183 8.4 Met Mast Operation and Maintenance 185 8.4.1 Documentation 185 8.4.2 On-Site Inspection 188 8.4.3 Monitoring 189 8.5 Data Validation 190 8.5.1 Test Criteria 190 8.5.2 Graphical Review 191 8.5.3 Combining the Data 191 8.5.4 Data Recovery Rate 192 8.6 Alternative Wind Sensors 192 8.6.1 Propeller Anemometer 192 8.6.2 Sonic Anemometer 193 8.6.3 Sodar 195 8.6.4 Lidar 196 8.6.5 Deploying Sodar and Lidar 197 8.7 Summary 199 References 200 9 Atmospheric Circulation and Wind Systems 201 9.1 General Concepts 201 9.1.1 Vertical Structure of the Atmosphere 201 9.1.2 Standard Atmosphere 203 9.1.3 Geopotential Height and Sigma Height 203 9.1.4 Cascade of Scales 204 9.2 Laws and Driving Forces 206 9.2.1 Equation of State 206 9.2.2 Hydrostatic Equation 206 9.2.3 Air Density 207 9.2.4 Forces and Winds 208 9.3 General Atmospheric Circulations 210 9.3.1 Geostrophic Winds 210 9.3.2 Baroclinic Atmosphere and Thermal Winds 211 9.3.3 Three Cell Circulation 212 9.4 Synoptic Scale Wind Systems 214 9.4.1 Mid-latitude Cyclones and Anticyclones 214 9.4.2 Weather Fronts 215 9.4.3 Tropical Storms 216 9.5 Meso-scale Wind Systems 217 9.5.1 Convection and Thunderstorms 218 9.5.2 Land and Sea Breezes 219 9.5.3 Mountain and Valley Winds 221 9.5.4 Katabatic Winds 222 9.6 Micro-scale Winds 222 9.6.1 Turbulence Kinetic Energy 223 9.6.2 Turbulent Flux 224 9.6.3 Turbulence Spectra 225 9.7 Summary 226 References 227 10 Boundary Layer Winds 229 10.1 Atmospheric Stability 229 10.1.1 Neutral Stratification 230 10.1.2 Unstable Stratification 230 10.1.3 Stable Stratification 231 10.1.4 Stability Parameter 231 10.1.5 Modification on a Vertical Wind Profile 232 10.1.6 Influence on Turbulence 233 10.2 Orographic Effects 234 10.2.1 Channelling of Wind 234 10.2.2 Wind Speed-up and the Froude Number 235 10.3 Onshore Boundary Layer Winds 238 10.3.1 Surface Layer 238 10.3.2 Ekman Layer 239 10.3.3 Diurnal Variations 240 10.3.4 Low-Level Jets 241 10.3.5 Internal Boundary Layer 243 10.4 Offshore Boundary Layer Winds 243 10.4.1 Sea Surface Roughness and Wave Influence 244 10.4.2 Marine Atmospheric Stability 245 10.4.3 Annual and Diurnal Variations 245 10.4.4 Offshore Turbulence Intensity 246 10.4.5 Offshore Vertical Wind Profile 246 10.4.6 Offshore Turbine Layout Optimisation 247 10.5 Summary 248 References 248 11 Environmental Impact Assessment 251 11.1 Biological Impacts 251 11.1.1 Birds and Bats 252 11.1.2 Terrestrial Animals 253 11.1.3 Marine Animals 253 11.1.4 Vegetation 254 11.2 Visual Impacts 254 11.2.1 Shadow Flicker 254 11.2.2 Scenery and Aesthetics 256 11.3 Noise Impacts 257 11.3.1 Wind Turbine Noise Curve 257 11.3.2 Sound Propagation 259 11.3.3 Combining Sound Levels 259 11.3.4 Evaluating Noise Levels 261 11.4 Weather and Climate Change 262 11.5 Public Health and Safety 264 11.6 Summary 264 References 265 Appendix I Frequently Used Equations 267 Appendix II IEC Classification of Wind Turbines 269 Appendix III Climate Condition Survey for aWind Farm 271 Appendix IV Useful Websites and Database 275 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes the concept of a Software Defined Mobile Network (SDMN), which will impact the network architecture of current LTE (3GPP) networks. SDN will also open up new opportunities for traffic, resource and mobility management, as well as impose new challenges on network security. Therefore, the book addresses the main affected areas such as traffic, resource and mobility management, virtualized traffics transportation, network management, network security and techno economic concepts. Moreover, a complete introduction to SDN and SDMN concepts. Furthermore, the reader will be introduced to cutting-edge knowledge in areas such as network virtualization, as well as SDN concepts relevant to next generation mobile networks. Finally, by the end of the book the reader will be familiar with the feasibility and opportunities of SDMN concepts, and will be able to evaluate the limits of performance and scalability of these new technologies while applying them to mobile broadb and netwTable of ContentsEditors xv Contributors xvii Foreword xxvii Ulf Ewaldsson Foreword xxix Lauri Oksanen Preface xxxi Acknowledgments xxxvii Abbreviations xxxix Part I Introduction 1 Overview 3Madhusanka Liyanage, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 1.1 Present Mobile Networks and Their Limitations 4 1.2 Software Defined Mobile Network 5 1.3 Key Benefits of SDMN 7 1.4 Conclusion 9 References 9 2 Mobile Network History 11Brian Brown, Rob Gonzalez, and Brian Stanford 2.1 Overview 11 2.2 The Evolution of the Mobile Network 12 2.2.1 Sharing Resources 13 2.2.2 Orchestration 14 2.2.3 Scalability 15 2.3 Limitations and Challenges in Current Mobile Networks 15 2.4 Requirement in Future Mobile Networks 18 Reference 19 3 Software Defined Networking Concepts 21Xenofon Foukas, Mahesh K. Marina, and Kimon Kontovasilis 3.1 Introduction 21 3.2 SDN History and Evolution 23 3.2.1 Early History of Programmable Networks 23 3.2.2 Evolution of Programmable Networks to SDN 25 3.3 SDN Paradigm and Applications 28 3.3.1 Overview of SDN Building Blocks 28 3.3.2 SDN Switches 30 3.3.3 SDN Controllers 31 3.3.4 SDN Programming Interfaces 34 3.3.5 SDN Application Domains 37 3.3.6 Relation of SDN to Network Virtualization and Network Function Virtualization 38 3.4 Impact of SDN to Research and Industry 39 3.4.1 Overview of Standardization Activities and SDN Summits 40 3.4.2 SDN in the Industry 41 3.4.3 Future of SDN 41 References 42 4 Wireless Software Defined Networking 45Claude Chaudet and Yoram Haddad 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 SDN for Wireless 47 4.2.1 Implementations: OpenRoads and OpenRadio 49 4.2.2 SDR versus SDN 50 4.3 Related Works 50 4.4 Wireless SDN Opportunities 51 4.4.1 Multinetwork Planning 51 4.4.2 Handovers and Off]Loading 53 4.4.3 Dead Zone Coverage 55 4.4.4 Security 55 4.4.5 CDN and Caching 56 4.5 Wireless SDN Challenges 56 4.5.1 Slice Isolation 56 4.5.2 Topology Discovery and Topology]Related Problems 56 4.5.3 Resource Evaluation and Reporting 57 4.5.4 User and Operator Preferences 57 4.5.5 Nontechnical Aspects (Governance, Regulation, Etc.) 58 4.6 Conclusion 59 References 59 5 Leveraging SDN for the 5G Networks: Trends, Prospects, and Challenges 61Akram Hakiri and Pascal Berthou 5.1 Introduction 61 5.2 Evolution of the Wireless Communication toward the 5G 62 5.2.1 Evolution of the Wireless World 62 5.3 Software Defined Networks 64 5.4 NFV 65 5.5 Information]Centric Networking 67 5.6 Mobile and Wireless Networks 68 5.6.1 Mobility Management 68 5.6.2 Ubiquitous Connectivity 69 5.6.3 Mobile Clouds 70 5.7 Cooperative Cellular Networks 71 5.8 Unification of the Control Plane 73 5.8.1 Bringing Fixed–Mobile Networking Together 73 5.8.2 Creating a Concerted Convergence of Packet–Optical Networks 74 5.9 Supporting Automatic QoS Provisioning 75 5.10 Cognitive Network Management and Operation 76 5.11 Role of Satellites in the 5G Networks 77 5.12 Conclusion 79 References 79 Part II SDMN Architectures and Network Implementation 6 LTE Architecture Integration with SDN 83Jose Costa]Requena, Raimo Kantola, Jesús Llorente Santos, Vicent Ferrer Guasch, Maël Kimmerlin, Antti Mikola and Jukka Manner 6.1 Overview 83 6.2 Restructuring Mobile Networks to SDN 84 6.2.1 LTE Network: A Starting Point 84 6.2.2 Options for Location of the SDMN Controller 86 6.2.3 Vision of SDN in LTE Networks 88 6.3 Mobile Backhaul Scaling 91 6.4 Security and Distributed FW 95 6.4.1 Customer Edge Switching 97 6.4.2 RG 97 6.5 SDN and LTE Integration Benefits 98 6.6 SDN and LTE Integration Benefits for End Users 100 6.7 Related Work and Research Questions 103 6.7.1 Research Problems 104 6.7.2 Impact 104 6.8 Conclusions 104 References 105 7 EPC in the Cloud 107James Kempf and Kumar Balachandran 7.1 Introduction 107 7.1.1 Origins and Evolution of SDN 108 7.1.2 NFV and Its Application 109 7.1.3 SDN and Cross]Domain Service Development 112 7.2 EPC in the Cloud Version 1.0 115 7.3 EPC in the Cloud Version 2.0? 117 7.3.1 UE Multihoming 117 7.3.2 The EPC on SDN: OpenFlow Example 119 7.4 Incorporating Mobile Services into Cross]Domain Orchestration with SP]SDN 123 7.5 Summary and Conclusions 125 References 126 8 The Controller Placement Problem in Software Defined Mobile Networks (SDMN) 129Hakan Selvi, Selcan Güner, Gürkan Gür, and Fatih Alagöz 8.1 Introduction 129 8.2 SDN and Mobile Networks 130 8.3 Performance Objectives for SDMN Controller Placement 132 8.3.1 Scalability 133 8.3.2 Reliability 133 8.3.3 Latency 134 8.3.4 Resilience 135 8.4 CPP 136 8.4.1 Placement of Controllers 137 8.4.2 Number of Required Controllers 143 8.4.3 CPP and Mobile Networks 145 8.5 Conclusion 146 References 147 9 Technology Evolution in Mobile Networks 149Antti Tolonen and Sakari Luukkainen 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Generic Technology Evolution 150 9.3 Study Framework 152 9.4 Overview on Cloud Computing 153 9.5 Example Platform: OpenStack 154 9.5.1 OpenStack Design and Architecture 155 9.5.2 OpenStack Community 156 9.6 Case Analysis 156 9.6.1 Openness 157 9.6.2 Added Value 157 9.6.3 Experimentation 158 9.6.4 Complementary Technologies 158 9.6.5 Incumbent Role 159 9.6.6 Existing Market Leverage 160 9.6.7 Competence Change 160 9.6.8 Competing Technologies 160 9.6.9 System Architecture Evolution 161 9.6.10 Regulation 161 9.7 Discussion 162 9.8 Summary 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 Part III Traffic Transport and Network Management 10 Mobile Network Function and Service Delivery Virtualization and Orchestration 169Peter Bosch, Alessandro Duminuco, Jeff Napper, Louis (Sam) Samuel, and Paul Polakos 10.1 Introduction 169 10.2 NFV 170 10.2.1 The Functionality of the Architecture 170 10.2.2 Operation of the ETSI NFV System 174 10.2.3 Potential Migration and Deployment Paths 177 10.2.4 NFV Summary 182 10.3 SDN 182 10.4 The Mobility Use Case 183 10.5 Virtual Networking in Data Centers 185 10.6 Summary 186 References 186 11 Survey of Traffic Management in Software Defined Mobile Networks 189Zoltán Faigl and László Bokor 11.1 Overview 189 11.2 Traffic Management in Mobile Networks 190 11.3 QoS Enforcement and Policy Control in 3G/4G Networks 191 11.3.1 QoS for EPS Bearers 193 11.3.2 QoS for Non]3GPP Access 195 11.3.3 QoS Enforcement in EPS 195 11.3.4 Policy and Charging Control in 3GPP 195 11.3.5 Policy Control Architecture 196 11.4 Traffic Management in SDMNs 198 11.4.1 Open Networking Foundation 198 11.4.2 The OF Protocol 199 11.4.3 Traffic Management and Offloading in Mobile Networks 200 11.5 ALTO in SDMNs 201 11.5.1 The ALTO Protocol 202 11.5.2 ALTO–SDN Use Case 202 11.5.3 The ALTO–SDN Architecture 204 11.5.4 Dynamic Network Information Provision 205 11.6 Conclusions 206 References 206 12 Software Defined Networks for Mobile Application Services 209Ram Gopal Lakshmi Narayanan 12.1 Overview 209 12.2 Overview of 3GPP Network Architecture 210 12.3 Wireless Network Architecture Evolution toward NFV and SDN 212 12.3.1 NFV in Packet Core 212 12.3.2 SDN in Packet Core 213 12.4 NFV/SDN Service Chaining 215 12.4.1 Service Chaining at Packet Core 215 12.4.2 Traffic Optimization inside Mobile Networks 217 12.4.3 Metadata Export from RAN to Packet CN 221 12.5 Open Research and Further Study 222 References 223 13 Load Balancing in Software Defined Mobile Networks 225Ijaz Ahmad, Suneth Namal Karunarathna, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 13.1 Introduction 225 13.1.1 Load Balancing in Wireless Networks 226 13.1.2 Mobility Load Balancing 227 13.1.3 Traffic Steering 227 13.1.4 Load Balancing in Heterogeneous Networks 227 13.1.5 Shortcomings in Current Load Balancing Technologies 227 13.2 Load Balancing in SDMN 229 13.2.1 The Need of Load Balancing in SDMN 230 13.2.2 SDN]Enabled Load Balancing 233 13.3 Future Directions and Challenges for Load Balancing Technologies 244 References 244 Part IV Res ource and Mobility Management 14 QoE Management Framework for Internet Services in SDN]Enabled Mobile Networks 249Marcus Eckert and Thomas Martin Knoll 14.1 Overview 249 14.2 Introduction 250 14.3 State of the Art 251 14.4 QoE Framework Architecture 252 14.5 Quality Monitoring 254 14.5.1 Flow Detection and Classification 254 14.5.2 Video Quality Measurement 255 14.5.3 Video Quality Rating 255 14.5.4 Method of Validation 257 14.5.5 Location]Aware Monitoring 259 14.6 Quality Rules 259 14.7 QoE Enforcement (QEN) 260 14.8 Demonstrator 261 14.9 Summary 263 References 264 15 Software Defined Mobility Management for Mobile Internet 265Jun Bi and You Wang 15.1 Chapter Overview 265 15.1.1 Mobility Management in the Internet 265 15.1.2 Integrating Internet Mobility Management and SDN 267 15.1.3 Chapter Organization 267 15.2 Internet Mobility and Problem Statement 268 15.2.1 Internet Mobility Overview 268 15.2.2 Problem Statement 271 15.2.3 Mobility Management Based on SDN 273 15.3 Software Defined Internet Mobility Management 274 15.3.1 Architecture Overview 274 15.3.2 An OpenFlow]Based Instantiation 275 15.3.3 Binding Cache Placement Algorithm 277 15.3.4 System Design 281 15.4 Conclusion 285 References 285 16 Mobile Virtual Network Operators: A Software Defined Mobile Network Perspective 289M. Bala Krishna 16.1 Introduction 289 16.1.1 Features of MVNO 291 16.1.2 Functional Aspects of MVNO 292 16.1.3 Challenges of MVNO 293 16.2 Architecture of MVNO: An SDMN Perspective 294 16.2.1 Types of MVNOs 294 16.2.2 Hierarchical MVNOs 294 16.3 MNO, MVNE, and MVNA Interactions with MVNO 296 16.3.1 Potential Business Strategies between MNOs, MVNEs, and MVNOs 299 16.3.2 Performance Gain with SDN Approach 300 16.3.3 Cooperation between MNOs and MVNOs 300 16.3.4 Flexible Business Models for Heterogeneous Environments 301 16.4 MVNO Developments in 3G, 4G, and LTE 303 16.4.1 MVNO User]Centric Strategies for Mobility Support 303 16.4.2 Management Schemes for Multiple Interfaces 304 16.4.3 Enhancing Business Strategies Using SDN Approach 304 16.5 Cognitive MVNO 305 16.5.1 Cognitive Radio Management in MVNOs 305 16.5.2 Cognitive and SDN]Based Spectral Allocation Strategies in MVNO 306 16.6 MVNO Business Strategies 307 16.6.1 Services and Pricing of MVNO 308 16.6.2 Resource Negotiation and Pricing 309 16.6.3 Pushover Cellular and Service Adoption Strategy 309 16.6.4 Business Relations between the MNO and MVNO 310 16.7 Conclusions 310 16.8 Future Directions 311 References 311 Part V Security and Economic Aspects 17 Software Defined Mobile Network Security 317Ahmed Bux Abro 17.1 Introduction 317 17.2 Evolving Threat Landscape for Mobile Networks 318 17.3 Traditional Ways to Cope with Security Threats in Mobile Networks 318 17.3.1 Introducing New Controls 318 17.3.2 Securing Perimeter 319 17.3.3 Building Complex Security Systems 320 17.3.4 Throwing More Bandwidth 320 17.4 Principles of Adequate Security for Mobile Network 320 17.4.1 Confidentiality 321 17.4.2 Integrity 321 17.4.3 Availability 321 17.4.4 Centralized Policy 321 17.4.5 Visibility 322 17.5 Typical Security Architecture for Mobile Networks 322 17.5.1 Pros 323 17.5.2 Cons 325 17.6 Enhanced Security for SDMN 325 17.6.1 Securing SDN Controller 325 17.6.2 Securing Infrastructure/Data Center 325 17.6.3 Application Security 326 17.6.4 Securing Management and Orchestration 326 17.6.5 Securing API and Communication 326 17.6.6 Security Technologies 326 17.7 SDMN Security Applications 327 17.7.1 Encryption: eNB to Network 327 17.7.2 Segmentation 327 17.7.3 Network Telemetry 329 References 329 18 Security Aspects of SDMN 331Edgardo Montes de Oca and Wissam Mallouli 18.1 Overview 331 18.2 State of the Art and Security Challenges in SDMN Architectures 331 18.2.1 Basics 332 18.2.2 LTE]EPC Security State of the Art 332 18.2.3 SDN Security in LTE]EPC State of the Art 334 18.2.4 Related Work 339 18.3 Monitoring Techniques 344 18.3.1 DPI 347 18.3.2 NIDS 348 18.3.3 Software Defined Monitoring 349 18.4 Other Important Aspects 351 18.4.1 Reaction and Mitigation Techniques 351 18.4.2 Economically Viable Security Techniques for Mobile Networks 352 18.4.3 Secure Mobile Network Services and Security Management 353 18.5 Conclusion 354 References 355 19 SDMN: Industry Architecture Evolution Paths 357Nan Zhang, Tapio Levä, and Heikki Hämmäinen 19.1 Introduction 357 19.2 From Current Mobile Networks to SDMN 358 19.2.1 Current Mobile Network Architecture 358 19.2.2 Evolutionary SDMN Architecture 359 19.2.3 Revolutionary SDMN Architecture 361 19.3 Business Roles of SDMN 362 19.4 Industry Architectures of Evolutionary SDMN 364 19.4.1 Monolithic MNO 364 19.4.2 Outsourced Subscriber Management 366 19.4.3 Outsourced Connectivity 368 19.5 Industry Architectures of Revolutionary SDMN 369 19.5.1 MVNO 369 19.5.2 Outsourced Interconnection 370 19.5.3 Outsourced Mobility Management 372 19.6 Discussion 372 References 374 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisA pedagogical approach to the principles and architecture of knowledge management in organizations This textbook is based on a graduate course taught at Stevens Institute of Technology. It focuses on the design and management of today''s complex K organizations. A K organization is any company that generates and applies knowledge. The text takes existing ideas from organizational design and knowledge management to enhance and elevate each through harmonization with concepts from other disciplines. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldconcentrate on both micro- and macro design and their interrelationships at individual, group, work, and organizational levels. A key feature of the textbook is an incisive discussion of the cultural, practice, and social aspects of knowledge management. The text explores the processes, tools, and infrastructures by which an organization can continuously improve, maintain, and exploit all elements of its knowledge base that are mostTable of ContentsAcknowledgments ix Introduction to Knowledge Systems 1 I. 1 Machine Versus Art Metaphor 1 I. 2 Design and the Ordering of Ideas 2 I. 3 Organization of the Book 3 I. 4 How to Read This Book 6 I. 5 A Journey Through KS 7 References 7 1 Understanding Knowledge 9 Chapter Preview 9 1.1 The New Pangaea 10 1.2 Characterizing the Knowledge Economy 11 1.3 A Glimpse into the Knowledge Society 12 1.4 Industrial Revolutions 13 1.5 The Social Challenge of the Knowledge Economy 13 1.6 A Macro Perspective of Knowledge Management 14 1.7 Architecture of the Organization 16 1.8 Data, Information, and Knowledge 17 1.9 Distinctions in the Information Continuum 20 1.10 Revisiting the Information Continuum 21 1.11 Knowledge As Such 22 1.12 A Brief Comparative Perspective and the Knowledge Triangle 37 1.13 Conceptions of Knowledge in Practice 38 1.14 The Relationship among Different Perspectives 45 1.15 Intangible Assets and Organizational Response 46 1.16 Valuation, Intangibles, and Intellectual Capital 47 1.17 Closing Remarks 51 1.18 Class Exercises 57 References 58 2 Designing Knowledge Systems 61 Chapter Preview 61 2.1 Perspectives of Knowledge 62 2.2 Knowledge Worlds 65 2.3 Inquiry Systems and the Search for True Knowledge 70 2.4 The Basics of Design in the Knowledge Era 74 2.5 New Directions in Knowledge Design 92 2.6 Closing Remarks 120 2.7 Class Exercises 121 References 123 3 Organizations and Systems 125 Chapter Preview 125 3.1 Organizations 126 3.2 Organizational Design 129 3.3 Systems Theory 141 3.4 HT and Design 146 3.5 Organization Molecules 152 3.6 Symmetrical Structures, Discourse, and Conversation 154 3.7 Closing Remarks 155 3.8 Class Exercises 158 References 159 4 Knowledge Work and Technology 161 Chapter Preview 161 4.1 What Is Knowledge Work? 163 4.2 Classifying Knowledge Workers 169 4.3 Tacit Aspect of Knowledge Work 174 4.4 Characterizing Thick Knowledge Work 176 4.5 Architectural Perspective of Knowledge Work 178 4.6 Process and Thin Work 180 4.7 Practice and Thick Work 181 4.8 Knowledge Work and Supporting Technology 195 4.9 KM Tools and Technologies 209 4.10 Robot Economy 210 4.11 Closing Remarks 213 4.12 Class Exercises 216 References 217 5 Organizations and Knowledge 221 Chapter Preview 221 5.1 Organizations and KM 222 5.2 Knowledge Revisited 231 5.3 Organizational Knowledge Cycles and Models 239 5.4 Application of Concepts: Case Study on the PC 252 5.5 Knowledge Formation 257 5.6 Knowledge Exchange and Transfer 259 5.7 Knowledge Base 266 5.8 Organizational Design Representations 269 5.9 Architecture of the Learning Organization 281 5.10 Closing Remarks 287 5.11 Class Exercises 290 References 291 6 Social Aspects of Knowledge Management 295 Chapter Preview 295 6.1 Social Networks 298 6.2 Knowledge Network Design in Organizations 305 6.3 Culture in the Knowledge Organization 308 6.4 Industry Example of Culture: Toyota 316 6.5 Trust 320 6.6 Illustrative Example: Interorganizational K Exchange and Creation—Effects of Ties and Culture 323 6.7 Collaboration 324 6.8 Collaborating with Creatives 331 6.9 Office Design 332 6.10 Promoting Conversations and Dialogue 339 6.11 Closing Remarks 344 6.12 Class Exercises 349 References 351 7 Strategy and Leadership for Knowledge Management 355 Chapter Preview 355 7.1 What Is Strategy? 357 7.2 Strategy Continuum and the Knowledge Organization 366 7.3 Setting the Stage: Intangibles and a Knowledge Strategy 369 7.4 Leadership and KM 371 7.5 Getting Started 374 7.6 Strategies for the Knowledge Organization—Tacit Bundle 377 7.7 Culture Change 378 7.8 Chief Knowledge Office 382 7.9 People Value Stream 386 7.10 Closing Remarks 396 7.11 Class Exercises 401 References 403 8 Knowledge Horizons 405 8.1 Knowledge Arises 405 8.2 Digital Economy 409 8.3 End of Course Questions for Discussion and Research 411 References 413 Appendix 415 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive resource that explores electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) for aerospace systems Handbook of Aerospace Electromagnetic Compatibility is a groundbreaking book on EMC for aerospace systems that addresses both aircraft and space vehicles. With contributions from an international panel of aerospace EMC experts, this important text deals with the testing of spacecraft components and subsystems,analysis of crosstalk and field coupling, aircraft communication systems, and much more. The text also includes information on lightning effects and testing, as well as guidance on design principles and techniques for lightning protection. The book offers an introduction to E3 models and techniques in aerospace systems and explores EMP effects on and technology for aerospace systems. Filled with the most up-to-date information, illustrative examples, descriptive figures, and helpful scenarios, Handbook of Aerospace Electromagnetic Compatibility is designed to be a practical informatTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xii List of Contributors xiii In Memoriam xiv 1 Introduction to E3 Models and Techniques in Aerospace Systems 1Ira Kohlberg 1.1 Introduction and Topics of Interest 1 1.2 Autonomous Systems 8 1.3 Coupled Air and Space Survivable Systems 30 1.4 EMC Considerations of Chaos 41 1.5 EMC Effects on and Technology for Aerospace Systems 52 References 73 2 Deterministic and Statistical EMC Models for Field-to-Wire Coupling and Crosstalk in Wire Harness 79Sergio Pignari 2.1 Introduction 79 2.2 DeterministicModeling 79 2.3 StatisticalModeling 99 References 115 3 HEMP Protection and Verification 121William D. Prather 3.1 Introduction 121 3.2 High-Altitude Electromagnetic Pulse 122 3.3 HEMP Coupling to Aircraft 129 3.4 Shielding and Shielding Topology 133 3.5 EM Protection Technology 135 3.6 System-Level Specifications and Measurements 137 3.7 Hardening Component Specifications and Measurements 169 3.8 Hardness Maintenance/Hardness Surveillance 180 3.9 Conclusion 182 References 183 4 HIRF and Lightning Effects and Testing 187Martin Gabrisak 4.1 Introduction 187 4.2 Coupling Analysis 190 4.3 HIRF Electromagnetic Environment and Its Effects 249 4.4 Electromagnetic Effects of Lightning 280 4.5 Precipitation Static (P-Static) 321 4.6 Lightning Effects and Protection in Aerospace 330 References 340 5 Techniques to Design Robust Lightning Protection Circuits for Avionics Equipment 347Dr. ClayMcCreary 5.1 Introduction 347 5.2 Clean Sheet Design 347 5.3 Evaluating and Hardening Existing Protection 368 5.4 Design Examples 372 5.5 Conclusion 378 References 378 6 Pyrotechnic Systems in Aerospace Applications 381Karen Burnham 6.1 Introduction 381 6.2 Component-Level Concerns 383 6.3 Vehicle-Level Concerns 390 6.4 Conclusion 404 References 404 7 Assembly-Level EMC Testing of Space Components/Subsystems 407Leslie R.Warboys 7.1 Preliminary Steps 407 7.2 Basic Testing Concepts 408 7.3 Commonly Performed Tests 409 7.4 Test Plan 410 7.5 Testing Sequence 414 References 444 8 System-Level Testing of Spacecraft 445JohannesWolf 8.1 Classification of System-Level Testing 445 8.2 System-Level Requirements Definition 452 8.3 Test Execution at the System Level 461 References 479 9 Subsystem EMC for Aircraft 483Paul Kay 9.1 Introduction: The Aim of Subsystem-Level Testing 483 9.2 Motivations for Testing: Safety of Flight and Success of Mission 486 9.3 Emissions Tests 492 9.4 Immunity Tests 511 9.5 Test Plans for Avionics Subsystems 524 Further Reading 535 10 EMI Effects in Flight Control Systems and Their Mitigations 537IrfanMajid 10.1 Introduction 538 10.2 Nature of EMI Experienced by Aerospace Vehicles 540 10.3 Reported Catastrophic EMI Occurrences in FCS 545 10.4 Anatomy of FBWFCS 548 10.5 Flight Management System 554 10.6 EMC Test Standards 556 10.7 EMC Test Methodologies of FCS 566 10.8 How EMI Couples to FCS 580 10.9 Modeling and Simulation 586 10.10 FCS of UAVs 590 10.11 Some Special Considerations for EMI Mitigation 593 References 598 11 EMC Considerations for Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 603Paul Kay 11.1 Introduction 603 11.2 Small UAVs 605 11.3 Payloads 610 11.4 Small UAV Navigation and Control Systems 616 11.5 Electromagnetic Environment for Small UAVs 617 12 DC Magnetic Cleanliness Description for Spaceflight Programs 621Pablo S. Narvaez 12.1 Magnetic Cleanliness Introduction 621 12.2 Magnetic Cleanliness and Control Philosophy 622 12.3 Magnetics Cleanliness Program Description 623 12.4 Early Magnetic Cleanliness Involvement 626 12.5 Design Requirements and Practices 629 12.6 Magnetic Assessment and Control 632 12.7 Magnetic Control Design Practices 639 12.8 Test FacilitiesMeasurement and Methods 653 12.9 Analytical Determination of Magnetic Fields 671 13 Spacecraft Charging 673Robert C. Scully 13.1 Introduction 673 13.2 Historical Background 676 13.3 General Description of the Near-Earth Electromagnetic Environment 677 13.4 Introduction to Spacecraft Charging 689 13.5 Types of Spacecraft Charging 695 13.6 Potential Damage 697 13.7 Ways and Means of Protection/Mitigation 699 13.8 Concluding Material 701 References 701 Bibliography 703 14 Analysis and Simulations of Space Radiation-Induced Single-Event Effects and Transients 705Reinaldo J. Perez 14.1 Introduction 705 14.2 The Space Radiation Environment 706 14.3 Single-Event Effects 706 14.4 Single-Event Transient 708 14.5 Generation and Modeling a SET 710 14.6 Use of Upset Rates for Analyzing Vulnerabilities of Designs to SEE 713 14.7 Circuit Modeling of SETs 716 14.8 SETs in Digital Devices 718 14.9 SET-Induced Clock Jitter and False Clock Pulse 722 14.10 Designing Digital Circuits for SET Survivability 723 14.11 Crosstalk Noise from SET Events and Delay Effects 726 14.12 SET in Voltage Regulators 729 14.13 SET Propagation through Multiple Circuits 731 14.14 SET Hardening of Interconnects 733 14.15 Modeling Subsystem- and System-Level Effects from SET 733 14.16 Analyses and Protection for SET for Electronic Devices 737 14.17 SEE Testing of Spacecraft Hardware Electronics 741 14.18 Conclusions 743 References 744 Index 749

Read more less

Book SynopsisLTE network capabilities are enhanced with small cell deployment, with optimization and with new 3GPP features. LTE networks are getting high loaded which calls for more advanced optimization. Small cells have been discussed in the communications industry for many years, but their true deployment is happening now. New 3GPP features in Release 12 and 13 further push LTE network performance. This timely book addresses R&D and standardization activities on LTE small cells and network optimization, focusing on 3GPP evolution to Release 13. It covers LTE small cells from specification to products and field results; Latest 3GPP evolution to Release 13; and LTE optimization and learnings from the field.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv List of Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1Harri Holma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 LTE Global Deployments and Devices 2 1.3 Mobile Data Traffic Growth 3 1.4 LTE Technology Evolution 4 1.5 LTE Spectrum 5 1.6 Small Cell Deployments 6 1.7 Network Optimization 7 1.8 LTE Evolution Beyond Release 13 8 1.9 Summary 9 References 9 2 LTE and LTE Advanced in Releases 8–11 11Antti Toskala 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Releases 8 and 9 LTE 11 2.2.1 Releases 8 and 9 Physical Layer 12 2.2.2 LTE Architecture 17 2.2.3 LTE Radio Protocols 17 2.3 LTE Advanced in Releases 10 and 11 19 2.3.1 Carrier Aggregation 19 2.3.2 Multiple Input Multiple Output Enhancements 23 2.3.3 HetNet Enhanced Inter-cell Interference Coordination 23 2.3.4 Coordinated Multipoint Transmission 25 2.4 UE Capability in Releases 8–11 26 2.5 Conclusions 28 References 28 3 LTE-Advanced Evolution in Releases 12–13 29Antti Toskala 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Machine-Type Communications 29 3.3 Enhanced CoMP 34 3.4 FDD–TDD Carrier Aggregation 35 3.5 WLAN-Radio Interworking 37 3.6 Device-to-Device Communication with LTE 39 3.7 Single Cell Point to Multipoint Transmission 41 3.8 Release 12 UE Capabilities 42 3.9 Conclusions 42 References 43 4 Small Cell Enhancements in Release 12/13 45Antti Toskala, Timo Lunttila, Tero Henttonen and Jari Lindholm 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 Small Cell and Dual Connectivity Principles 45 4.3 Dual Connectivity Architecture Principle 46 4.4 Dual Connectivity Protocol Impacts 47 4.5 Dual Connectivity Physical Layer Impacts and Radio Link Monitoring 49 4.6 Other Small Cell Physical Layer Enhancement 53 4.6.1 256QAM for LTE Downlink 53 4.6.2 Small Cell ON/OFF Switching and Enhanced Discovery 53 4.6.3 Power Saving with Small Cell ON/OFF 56 4.6.4 Over the Air Synchronization Between eNodeBs 56 4.7 Release 13 Enhancements 56 4.8 Conclusions 57 References 57 5 Small Cell Deployment Options 59Harri Holma and Benny Vejlgaard 5.1 Introduction 59 5.2 Small Cell Motivation 60 5.3 Network Architecture Options 60 5.4 Frequency Usage 64 5.5 Selection of Small Cell Location 65 5.6 Indoor Small Cells 67 5.6.1 Distributed Antenna Systems 67 5.6.2 Wi-Fi and Femto Cells 68 5.6.3 Femto Cell Architecture 70 5.6.4 Recommendations 72 5.7 Cost Aspects 72 5.7.1 Macro Network Extension 73 5.7.2 Outdoor Small Cells 73 5.7.3 Outdoor Pico Cluster 73 5.7.4 Indoor Offloading 74 5.8 Summary 74 References 75 6 Small Cell Products 77Harri Holma and Mikko Simanainen 6.1 Introduction 77 6.2 3GPP Base Station Categories 78 6.3 Micro Base Stations 78 6.4 Pico Base Stations 80 6.5 Femtocells 83 6.6 Low-Power Remote Radio Heads 84 6.6.1 Alternative Remote Radio Head Designs for Indoor Use 86 6.7 Distributed Antenna Systems 87 6.8 Wi-Fi Integration 87 6.9 Wireless Backhaul Products 89 6.10 Summary 90 Reference 90 7 Small Cell Interference Management 91Rajeev Agrawal, Anand Bedekar, Harri Holma, Suresh Kalyanasundaram, Klaus Pedersen and Beatriz Soret 7.1 Introduction 91 7.2 Packet Scheduling Solutions 93 7.3 Enhanced Inter-cell Interference Coordination 97 7.3.1 Concept Description 97 7.3.2 Performance and Algorithms 101 7.4 Enhanced Coordinated Multipoint (eCoMP) 110 7.5 Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) 114 7.6 Summary 119 References 120 8 Small Cell Optimization 121Harri Holma, Klaus Pedersen, Claudio Rosa, Anand Bedekar and Hua Wang 8.1 Introduction 121 8.2 HetNet Mobility Optimization 122 8.3 Inter-site Carrier Aggregation with Dual Connectivity 126 8.3.1 User Data Rates with Inter-site Carrier Aggregation 126 8.3.2 Mobility with Dual Connectivity 131 8.4 Ultra Dense Network Interference Management 135 8.4.1 Ultra Dense Network Characteristics 135 8.4.2 Proactive Time-Domain Inter-cell Interference Coordination 136 8.4.3 Reactive Carrier-Based Inter-cell Interference Coordination 138 8.5 Power Saving with Small Cell On/Off 139 8.6 Multivendor Macro Cell and Small Cells 141 8.7 Summary 143 References 143 9 Learnings from Small Cell Deployments 145Brian Olsen and Harri Holma 9.1 Introduction 145 9.2 Small Cell Motivations by Mobile Operators 145 9.3 Small Cell Challenges and Solutions 146 9.4 Summary of Learnings from Small Cell Deployments 147 9.5 Installation Considerations 151 9.6 Example Small Cell Case Study 152 9.6.1 Site Solution and Backhaul 152 9.6.2 Coverage and User Data Rates 153 9.6.3 Macro Cell Offloading and Capacity 154 9.6.4 KPIs in Network Statistics 155 9.6.5 Mobility Performance 156 9.6.6 Parameter and RF Optimization 157 9.7 Summary 158 10 LTE Unlicensed 159Antti Toskala and Harri Holma 10.1 Introduction 159 10.2 Unlicensed Spectrum 160 10.3 Operation Environment 161 10.4 Motivation for the Use of Unlicensed Spectrum with LTE 162 10.5 Key Requirements for 5 GHz Band Coexistence 162 10.6 LTE Principle on Unlicensed Band 164 10.7 LTE Performance on the Unlicensed Band 165 10.8 Coexistence Performance 166 10.9 Coverage with LTE in 5 GHz Band 170 10.10 Standardization 172 10.11 Conclusions 172 References 173 11 LTE Macro Cell Evolution 175Mihai Enescu, Amitava Ghosh, Bishwarup Mondal and Antti Toskala 11.1 Introduction 175 11.2 Network-Assisted Interference Cancellation 176 11.3 Evolution of Antenna Array Technology 181 11.4 Deployment Scenarios for Antenna Arrays 182 11.5 Massive-MIMO Supported by LTE 187 11.5.1 Sectorization (Vertical)-Based Approaches 187 11.5.2 Reciprocity-Based Approaches 188 11.6 Further LTE Multi-antenna Standardization 189 11.7 Release 13 Advanced Receiver Enhancements 192 11.8 Conclusions 192 References 193 12 LTE Key Performance Indicator Optimization 195Jussi Reunanen, Jari Salo and Riku Luostari 12.1 Introduction 195 12.2 Key Performance Indicators 196 12.3 Physical Layer Optimization 197 12.4 Call Setup 200 12.4.1 Random Access Setup 202 12.4.2 RRC Connection Setup 208 12.4.3 E-RAB Setup 215 12.5 E-RAB Drop 218 12.5.1 Handover Performance 218 12.5.2 UE-Triggered RRC Connection Re-establishments 222 12.5.3 eNodeB-triggered RRC Connection Re-establishments 226 12.6 Handover and Mobility Optimization 228 12.7 Throughput Optimization 232 12.7.1 MIMO Multi-stream Usage Optimization 234 12.8 High-Speed Train Optimization 243 12.9 Network Density Benchmarking 246 12.10 Summary 247 References 248 13 Capacity Optimization 249Jussi Reunanen, Riku Luostari and Harri Holma 13.1 Introduction 249 13.2 Traffic Profiles in Mass Events 251 13.3 Uplink Interference Management 255 13.3.1 PUSCH 257 13.3.2 PUCCH 265 13.3.3 RACH and RRC Setup Success Rate 265 13.3.4 Centralized RAN 269 13.4 Downlink Interference Management 270 13.4.1 PDSCH 271 13.4.2 Physical Downlink Control Channel 276 13.5 Signalling Load and Number of Connected Users Dimensioning 279 13.5.1 Signalling Load 280 13.5.2 RRC-Connected Users 280 13.6 Load Balancing 284 13.7 Capacity Bottleneck Analysis 286 13.8 Summary 291 References 292 14 VoLTE Optimization 293Riku Luostari, Jari Salo, Jussi Reunanen and Harri Holma 14.1 Introduction 293 14.2 Voice Options for LTE Smartphones 293 14.3 Circuit Switched Fallback 294 14.3.1 Basic Concepts 294 14.3.2 CSFB Call Setup Time, Transition to Target RAT 296 14.3.3 CSFB Call Setup Success Rate 302 14.3.4 Return to LTE after CSFB Call 302 14.4 Voice over LTE 307 14.4.1 Setup Success Rate and Drop Rate 307 14.4.2 TTI Bundling and RLC Segmentation 310 14.4.3 Semi-persistent Scheduling 312 14.4.4 Packet Bundling 314 14.4.5 Re-establishment with Radio Preparations 315 14.4.6 Voice Quality on VoLTE 315 14.5 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity 322 14.5.1 Signalling Flows 322 14.5.2 Performance 326 14.6 Summary 331 References 331 15 Inter-layer Mobility Optimization 333Jari Salo and Jussi Reunanen 15.1 Introduction 333 15.2 Inter-layer Idle Mode Mobility and Measurements 334 15.2.1 Initial Cell Selection and Minimum Criteria for UE to Camp on a Cell 334 15.2.2 Summary of Cell Reselection Rules 336 15.2.3 Idle Mode Measurements 338 15.3 Inter-layer Connected Mode Measurements 344 15.4 Inter-layer Mobility for Coverage-Limited Network 350 15.4.1 Basic Concepts 350 15.4.2 Mapping Throughput Target to SINR, RSRQ and RSRP 353 15.4.3 Inter-layer Mobility Example #1 (Non-equal Priority Non-equal Bandwidth LTE Layers) 361 15.4.4 Inter-layer Mobility Example #2 (Equal Priority Equal Bandwidth LTE Layers) 368 15.5 Inter-layer Mobility for Capacity-Limited Networks 370 15.5.1 Static Load Balancing via Mobility Thresholds 371 15.5.2 Dynamic Load Balancing via eNodeB Algorithms 375 15.6 Summary 377 References 377 16 Smartphone Optimization 379Rafael Sanchez-Mejias, Laurent No¨el and Harri Holma 16.1 Introduction 379 16.2 Smartphone Traffic Analysis in LTE Networks 380 16.2.1 Data Volumes and Asymmetry 380 16.2.2 Traffic-Related Signalling 381 16.2.3 Mobility-Related Signalling 382 16.2.4 User Connectivity 382 16.3 Smartphone Power Consumption Optimization 384 16.3.1 Impact of Downlink Carrier Aggregation 384 16.3.2 Impact of Discontinuous Reception 385 16.4 Smartphone Operating Systems 391 16.5 Messaging Applications 391 16.6 Streaming Applications 393 16.7 Voice over LTE 394 16.7.1 VoLTE System Architecture 395 16.7.2 VoLTE Performance Analysis 396 16.7.3 Standby Performance 404 16.7.4 Impact of Network Loading and Radio Quality 405 16.8 Smartphone Battery, Baseband and RF Design Aspects 406 16.8.1 Trends in Battery Capacity 406 16.8.2 Trends in Cellular Chipset Power Consumption 409 16.8.3 Impact of Small Cells on Smartphone Power Consumption 412 16.9 Summary 421 References 421 17 Further Outlook for LTE Evolution and 5G 423Antti Toskala and Karri Ranta-aho 17.1 Introduction 423 17.2 Further LTE-Advanced Beyond Release 13 423 17.3 Towards 5G 426 17.4 5G Spectrum 427 17.5 Key 5G Radio Technologies 428 17.6 Expected 5G Schedule 430 17.7 Conclusions 432 References 432 Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisMost practitioners within wind energy have only a very basic knowledge about meteorology, leading to a lack of understanding of one of the most fundamental subjects in wind energy. This book will therefore provide an easy-to-understand introduction to the subject of meteorology, as seen from the viewpoint of wind energy. Catering for a range of academic backgrounds, the book is mathematically rigorous with accessible explanations for non-mathematically oriented readers. Through exercises in the text and at the end of each chapter the reader will be challenged to think, seek further information and practice the knowledge obtained from reading the book. This practical yet comprehensive reference will enable readers to fully understand the theoretical background of meteorology with wind energy in mind and will include topics such as: measurements; wind profiles; wakes; modelling; turbulence and the fundamentals of atmospheric flow on all scales including the local scale.<Table of ContentsDedication iii Foreword ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii List of Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 2 Meteorological Basics 5 2.1 Why does the wind blow? 5 2.2 The vertical structure of the atmosphere 9 2.3 Atmospheric variables and forces 13 2.3.1 Atmospheric Variables 13 2.3.2 Atmospheric Forces 13 2.3.3 Force Balances and the Geostrophic Wind 16 2.4 Length and time scales of atmospheric flow 20 2.5 Larger-scale systems (aka Weather) 22 2.5.1 Mid-latitudinal cyclone (low-pressure system) 22 2.5.2 Anticyclones (high-pressure systems) 23 2.5.3 Hurricanes 27 2.5.4 Monsoons 27 2.5.5 Climatological circulations 28 2.6 Summary 33 2.7 Exercises 34 3 Measurements 37 3.1 Philosophy: what does it mean to measure? 37 3.2 What do we measure? 40 3.3 Measurement theory 42 3.3.1 Are we good to go? 48 3.4 Practice 49 3.4.1 Measuring 49 3.4.2 Cup anemometer 52 3.4.3 Wind Vane 54 3.4.4 Sonic Anemometer 55 3.4.5 Hot wire 57 3.4.6 Pitot tube 57 3.4.7 Thermometer 58 3.4.8 Barometer 59 3.4.9 Remote sensing 60 3.4.10 Ceilometer 67 3.4.11 Weather balloon or the Radiosonde 67 3.4.12 Satellite-borne instruments 68 3.5 Summary 71 3.6 Exercises 72 4 The Wind Profile 73 4.1 A hand-waving way of deriving the simple log profile 73 4.2 Working with the log profile 75 4.3 The power law 77 4.4 Averaging times and other dependencies 79 4.5 Two famous profiles 80 4.6 Zero-plane displacement 82 4.7 Internal Boundary Layers (IBL) 83 4.8 Stability 86 4.9 Monin-Obukhov Theory 90 4.10 Deviations with height 94 4.11 Connection with geostrophic drag law 95 4.12 Effect of orography, obstacles and thermal flows on the profile 96 4.13 Direction profile 96 4.14 Summary 97 4.15 Excercises 97 5 Local Flow 99 5.1 Local effects 100 5.2 Orographic forcing 100 5.2.1 Analytical models 101 5.2.2 Attached flow: Flow in simple terrain 104 5.2.3 Detached flow: Flow in complex terrain 107 5.2.4 More advanced models for flow in complex terrain 109 5.3 Roughness 111 5.4 Obstacles 113 5.5 Thermally-driven flows 116 5.5.1 Sea/land breezes 116 5.5.2 Ana-/katabatic winds 118 5.6 Effect of stability 120 5.7 Summary 120 5.8 Exercises 120 6 Turbulence 123 6.1 What generates turbulence? 125 6.2 Reynolds Decomposition and Averaging 125 6.3 Spectra 126 6.3.1 Understanding Fourier analysis and spectra, a poor man/woman’s approach 127 6.3.2 Standard types of spectra 131 6.4 Measuring Turbulence 135 6.5 Turbulent Loads 135 6.6 Extreme winds 137 6.7 Summary 137 6.8 Exercises 138 7 Wakes 139 7.1 Turbine-to-turbine wakes 140 7.1.1 The NO Jensen model 142 7.1.2 The Ainslie model 145 7.1.3 Similarity theory 147 7.1.4 Effect on power 149 7.1.5 Wake models, summary 152 7.2 Several wind turbines, i.e. a wind farm 153 7.3 Advanced topics 153 7.3.1 Measuring the wakes 153 7.3.2 Onshore/offshore wakes 155 7.3.3 Very large wind farms, state of the art 156 7.3.4 Wind farm to wind farm interaction 156 7.4 Summary 156 7.5 Exercises 157 8 Modelling 159 8.1 Modelling and what it means 159 8.2 Input 159 8.3 Modelling 160 8.3.1 NWP (Numerical Weather Prediction) models 163 8.3.2 Sub-grid processes 166 8.4 Output 167 8.5 Errors 168 8.6 So, what is a good model? 169 8.7 Chaos 170 8.7.1 Ensemble prediction 171 8.8 Summary 171 8.9 Exercises 173 9 Conclusion 175 References 177 A Cheat sheet 181 B Answers to Exercises 185 C Sample wind speed and direction data 203 Index 205

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a simplified visionary approach about the future direction of IoT, addressing its wide-scale adoption in many markets, its interception with advanced technology, the explosive growth in data, and the emergence of data analytics. IoT business applications span multiple vertical markets. The objective is to inspire creative thinking and collaboration among startups and entrepreneurs which will breed innovation and deliver IoT solutions that will positively impact us by making business processes more efficient, and improving our quality of life. With increasing proliferation of smart-phones and social media, data generated by user wearable/mobile devices continue to be key sources of information about us and the markets around us. Better insights will be gained through cognitive computation coupled with business intelligence and visual analytics that are GIS-based.Table of ContentsForeword xi About the Authors xv Preface xix 1 Introductions and Motivation 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Book 1 1.2.1 Objectives 1 1.2.2 Benefits 2 1.2.3 Organization 3 1.2.4 Book Cover 4 1.2.5 Impact of C-IoT 6 1.2.6 Summary 8 1.3 C-IoT Terms of References 9 1.3.1 Introduction 10 1.3.2 Need for IoT Framework 12 1.3.3 C-IoT Domains and Business Applications Model 13 1.3.4 Roadmap of IoT 20 1.3.5 C-IoT Platform/Developer Community 22 1.3.6 C-IoT Opportunities for Applications, Solutions, and Systems 23 1.4 The Future 26 1.4.1 General Trends 26 1.4.2 Point Solutions 27 1.4.3 Collaborative Internet of Things 29 1.4.4 C-IoT and RFID 36 1.4.5 C-IoT and Nanotechnology 38 1.4.6 Cyber-Collaborative IoT (C2-IoT) 39 1.4.7 C2-IoT and Ebola Case 40 1.4.8 Summary 43 References 46 2 Application Requirements 47 2.1 C-IoT Landscape 47 2.1.1 C-IoT Model and Architecture Layers 47 2.1.2 C-IoT Model and Enabling Technologies 48 2.1.3 Definition of Key Elements 50 2.1.4 Requirement Considerations 64 2.1.5 C-IoT System Solution – Requirement Considerations 67 2.2 Application Requirements – Use Cases 75 2.3 Health and Fitness System for Individual/Industry/Infrastructure (Lead Example) 76 2.3.1 Landscape 76 2.3.2 Health & Fitness Sensing Requirements 79 2.3.3 Health & Fitness Gateway Requirements 80 2.3.4 Health & Fitness Service Requirements 80 2.3.5 Health & Fitness and Solution Considerations 83 2.3.6 Health & Fitness and System Considerations 84 2.3.7 Health & Fitness and Hospitals 84 2.4 Video Surveillance, Drone, and Machine Vision 84 2.4.1 Landscape 84 2.4.2 Video Surveillance – across Home, Industry, and Infrastructure 86 2.4.3 Video Surveillance Sensing Requirements 88 2.4.4 Video Surveillance Gateway Requirements 89 2.4.5 Video Surveillance Services 90 2.4.6 Example: Red-Light Camera – Photo Enforcement Camera 93 2.4.7 Conclusion 94 2.5 Smart Home and Building 95 2.5.1 Landscape 95 2.5.2 Requirements 97 2.5.3 Smart Home & Building Sensing Requirements 99 2.5.4 Smart Home & Building Gateway Requirements 99 2.5.5 Smart Home & Building Services 100 2.6 Smart Energy 101 2.6.1 Landscape 101 2.6.2 Requirements 102 2.6.3 Smart Energy and Sensing Requirements 103 2.6.4 Smart Energy and Gateway Requirements 103 2.6.5 Smart Energy – Services 103 2.6.6 The Smart Energy App 104 2.6.7 Smart Energy and Network Security 105 2.7 Track and Monitor 106 2.7.1 Landscape 106 2.7.2 Track and Monitor – Sensing Requirements 106 2.7.3 Track and Monitor – Services 107 2.7.4 Track and Monitor – Solution Considerations 108 2.7.5 Track and Monitor Examples 108 2.8 Smart Factory 109 2.8.1 Factory Automation – Robot 109 2.8.2 Industrial 110 2.8.3 Service Robot 112 2.9 Others (Smart Car, Smart Truck, Drone, Machine Vision, and Smart City) 113 2.9.1 Smart Car 113 2.9.2 Smart Roadside 119 2.9.3 Drone 121 2.9.4 Machine Vision 123 2.9.5 Smart City 124 References 128 3 C-IoT Applications and Services 131 3.1 Smart IoT Application Use Cases 132 3.1.1 Health Monitoring – Individual Level (Fitness/Health-Tracking Wearables) 134 3.1.2 Health Monitoring at Business Level (e.g., Clinic and Homes for the Elderly) 137 3.1.3 Home and Building Automation – Individual Level (Smart Home) 146 3.1.4 Smart Energy and Smart Grid 158 3.1.5 Smart Energy Gateways 172 3.1.6 Industrial and Factory Automation 182 3.1.7 Smart Transportation and Fleet Logistics (Connected Cars – V2X: V2V, V2I) 185 3.1.8 Smart City 189 3.2 Smart IoT Platform 190 3.2.1 Smart IoT Software Gateway Platform 191 3.2.2 Smart Sensor Fusion Software Platform 195 3.3 Secured C-IoT Software Platform 196 3.3.1 Overview 197 3.3.2 C-IoT Security – Example of Smart Energy 197 3.3.3 Securing NAN (Metrology-to-Concentrator) 199 3.3.4 Securing Home Area Network (HAN) 201 3.3.5 Securing WAN (Concentrator-to-Substation/Utility Servers) 203 3.3.6 Platform Solution for Concentrator 203 3.3.7 Platform Solution for Substation/Utility Servers 204 3.3.8 Network Topology and IP Addressing: WAN 204 3.3.9 Security on the Concentrator and Utility Servers 204 3.3.10 Summary on C-IoT Security 205 References 207 4 IoT Reference Design Kit 209 4.1 Hardware Equipment List for the Demonstration 210 4.2 Software Required for Demonstration 210 4.3 Safely Power Off the Reference Platform 214 4.4 ZigBee Home and Building Automation 215 4.4.1 Troubleshooting ZigBee Home and Building Automation 217 4.5 Network Video Recorder (NVR) for Video Surveillance 217 4.5.1 Troubleshooting NVR 219 4.6 Internet 3G Broadband Gateway 219 4.7 UPNP 220 4.8 Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) Media Server 221 4.8.1 Set Up Reference Platform as DLNA Server 221 4.8.2 Set Up DLNA Clients 222 References 223 5 C-IoT Cloud-Based Services and C-IoT User Device Diversity 225 5.1 C-IoT Cloud-Based Services 225 5.1.1 Introduction and Drivers to C-IoT Service Platform 225 5.1.2 Classes of C-IoT Cloud Computing 227 5.1.3 C-IoT Innovative and Collaborative Services 228 5.1.4 The Emerging Data Center LAN 229 5.2 C-IoT User Device Diversity 231 5.2.1 Introduction 231 5.2.2 C-IoT Developers/Platform 232 5.2.3 Wearable Devices – Individual 234 5.2.4 Harvesting (Self-Powered Nodes) – Infrastructure Applications 235 5.2.5 Embedded Devices and Servers 235 5.2.6 Performing Sentiment Analysis Using Big Data 236 5.2.7 IBM Watson for Cognitive Innovations 237 5.2.8 Far-Reaching Consequences 237 5.2.9 C-IoT (Collaborative IoT) 238 References 238 6 Impact of C-IoT and Tips 239 6.1 Impact on Business Process Productivity and Smart of Digital Life 239 6.1.1 Individual 239 6.1.2 Industry 240 6.1.3 Infrastructure 241 6.2 Considerations of Developing Differentiated C-IoT Solutions 242 6.2.1 Software Processes and Platform 242 6.2.2 Standardization 242 6.2.3 Sensors and C-IoT 243 6.2.4 Advertising Ecosystem Value Exchange 244 6.2.5 Opportunity with Industry Supply Chain for Material Handling 244 6.3 Practical Tips on Maintaining Digital Lifestyle 247 6.3.1 Mobile and Wearable Computing 247 6.3.2 Robotics and Automation 248 6.3.3 Sensors and C-IoT 249 6.3.4 Big Data and Predictive Analysis 250 6.3.5 The Changing Workforce 250 6.3.6 Sustainability 251 References 251 7 Conclusion 253 7.1 Simple C-IoT Domains and Model 253 7.2 Disruptive Business Applications of C-IoT 254 7.2.1 Individual 254 7.2.2 Industry 254 7.3 A New Digital Lifestyle 255 7.4 Development Platform 255 7.4.1 Influencers for Smart Connected Homes 256 7.4.2 Influencers for Industrial Internet 256 7.5 C-IoT Emerging Standards, Consortiums, and Other Initiatives 256 7.5.1 C-IoT Emerging Standards 257 7.5.2 C-IoT Emerging Consortiums 259 7.5.3 Forums, Workshops, and Other Initiatives 260 7.5.4 C-IoT and Radio Communications 260 7.5.5 C-IoT and Nanotechnology 261 7.5.6 C-IoT and Security 261 7.6 Final Note 262 References 262 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an overview of vehicular networks, fromtraffic engineering to human factors. The book addresses theunique design requirements for security and privacy preservationfor vehicular communications to increase road safety.Table of ContentsList of Figures xi List of Tables xv Acronyms xvii Preface xix 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 DSRC AND VANET 2 1.2.1 DSRC 2 1.2.2 VANET 3 1.2.3 Characteristics of VANET 6 1.3 Security and Privacy Threats 7 1.4 Security and Privacy Requirements 8 1.5 Challenges and Prospects 9 1.5.1 Conditional Privacy Preservation in VANETs 9 1.5.2 Authentication with Efficient Revocation in VANETs 10 1.6 Standardization and Related Activities 11 1.7 Security Primitives 13 1.8 Outline of the Book 17 References 17 2 GSIS: GROUP SIGNATURE AND ID-BASED SIGNATURE-BASED SECURE AND PRIVACY-PRESERVING PROTOCOL 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Preliminaries and Background 23 2.2.1 Group Signature 23 2.2.2 Bilinear Pairing and ID-Based Cryptography 23 2.2.3 Threat Model 23 2.2.4 Desired Requirements 24 2.3 Proposed Secure and Privacy-Preserving Protocol 25 2.3.1 Problem Formulation 25 2.3.2 System Setup 27 2.3.3 Security Protocol between OBUs 29 2.3.4 Security Protocol between RSUs and OBUs 38 2.4 Performance Evaluation 41 2.4.1 Impact of Traffic Load 43 2.4.2 Impact of Cryptographic Signature Verification Delay 43 2.4.3 Membership Revocation and Tracing Efficiency 45 2.5 Concluding Remarks 47 References 47 3 ECPP: EFFICIENT CONDITIONAL PRIVACY PRESERVATION PROTOCOL 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 System Model and Problem Formulation 52 3.2.1 System Model 52 3.2.2 Design Objectives 54 3.3 Proposed ECPP Protocol 55 3.3.1 System Initialization 55 3.3.2 OBU Short-Time Anonymous Key Generation 56 3.3.3 OBU Safety Message Sending 62 3.3.4 OBU Fast Tracking Algorithm 63 3.4 Analysis on Conditional Privacy Preservation 64 3.5 Performance Analysis 66 3.5.1 OBU Storage Overhead 66 3.5.2 OBU Computation Overhead on Verification 66 3.5.3 TA Computation Complexity on OBU Tracking 68 3.6 Concluding Remarks 69 References 69 4 PSEUDONYM-CHANGING STRATEGY FOR LOCATION PRIVACY 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Problem Definition 73 4.2.1 Network Model 73 4.2.2 Threat Model 74 4.2.3 Location Privacy Requirements 75 4.3 Proposed PCS Strategy for Location Privacy 75 4.3.1 KPSD Model for PCS Strategy 75 4.3.2 Anonymity Set Analysis for Achieved Location Privacy 79 4.3.3 Feasibility Analysis of PCS Strategy 85 4.4 Performance Evaluation 86 4.5 Concluding Remarks 89 References 89 5 RSU-AIDED MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION 91 5.1 Introduction 91 5.2 System Model and Preliminaries 93 5.2.1 System Model 93 5.2.2 Assumption 93 5.2.3 Problem Statement 94 5.2.4 Security Objectives 95 5.3 Proposed RSU-Aided Message Authentication Scheme 96 5.3.1 Overview 96 5.3.2 Mutual Authentication and Key Agreement between RSUs and Vehicles 96 5.3.3 Hash Aggregation 98 5.3.4 Verification 99 5.3.5 Privacy Enhancement 100 5.4 Performance Evaluation 101 5.4.1 Message Loss Ratio 102 5.4.2 Message Delay 102 5.4.3 Communication Overhead 104 5.5 Security Analysis 105 5.6 Concluding Remarks 106 References 107 6 TESLA-BASED BROADCAST AUTHENTICATION 109 6.1 Introduction 109 6.2 Timed Efficient and Secure Vehicular Communication Scheme 110 6.2.1 Preliminaries 110 6.2.2 System Formulation 112 6.2.3 Proposed TSVC Scheme 113 6.2.4 Enhanced TSVC with Nonrepudiation 118 6.2.5 Discussion 123 6.3 Security Analysis 129 6.4 Performance Evaluation 129 6.4.1 Impact of Vehicle Moving Speed 131 6.4.2 Impact of Vehicle Density 132 6.5 Concluding Remarks 134 References 134 7 DISTRIBUTED COOPERATIVE MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION 137 7.1 Introduction 137 7.2 Problem Formulation 138 7.2.1 Network Model 138 7.2.2 Security Model 139 7.3 Basic Cooperative Authentication Scheme 140 7.4 Secure Cooperative Authentication Scheme 141 7.4.1 Evidence and Token for Fairness 142 7.4.2 Authentication Proof 145 7.4.3 Flows of Proposed Scheme 146 7.5 Security Analysis 147 7.5.1 Linkability Attack 147 7.5.2 Free-Riding Attack without Authentication Efforts 147 7.5.3 Free-Riding Attack with Fake Authentication Efforts 148 7.6 Performance Evaluation 148 7.6.1 Simulation Settings 148 7.6.2 Simulation Results 149 7.7 Concluding Remarks 150 References 151 8 CONTEXT-AWARE COOPERATIVE AUTHENTICATION 153 8.1 Introduction 153 8.2 Message Trustworthiness in VANETs 156 8.3 System Model and Design Goal 159 8.3.1 Network Model 159 8.3.2 Attack Model 159 8.3.3 Design Goals 160 8.4 Preliminaries 160 8.4.1 Pairing Technique 160 8.4.2 Aggregate Signature and Batch Verification 160 8.5 Proposed AEMAT Scheme 161 8.5.1 System Setup 161 8.5.2 Registration 162 8.5.3 SER Generation and Broadcasting 162 8.5.4 SER Opportunistic Forwarding 162 8.5.5 SER Aggregated Authentication 163 8.5.6 SER Aggregated Trustworthiness 165 8.6 Security Discussion 168 8.6.1 Collusion Attacks 168 8.6.2 Privacy Protection of Witnesses 168 8.7 Performance Evaluation 169 8.7.1 Transmission Cost 169 8.7.2 Computational Cost 169 8.8 Concluding Remarks 170 References 170 9 FAST HANDOVER AUTHENTICATION BASED ON MOBILITY PREDICTION 173 9.1 Introduction 173 9.2 Vehicular Network Architecture 175 9.3 Proposed Fast Handover Authentication Scheme Based on Mobility Prediction 176 9.3.1 Multilayer Perceptron Classifier 176 9.3.2 Proposed Authentication Scheme 178 9.4 Security Analysis 183 9.4.1 Replay Attack 183 9.4.2 Forward Secrecy 183 9.5 Performance Evaluation 184 9.6 Concluding Remarks 185 References 186 Index 187

Read more less

Book SynopsisA computational perspective on partial order and lattice theory, focusing on algorithms and their applications This book provides a uniform treatment of the theory and applications of lattice theory.Trade Review"This nice book on lattices and their applications in computer science is written from the perspective of a computer scientist rather than a mathematician...Given its emphasis on algorithms and their complexity, it seems to be mainly intended for students of computer science and engineering. The author's approach is based on the premise that a student needs to learn the heuristics that guide the proofs, besides the proofs themselves, and to learn ways to extend and analyze theorems...One of the most important and valuable features of the book is its focus on applications of lattice theory. The author intends to treat applications on par with the theory." Altogether a "lovely book". (Mathematical Reviews/MathSciNet April 2017)Table of ContentsList of Figures xiii Nomenclature xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Relations 2 1.3 Partial Orders 3 1.4 Join and Meet Operations 5 1.5 Operations on Posets 7 1.6 Ideals and Filters 8 1.7 Special Elements in Posets 9 1.8 Irreducible Elements 10 1.9 Dissector Elements 11 1.10 Applications: Distributed Computations 11 1.11 Applications: Combinatorics 12 1.12 Notation and Proof Format 13 1.13 Problems 15 1.14 Bibliographic Remarks 15 2 Representing Posets 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Labeling Elements of The Poset 17 2.3 Adjacency List Representation 18 2.4 Vector Clock Representation 20 2.5 Matrix Representation 22 2.6 Dimension-Based Representation 22 2.7 Algorithms to Compute Irreducibles 23 2.8 Infinite Posets 24 2.9 Problems 26 2.10 Bibliographic Remarks 27 3 Dilworth’s Theorem 29 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Dilworth’s Theorem 29 3.3 Appreciation of Dilworth’s Theorem 30 3.4 Dual of Dilworth’s Theorem 32 3.5 Generalizations of Dilworth’s Theorem 32 3.6 Algorithmic Perspective of Dilworth’s Theorem 32 3.7 Application: Hall’s Marriage Theorem 33 3.8 Application: Bipartite Matching 34 3.9 Online Decomposition of Posets 35 3.10 A Lower Bound on Online Chain Partition 37 3.11 Problems 38 3.12 Bibliographic Remarks 39 4 Merging Algorithms 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Algorithm to Merge Chains in Vector Clock Representation 41 4.3 An Upper Bound for Detecting an Antichain of Size K 47 4.4 A Lower Bound for Detecting an Antichain of Size K 48 4.5 An Incremental Algorithm for Optimal Chain Decomposition 50 4.6 Problems 50 4.7 Bibliographic Remarks 51 5 Lattices 53 5.1 Introduction 53 5.2 Sublattices 54 5.3 Lattices as Algebraic Structures 55 5.4 Bounding The Size of The Cover Relation of a Lattice 56 5.5 Join-Irreducible Elements Revisited 57 5.6 Problems 59 5.7 Bibliographic Remarks 60 6 Lattice Completion 61 6.1 Introduction 61 6.2 Complete Lattices 61 6.3 Closure Operators 62 6.4 Topped ∩-Structures 63 6.5 Dedekind–Macneille Completion 64 6.6 Structure of Dedekind--Macneille Completion of a Poset 67 6.7 An Incremental Algorithm for Lattice Completion 69 6.8 Breadth First Search Enumeration of Normal Cuts 71 6.9 Depth First Search Enumeration of Normal Cuts 73 6.10 Application: Finding the Meet and Join of Events 75 6.11 Application: Detecting Global Predicates in Distributed Systems 76 6.12 Application: Data Mining 77 6.13 Problems 78 6.14 Bibliographic Remarks 78 7 Morphisms 79 7.1 Introduction 79 7.2 Lattice Homomorphism 79 7.3 Lattice Isomorphism 80 7.4 Lattice Congruences 82 7.5 Quotient Lattice 83 7.6 Lattice Homomorphism and Congruence 83 7.7 Properties of Lattice Congruence Blocks 84 7.8 Application: Model Checking on Reduced Lattices 85 7.9 Problems 89 7.10 Bibliographic Remarks 90 8 Modular Lattices 91 8.1 Introduction 91 8.2 Modular Lattice 91 8.3 Characterization of Modular Lattices 92 8.4 Problems 98 8.5 Bibliographic Remarks 98 9 Distributive Lattices 99 9.1 Introduction 99 9.2 Forbidden Sublattices 99 9.3 Join-Prime Elements 100 9.4 Birkhoff’s Representation Theorem 101 9.5 Finitary Distributive Lattices 104 9.6 Problems 104 9.7 Bibliographic Remarks 105 10 Slicing 107 10.1 Introduction 107 10.2 Representing Finite Distributive Lattices 107 10.3 Predicates on Ideals 110 10.4 Application: Slicing Distributed Computations 116 10.5 Problems 117 10.6 Bibliographic Remarks 118 11 Applications of Slicing to Combinatorics 119 11.1 Introduction 119 11.2 Counting Ideals 120 11.3 Boolean Algebra and Set Families 121 11.4 Set Families of Size k 122 11.5 Integer Partitions 123 11.6 Permutations 127 11.7 Problems 129 11.8 Bibliographic Remarks 129 12 Interval Orders 131 12.1 Introduction 131 12.2 Weak Order 131 12.3 Semiorder 133 12.4 Interval Order 134 12.5 Problems 136 12.6 Bibliographic Remarks 137 13 Tractable Posets 139 13.1 Introduction 139 13.2 Series–Parallel Posets 139 13.3 Two-Dimensional Posets 142 13.4 Counting Ideals of a Two-Dimensional Poset 145 13.5 Problems 146 13.6 Bibliographic Remarks 147 14 Enumeration Algorithms 149 14.1 Introduction 149 14.2 BFS Traversal 150 14.3 DFS Traversal 154 14.4 LEX Traversal 154 14.5 Uniflow Partition of Posets 160 14.6 Enumerating Tuples of Product Spaces 163 14.7 Enumerating All Subsets 163 14.8 Enumerating All Subsets of Size k 165 14.9 Enumerating Young’s Lattice 166 14.10 Enumerating Permutations 167 14.11 Lexical Enumeration of All Order Ideals of a Given Rank 168 14.12 Problems 172 14.13 Bibliographic Remarks 173 15 Lattice of Maximal Antichains 159 15.1 Introduction 159 15.2 Maximal Antichain Lattice 161 15.3 An Incremental Algorithm Based on Union Closure 163 15.4 An Incremental Algorithm Based on BFS 165 15.5 Traversal of the Lattice of Maximal Antichains 166 15.6 Application: Detecting Antichain-Consistent Predicates 168 15.7 Construction and Enumeration of Width Antichain Lattice 169 15.8 Lexical Enumeration of Closed Sets 171 15.9 Construction of Lattices Based on Union Closure 174 15.10 Problems 174 15.11 Bibliographic Remarks 175 16 Dimension Theory 177 16.1 Introduction 177 16.2 Chain Realizers 178 16.3 Standard Examples of Dimension Theory 179 16.4 Relationship Between the Dimension and the Width of a Poset 180 16.5 Removal Theorems for Dimension 181 16.6 Critical Pairs in the Poset 182 16.7 String Realizers 184 16.8 Rectangle Realizers 193 16.9 Order Decomposition Method and Its Applications 194 16.10 Problems 196 16.11 Bibliographic Remarks 197 17 Fixed Point Theory 215 17.1 Complete Partial Orders 215 17.2 Knaster–Tarski Theorem 216 17.3 Application: Defining Recursion Using Fixed Points 218 17.4 Problems 226 17.5 Bibliographic Remarks 227 Bibliography 229 Index 235

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes a full range of contemporary techniques for the design of transmitters and receivers for communications systems operating in the range from 1 through to 300 GHz. In this frequency range there is a wide range of technologies that need to be employed, with silicon ICs at the core but, compared with other electronics systems, a much greater use of more specialist devices and components for high performance for example, high Q-factor/low loss and good power efficiency. Many text books do, of course, cover these topics but what makes thisbook timely is the rapid adoption of millimetre-waves (frequencies from 30 to 300 GHz) for a wide range of consumer applications such as wireless high definition TV, ''5G'' Gigabit mobile internet systems and automotive radars. It has taken many years to develop low-cost technologies for suitable transmitters and receivers, so previously these frequencies have been employed only in expensive military and space applications. The book Table of ContentsPreface 1 Introduction 2 Transmitters and Receivers 3 Scattering Parameters 4 Lumped Element Filters 5 Transmission Line Theory 6 Transmission Line Components 7 Transmission-Line Filters 8 Semiconductor Devices 9 Impedance Matching 10 Amplifiers 11 Oscillators 12 Mixers and Modulators 13 RF MEMS 14 Antennas and Propagation 15 Digital Signal Processing for Transceivers 16 Packaging and Assembly 17 Electronic Design Automation 18 Measurement Techniques Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaster programming Arduino with this hands-on guide Arduino Sketches is a practical guide to programming the increasingly popular microcontroller that brings gadgets to life. Accessible to tech-lovers at any level, this book provides expert instruction on Arduino programming and hands-on practice to test your skills. You''ll find coverage of the various Arduino boards, detailed explanations of each standard library, and guidance on creating libraries from scratch plus practical examples that demonstrate the everyday use of the skills you''re learning. Work on increasingly advanced programming projects, and gain more control as you learn about hardware-specific libraries and how to build your own. Take full advantage of the Arduino API, and learn the tips and tricks that will broaden your skillset. The Arduino development board comes with an embedded processor and sockets that allow you to quickly attach peripherals without tools or solders. It''s easy to buildTable of ContentsIntroduction xxix Part I Introduction to Arduino 1 Chapter 1 Introduction to Arduino 3 Atmel AVR 5 The Arduino Project 7 The ATmega Series 8 The ATmega Series 8 The ATtiny Series 8 Other Series 9 The Different Arduinos 9 Arduino Uno 10 Arduino Leonardo 10 Arduino Ethernet 11 Arduino Mega 2560 11 Arduino Mini 13 Arduino Micro 13 Arduino Due 13 LilyPad Arduino 14 Arduino Pro 16 Arduino Robot 16 Arduino Esplora 18 Arduino Yún 18 Arduino Tre 19 Arduino Zero 19 Your Own Arduino? 20 Shields 20 What Is a Shield? 20 The Different Shields 21 Arduino Motor Shield 21 Arduino Wireless SD Shield 21 Arduino Ethernet Shield 21 Arduino WiFi Shield 22 Arduino GSM Shield 22 Your Own Shield 22 What Can You Do with an Arduino? 22 What You Will Need for This Book 23 Summary 24 Chapter 2 Programming for the Arduino 25 Installing Your Environment 26 Downloading the Software 27 Running the Software 28 Using Your Own IDE 29 Your First Program 29 Understanding Your First Sketch 33 Programming Basics 36 Variables and Data Types 36 Control Structures 38 if Statement 38 switch Case 39 while Loop 40 for Loop 41 Functions 42 Libraries 42 Summary 42 Chapter 3 Electronics Basics 45 Electronics 101 46 Voltage, Amperage, and Resistance 46 Voltage 47 Amperage 48 Resistance 48 Ohm’s Law 49 The Basic Components 49 Resistors 50 Different Resistor Values 50 Identifying Resistor Values 50 Using Resistors 52 Capacitors 53 Using Capacitors 54 Diodes 54 Different Types of Diodes 54 Using Diodes 55 Light-Emitting Diodes 55 Using LEDs 55 Transistors 56 Using Transistors 56 Breadboards 56 Inputs and Outputs 57 Connecting a Light-Emitting Diode 58 Calculation 58 Software 59 Hardware 60 What Now? 61 Summary 61 Part II Standard Libraries 63 Chapter 4 The Arduino Language 65 I/O Functions 65 Digital I/O 65 pinMode() 66 digitalRead() 66 digitalWrite() 67 Analog I/O 67 analogRead() 68 analogWrite() 68 Generating Audio Tones 69 tone() 69 noTone() 69 Reading Pulses 69 pulseIn() 70 Time Functions 70 delay() 70 delayMicroseconds() 71 millis() 71 micros() 71 Mathematical Functions 72 min() 72 max() 72 constrain() 73 abs() 73 map() 73 pow() 74 sqrt() 74 random() 74 Trigonometry 75 sin() 76 cos() 76 tan() 76 Constants 76 Interrupts 76 attachInterrupt() 77 detachInterrupt() 78 noInterrupts() 78 interrupts() 78 Summary 79 Chapter 5 Serial Communication 81 Introducing Serial Communication 82 UART Communications 84 Baud Rate 84 Data Bits 85 Parity 85 Stop Bits 86 Debugging and Output 86 Starting a Serial Connection 87 Writing Data 88 Sending Text 88 Sending Data 90 Reading Data 91 Starting Communications 91 Is Data Waiting? 91 Reading a Byte 92 Reading Multiple Bytes 92 Taking a Peek 93 Parsing Data 93 Cleaning Up 94 Example Program 95 SoftwareSerial 98 Summary 99 Chapter 6 EEPROM 101 Introducing EEPROM 101 The Different Memories on Arduino 103 The EEPROM Library 104 Reading and Writing Bytes 104 Reading and Writing Bits 105 Reading and Writing Strings 107 Reading and Writing Other Values 108 Example Program 110 Preparing EEPROM Storage 113 Adding Nonvolatile Memory 114 Summary 115 Chapter 7 SPI 117 Introducting SPI 118 SPI Bus 118 Comparison to RS-232 119 Confi guration 119 Communications 120 Arduino SPI 120 SPI Library 121 SPI on the Arduino Due 123 Example Program 125 Hardware 126 Sketch 128 Exercises 131 Summary 132 Chapter 8 Wire 133 Introducing Wire 134 Connecting I2C 135 I2C Protocol 135 Address 136 Communication 137 Communicating 138 Master Communications 139 Sending Information 139 Requesting Information 140 Slave Communications 141 Receiving Information 141 Sending Information 142 Example Program 142 Exercises 146 Traps and Pitfalls 147 Voltage Difference 147 Bus Speed 147 Shields with I2C 148 Summary 148 Chapter 9 Ethernet 149 Introduction 149 Ethernet 150 Ethernet Cables 151 Switches and Hubs 151 PoE 152 TCP/IP 152 MAC Address 153 IP Address 153 DNS 153 Port 153 Ethernet on Arduino 154 Importing the Ethernet Library 154 Starting Ethernet 155 Arduino as a Client 157 Sending and Receiving Data 158 Connecting to a Web Server 159 Example Program 161 Arduino as a Server 163 Serving Web Pages 164 Example Program 165 Sketch 165 Summary 167 Chapter 10 WiFi 169 Introduction 170 The WiFi Protocol 171 Topology 171 Network Parameters 172 Channels 172 Encryption 172 SSID 173 RSSI 173 Arduino WiFi 173 Importing the Library 174 Initialization 174 Status 175 Scanning Networks 176 Connecting and Configuring 177 Wireless Client 178 Wireless Server 179 Example Application 179 Hardware 181 Sketch 182 Exercises 189 Summary 190 Chapter 11 LiquidCrystal 191 Introduction 192 LiquidCrystal Library 194 Writing Text 195 Cursor Commands 196 Text Orientation 197 Scrolling 197 Custom Text 198 Example Program 199 Hardware 200 Software 201 Exercises 205 Summary 205 Chapter 12 SD 207 Introduction 208 SD Cards 211 Capacity 212 Speed 213 Using SD Cards with Arduino 213 Accepted SD Cards 214 Limitations 214 The SD Library 215 Importing the Library 215 Connecting a Card 215 Opening and Closing Files 216 Reading and Writing Files 217 Reading Files 217 Writing Files 218 Folder Operations 218 Card Operations 219 Advanced Usage 220 Example Program and Sketch 220 Summary 224 Chapter 13 TFT 225 Introduction 226 Technologies 227 TFT Library 228 Initialization 228 Screen Preparation 229 Text Operations 230 Basic Graphics 231 Coloring 232 Graphic Images 232 Example Application 233 Hardware 234 Sketch 234 Exercises 239 Summary 239 Chapter 14 Servo 241 Introduction to Servo Motors 242 Controlling Servo Motors 243 Connecting a Servo Motor 243 Moving Servo Motors 244 Disconnecting 245 Precision and Safety 246 Example Application 246 Schematic 248 Sketch 249 Exercises 250 Summary 251 Chapter 15 Stepper 253 Introducing Motors 254 Controlling a Stepper Motor 254 Hardware 255 Unipolar Versus Bipolar Stepper Motors 255 The Stepper Library 256 Example Project 257 Hardware 257 Sketch 258 Summary 260 Chapter 16 Firmata 261 Introducing Firmata 262 Firmata Library 262 Sending Messages 263 Receiving Messages 263 Callbacks 264 SysEx 266 Example Program 268 Summary 269 Chapter 17 GSM 271 Introducing GSM 272 Mobile Data Network 272 GSM 273 GPRS 274 EDGE 274 3 G 274 4 G and the Future 275 Modems 275 Arduino and GSM 276 Arduino GSM Library 276 GSM Class 278 SMS Class 279 VoiceCall Class 281 GPRS 282 Modem 284 Example Application 285 Summary 288 Part III Device-Specific Libraries 289 Chapter 18 Audio 291 Introducing Audio 292 Digital Sound Files 292 Music on the Arduino 294 Arduino Due 294 Digital to Analog Converters 295 Digital Audio to Analog 295 Creating Digital Audio 296 Storing Digital Audio 296 Playing Digital Audio 296 Example Program 298 Hardware 298 Sketch 300 Exercise 303 Summary 304 Chapter 19 Scheduler 305 Introducing Scheduling 306 Arduino Multitasking 307 Scheduler 308 Cooperative Multitasking 309 Noncooperative Functions 311 Example Program 313 Hardware 314 Sketch 316 Exercises 319 Summary 319 Chapter 20 USBHost 321 Introducing USBHost 322 USB Protocol 323 USB Devices 324 Keyboards 324 Mice 325 Hubs 325 Arduino Due 325 USBHost Library 327 Keyboards 327 Mice 329 Example Program 330 Hardware 331 Source Code 332 Summary 334 Chapter 21 Esplora 335 Introducing Esplora 336 The Arduino Esplora Library 337 RGB LED 337 Sensors 338 Buttons 339 Buzzer 340 TinkerKit 341 LCD Module 342 Example Program and Exercises 342 Summary 344 Chapter 22 Robot 345 Introducing Robot Library 346 Arduino Robot 348 Robot Library 349 Control Board 350 Robotic Controls 350 Sensor Reading 351 Personalizing Your Robot 353 LCD Screen 354 Music 356 Motor Board 357 Example Program and Exercises 358 Summary 360 Chapter 23 Bridge 361 Introducing Bridge Library 362 Bridge 363 Process 364 FileIO 366 YunServer 367 YunClient 368 Example Application 369 Hardware 369 Sketch 370 Exercises 373 Summary 373 Part IV User Libraries and Shields 375 Chapter 24 Importing Third-Party Libraries 377 Libraries 378 Finding Libraries 378 Importing a Library 379 Using an External Library 381 Example Application 384 Exercises 389 Summary 389 Chapter 25 Creating Your Own Shield 391 Creating a Shield 391 The Idea 392 The Required Hardware 392 The Required Software 393 Your First Shield 394 Step 1: The Breadboard 395 Step 2: The Schematic 398 Step 3: The PCB 402 Summary 404 Chapter 26 Creating Your Own Library 405 Libraries 405 Library Basics 406 Simple Libraries 406 Advanced Libraries 410 Adding Comments 413 Adding Examples 415 Read Me 415 Coding Style 416 Use CamelCase 416 Use English Words 416 Don’t Use External Libraries 417 Use Standard Names 417 Distributing Your Library 417 Closed Source Libraries 417 Example Library 418 The Library 418 Examples 424 README 427 Finishing Touches 428 Summary 428 Index 429

Read more less

Book SynopsisDISTRIBUTED MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL FOR PLANT-WIDE SYSTEMS In this book, experienced researchers gave a thorough explanation of distributed model predictive control (DMPC): its basic concepts, technologies, and implementation in plant-wide systems. Known for its error tolerance, high flexibility, and good dynamic performance, DMPC is a popular topic in the control field and is widely applied in many industries. To efficiently design DMPC systems, readers will be introduced to several categories of coordinated DMPCs, which are suitable for different control requirements, such as network connectivity, error tolerance, performance of entire closed-loop systems, and calculation of speed. Various real-life industrial applications, theoretical results, and algorithms are provided to illustrate key concepts and methods, as well as to provide solutions to optimize the global performance of plant-wide systems. Features system partition methods, coordinationTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Authors xv Acknowledgement xvii List of Figures xix List of Tables xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Plant-Wide System 1 1.2 Control System Structure of the Plant-Wide System 3 1.2.1 Centralized Control 4 1.2.2 Decentralized Control and Hierarchical Coordinated Decentralized Control 5 1.2.3 Distributed Control 6 1.3 Predictive Control 8 1.3.1 What is Predictive Control 8 1.3.2 Advantage of Predictive Control 9 1.4 Distributed Predictive Control 9 1.4.1 Why Distributed Predictive Control 9 1.4.2 What is Distributed Predictive Control 10 1.4.3 Advantage of Distributed Predictive Control 10 1.4.4 Classification of DMPC 11 1.5 About this Book 13 Part I FOUNDATION 2 Model Predictive Control 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Dynamic Matrix Control 20 2.2.1 Step Response Model 20 2.2.2 Prediction 21 2.2.3 Optimization 22 2.2.4 Feedback Correction 23 2.2.5 DMC with Constraint 24 2.3 Predictive Control with the State Space Model 26 2.3.1 System Model 27 2.3.2 Performance Index 28 2.3.3 Prediction 28 2.3.4 Closed-Loop Solution 30 2.3.5 State Space MPC with Constraint 31 2.4 Dual Mode Predictive Control 33 2.4.1 Invariant Region 33 2.4.2 MPC Formulation 34 2.4.3 Algorithms 35 2.4.4 Feasibility and Stability 36 2.5 Conclusion 37 3 Control Structure of Distributed MPC 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Centralized MPC 40 3.3 Single-Layer Distributed MPC 41 3.4 Hierarchical Distributed MPC 42 3.5 Example of the Hierarchical DMPC Structure 43 3.6 Conclusion 45 4 Structure Model and System Decomposition 47 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 System Mathematic Model 48 4.3 Structure Model and Structure Controllability 50 4.3.1 Structure Model 50 4.3.2 Function of the Structure Model in System Decomposition 51 4.3.3 Input–Output Accessibility 53 4.3.4 General Rank of the Structure Matrix 56 4.3.5 Structure Controllability 56 4.4 Related Gain Array Decomposition 58 4.4.1 RGA Definition 59 4.4.2 RGA Interpretation 60 4.4.3 Pairing Rules 61 4.5 Conclusion 63 Part II UNCONSTRAINED DISTRIBUTED PREDICTIVE CONTROL 5 Local Cost Optimization-based Distributed Model Predictive Control 67 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Local Cost Optimization-based Distributed Predictive Control 68 5.2.1 Problem Description 68 5.2.2 DMPC Formulation 69 5.2.3 Closed-loop Solution 72 5.2.4 Stability Analysis 79 5.2.5 Simulation Results 79 5.3 Distributed MPC Strategy Based on Nash Optimality 82 5.3.1 Formulation 83 5.3.2 Algorithm 86 5.3.3 Computational Convergence for Linear Systems 86 5.3.4 Nominal Stability of Distributed Model Predictive Control System 88 5.3.5 Performance Analysis with Single-step Horizon Control Under Communication Failure 89 5.3.6 Simulation Results 94 5.4 Conclusion 99 Appendix 99 Appendix A. QP problem transformation 99 Appendix B. Proof of Theorem 5.1 100 6 Cooperative Distributed Predictive Control 103 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Noniterative Cooperative DMPC 104 6.2.1 System Description 104 6.2.2 Formulation 104 6.2.3 Closed-Form Solution 107 6.2.4 Stability and Performance Analysis 109 6.2.5 Example 113 6.3 Distributed Predictive Control based on Pareto Optimality 114 6.3.1 Formulation 118 6.3.2 Algorithm 119 6.3.3 The DMPC Algorithm Based on Plant-Wide Optimality 119 6.3.4 The Convergence Analysis of the Algorithm 121 6.4 Simulation 121 6.5 Conclusions 123 7 Networked Distributed Predictive Control with Information Structure Constraints 125 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Noniterative Networked DMPC 126 7.2.1 Problem Description 126 7.2.2 DMPC Formulation 127 7.2.3 Closed-Form Solution 132 7.2.4 Stability Analysis 135 7.2.5 Analysis of Performance 135 7.2.6 Numerical Validation 137 7.3 Networked DMPC with Iterative Algorithm 144 7.3.1 Problem Description 144 7.3.2 DMPC Formulation 145 7.3.3 Networked MPC Algorithm 147 7.3.4 Convergence and Optimality Analysis for Networked 150 7.3.5 Nominal Stability Analysis for Distributed Control Systems 152 7.3.6 Simulation Study 153 7.4 Conclusion 159 Appendix 159 Appendix A. Proof of Lemma 7.1 159 Appendix B. Proof of Lemma 7.2 160 Appendix C. Proof of Lemma 7.3 160 Appendix D. Proof of Theorem 7.1 161 Appendix E. Proof of Theorem 7.2 161 Appendix F. Derivation of the QP problem (7.52) 164 Part III CONSTRAINT DISTRIBUTED PREDICTIVE CONTROL 8 Local Cost Optimization Based Distributed Predictive Control with Constraints 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Problem Description 170 8.3 Stabilizing Dual Mode Noncooperative DMPC with Input Constraints 171 8.3.1 Formulation 171 8.3.2 Algorithm Design for Resolving Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 176 8.4 Analysis 177 8.4.1 Recursive Feasibility of Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 177 8.4.2 Stability Analysis of Entire Closed-loop System 183 8.5 Example 184 8.5.1 The System 184 8.5.2 Performance Comparison with the Centralized MPC 185 8.6 Conclusion 187 9 Cooperative Distributed Predictive Control with Constraints 189 9.1 Introduction 189 9.2 System Description 190 9.3 Stabilizing Cooperative DMPC with Input Constraints 191 9.3.1 Formulation 191 9.3.2 Constraint C-DMPC Algorithm 193 9.4 Analysis 194 9.4.1 Feasibility 194 9.4.2 Stability 199 9.5 Simulation 201 9.6 Conclusion 208 10 Networked Distributed Predictive Control with Inputs and Information Structure Constraints 209 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Problem Description 210 10.3 Constrained N-DMPC 212 10.3.1 Formulation 212 10.3.2 Algorithm Design for Resolving Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 218 10.4 Analysis 219 10.4.1 Feasibility 219 10.4.2 Stability 225 10.5 Formulations Under Other Coordination Strategies 227 10.5.1 Local Cost Optimization Based DMPC 227 10.5.2 Cooperative DMPC 228 10.6 Simulation Results 229 10.6.1 The System 229 10.6.2 Performance of Closed-loop System under the N-DMPC 230 10.6.3 Performance Comparison with the Centralized MPC and the Local Cost Optimization based MPC 231 10.7 Conclusions 236 Part IV APPLICATION 11 Hot-Rolled Strip Laminar Cooling Process with Distributed Predictive Control 239 11.1 Introduction 239 11.2 Laminar Cooling of Hot-rolled Strip 240 11.2.1 Description 240 11.2.2 Thermodynamic Model 241 11.2.3 Problem Statement 242 11.3 Control Strategy of HSLC 244 11.3.1 State Space Model of Subsystems 244 11.3.2 Design of Extended Kalman Filter 247 11.3.3 Predictor 247 11.3.4 Local MPC Formulation 248 11.3.5 Iterative Algorithm 249 11.4 Numerical Experiment 251 11.4.1 Validation of Designed Model 251 11.4.2 Convergence of EKF 252 11.4.3 Performance of DMPC Comparing with Centralized MPC 252 11.4.4 Advantages of the Proposed DMPC Framework Comparing with the Existing Method 253 11.5 Experimental Results 256 11.6 Conclusion 258 12 High-Speed Train Control with Distributed Predictive Control 263 12.1 Introduction 263 12.2 System Description 264 12.3 N-DMPC for High-Speed Trains 264 12.3.1 Three Types of Force 264 12.3.2 The Force Analysis of EMUs 266 12.3.3 Model of CRH2 267 12.3.4 Performance Index 271 12.3.5 Optimization Problem 272 12.4 Simulation Results 272 12.4.1 Parameters of CRH2 273 12.4.2 Simulation Matrix 273 12.4.3 Results and Some Comments 274 12.5 Conclusion 278 13 Operation Optimization of Multitype Cooling Source System Based on DMPC 279 13.1 Introduction 279 13.2 Structure of Joint Cooling System 279 13.3 Control Strategy of Joint Cooling System 280 13.3.1 Economic Optimization Strategy 281 13.3.2 Design of Distributed Model Predictive Control in Multitype Cold Source System 283 13.4 Results and Analysis of Simulation 286 13.5 Conclusion 292 References 293 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaintaining a stable level of power quality in the distribution network is a growing challenge due to increased use of power electronics converters in domestic, commercial and industrial sectors. Power quality deterioration is manifested in increased losses; poor utilization of distribution systems; mal-operation of sensitive equipment and disturbances to nearby consumers, protective devices, and communication systems. However, as the energy-saving benefits will result in increased AC power processed through power electronics converters, there is a compelling need for improved understanding of mitigation techniques for power quality problems. This timely book comprehensively identifies, classifies, analyses and quantifies all associated power quality problems, including the direct integration of renewable energy sources in the distribution system, and systematically delivers mitigation techniques to overcome these problems. Key features: Emphasis on in-depth leTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xiv 1 Power Quality: An Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 State of the Art on Power Quality 2 1.3 Classification of Power Quality Problems 3 1.4 Causes of Power Quality Problems 4 1.5 Effects of Power Quality Problems on Users 4 1.6 Classification of Mitigation Techniques for Power Quality Problems 6 1.7 Literature and Resource Material on Power Quality 6 1.8 Summary 7 1.9 Review Questions 8 References 8 2 Power Quality Standards and Monitoring 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 State of the Art on Power Quality Standards and Monitoring 11 2.3 Power Quality Terminologies 12 2.4 Power Quality Definitions 15 2.5 Power Quality Standards 16 2.6 Power Quality Monitoring 18 2.7 Numerical Examples 20 2.8 Summary 39 2.9 Review Questions 39 2.10 Numerical Problems 40 2.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 43 References 46 3 Passive Shunt and Series Compensation 48 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 State of the Art on Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 48 3.3 Classification of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 49 3.4 Principle of Operation of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 51 3.5 Analysis and Design of Passive Shunt Compensators 51 3.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators 62 3.7 Numerical Examples 63 3.8 Summary 85 3.9 Review Questions 85 3.10 Numerical Problems 87 3.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 89 References 93 4 Active Shunt Compensation 96 4.1 Introduction 96 4.2 State of the Art on DSTATCOMs 96 4.3 Classification of DSTATCOMs 97 4.4 Principle of Operation and Control of DSTATCOMs 108 4.5 Analysis and Design of DSTATCOMs 133 4.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of DSTATCOMs 136 4.7 Numerical Examples 141 4.8 Summary 158 4.9 Review Questions 158 4.10 Numerical Problems 159 4.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 162 References 167 5 Active Series Compensation 170 5.1 Introduction 170 5.2 State of the Art on Active Series Compensators 171 5.3 Classification of Active Series Compensators 171 5.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Active Series Compensators 178 5.5 Analysis and Design of Active Series Compensators 183 5.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Active Series Compensators 185 5.7 Numerical Examples 190 5.8 Summary 216 5.9 Review Questions 217 5.10 Numerical Problems 218 5.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 220 References 226 6 Unified Power Quality Compensators 229 6.1 Introduction 229 6.2 State of the Art on Unified Power Quality Compensators 230 6.3 Classification of Unified Power Quality Compensators 231 6.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Unified Power Quality Compensators 237 6.5 Analysis and Design of Unified Power Quality Compensators 246 6.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of UPQCs 249 6.7 Numerical Examples 252 6.8 Summary 292 6.9 Review Questions 292 6.10 Numerical Problems 293 6.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 297 References 303 7 Loads That Cause Power Quality Problems 306 7.1 Introduction 306 7.2 State of the Art on Nonlinear Loads 307 7.3 Classification of Nonlinear Loads 308 7.4 Power Quality Problems Caused by Nonlinear Loads 313 7.5 Analysis of Nonlinear Loads 314 7.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Nonlinear Loads 314 7.7 Numerical Examples 314 7.8 Summary 327 7.9 Review Questions 328 7.10 Numerical Problems 329 7.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 330 References 334 8 Passive Power Filters 337 8.1 Introduction 337 8.2 State of the Art on Passive Power Filters 338 8.3 Classification of Passive Filters 338 8.4 Principle of Operation of Passive Power Filters 344 8.5 Analysis and Design of Passive Power Filters 349 8.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Passive Power Filters 350 8.7 Limitations of Passive Filters 353 8.8 Parallel Resonance of Passive Filters with the Supply System and Its Mitigation 355 8.9 Numerical Examples 360 8.10 Summary 387 8.11 Review Questions 387 8.12 Numerical Problems 388 8.13 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 391 References 395 9 Shunt Active Power Filters 397 9.1 Introduction 397 9.2 State of the Art on Shunt Active Power Filters 398 9.3 Classification of Shunt Active Power Filters 398 9.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Shunt Active Power Filters 405 9.5 Analysis and Design of Shunt Active Power Filters 413 9.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Shunt Active Power Filters 417 9.7 Numerical Examples 421 9.8 Summary 438 9.9 Review Questions 438 9.10 Numerical Problems 439 9.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 442 References 447 10 Series Active Power Filters 452 10.1 Introduction 452 10.2 State of the Art on Series Active Power Filters 453 10.3 Classification of Series Active Power Filters 453 10.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Series Active Power Filters 456 10.5 Analysis and Design of Series Active Power Filters 462 10.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Series Active Power Filters 465 10.7 Numerical Examples 467 10.8 Summary 492 10.9 Review Questions 492 10.10 Numerical Problems 493 10.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 496 References 501 11 Hybrid Power Filters 504 11.1 Introduction 504 11.2 State of the Art on Hybrid Power Filters 505 11.3 Classification of Hybrid Power Filters 506 11.4 Principle of Operation and Control of Hybrid Power Filters 519 11.5 Analysis and Design of Hybrid Power Filters 527 11.6 Modeling, Simulation, and Performance of Hybrid Power Filters 528 11.7 Numerical Examples 534 11.8 Summary 559 11.9 Review Questions 559 11.10 Numerical Problems 561 11.11 Computer Simulation-Based Problems 563 References 569 Index 579

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is intended as an advanced text for courses in antennas, with a focus on the mature but vital background field of aperture antennas. The book isaimed atfinal year, MSc, PhD and Post-Doctoral students, as well as readers who are moving from academia into industry, beginning careers as wireless engineers, system designers, in R&D, or for practising engineers. It assumes the reader has undertaken an earlier course of study on Maxwell''s equations, fields and waves. Some of these topics are summarised in the early few chapters in order to provide continuity and background for the remaining chapters. The aperture antennas covered include the main types of horns, reflectors and arrays as well as microstrip patches, reflectarrays and lenses. To provide more than a superficial treatment of arrays, the topic of mutual coupling is covered in greater detail than most similar books in the area. Also included is an introduction to arrays on non-planar surfaces, which is of impTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgement xv 1 Introduction 1 References 6 2 Background Theory 7 2.1 Maxwell’s Equations for Time-Harmonic Fields 7 2.1.1 Field Representation in Terms of Axial Field Components in Source-Free Regions 9 2.1.2 Boundary Conditions 10 2.1.3 Poynting’s Theorem 11 2.1.4 Reciprocity 11 2.1.5 Duality 13 2.1.6 Method of Images 13 2.1.7 Geometric Optics 13 2.2 Equivalent Sources 15 2.2.1 Aperture in a Ground Plane 17 2.2.2 Conformal Surfaces 17 2.3 Radiation 18 2.3.1 Near-Field 21 2.3.2 Far-Field 21 2.3.3 Mutual Coupling Between Infinitesimal Current Elements 23 2.4 Problems 26 References 27 3 Fields Radiated by an Aperture 29 3.1 Radiation Equations 29 3.2 Near-Field Region 32 3.3 Fresnel Zone 32 3.4 Far-Field Region 33 3.4.1 Example of a Uniformly Illuminated Rectangular Aperture 38 3.5 Radiation Characteristics 40 3.5.1 Radiation Pattern 41 3.5.2 Half-Power Beamwidth 42 3.5.3 Front-to-Back Ratio 42 3.5.4 Polarization 42 3.5.5 Phase Centre 44 3.5.6 Antenna Gain and Directivity 44 3.5.7 Effective Aperture 46 3.5.8 Radiation Resistance 47 3.5.9 Input Impedance 47 3.5.10 Antenna as a Receiver 48 3.6 Aberrations 48 3.7 Power Coupling Theorem 50 3.8 Field Analysis by High-Frequency Methods 52 3.8.1 Asymptotic Physical Optics 53 3.8.1.1 Example: Scattering Radiation from Large Conducting Wire Loop 55 3.8.1.2 Special Case: APO in Two Dimensions 57 3.8.2 Geometrical Theory of Diffraction 61 3.9 Problems 67 References 70 4 Waveguide and Horn Antennas 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Radiation from Rectangular Waveguide 72 4.3 Pyramidal Horn 74 4.3.1 Design of a Standard Gain Pyramidal Horn 79 4.3.2 Dielectric-Loaded Rectangular Horn 81 4.4 Circular Waveguides and Horns 85 4.4.1 Circular Waveguide 86 4.4.1.1 Matching at a Circular Aperture 90 4.4.2 Coaxial Waveguide 91 4.4.2.1 Matching of a Coaxial Aperture 95 4.4.2.2 Coaxial Apertures with an Extended Central Conductor 97 4.4.3 Conical Horn 101 4.4.4 Corrugated Radiators 105 4.4.5 Cross-Polarization 110 4.5 Advanced Horn Analysis Topics 114 4.5.1 Flange Effects 114 4.5.2 Mode Matching in Horns 115 4.5.3 Profiled Horns 123 4.5.3.1 Optimization 126 4.5.3.2 Parametric Profiles 126 4.6 Problems 131 References 133 5 Microstrip Patch Antenna 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Microstrip Patch Aperture Model 138 5.3 Microstrip Patch on a Cylinder 143 5.4 Problems 146 References 147 6 Reflector Antennas 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Radiation from a Paraboloidal Reflector 150 6.2.1 Geometric Optics Method for a Reflector 152 6.2.1.1 Dipole Feed 154 6.2.1.2 Circular Waveguides and Horn Feeds 157 6.2.2 Edge Taper and Edge Illumination 160 6.2.3 Induced Current Method 162 6.2.3.1 Radiation from Symmetrical Reflectors with General Profile 164 6.2.3.2 Spherical Reflector 167 6.2.4 Receive-Mode Method 168 6.3 Focal Region Fields of a Paraboloidal Reflector 172 6.3.1 Asymptotic Representation of the Scattered Field 176 6.4 Blockage 181 6.5 Reflector Antenna Efficiency 183 6.6 Reflector Surface Errors 188 6.7 Offset-fed Parabolic Reflector 189 6.8 Cassegrain Antenna 196 6.8.1 Classical Cassegrain 196 6.8.2 Offset Cassegrain Antenna 198 6.9 Shaped Reflectors 202 6.9.1 Reflector Synthesis by Geometric Optics 203 6.9.2 Reflector Synthesis by Numerical Optimization 209 6.10 Problems 213 References 217 7 Arrays of Aperture Antennas 219 7.1 Introduction 219 7.2 Two-Dimensional Planar Arrays 219 7.2.1 Rectangular Planar Array 221 7.2.2 Hexagonal Array 223 7.3 Mutual Coupling in Aperture Antennas 228 7.3.1 Infinite Periodic Arrays 230 7.3.2 Finite Arrays 235 7.3.3 Mutual Impedance and Scattering Matrix Representation 239 7.3.4 Analysis of Arrays of Aperture Antennas by Integral Equation Methods 242 7.3.4.1 Moment Method Approach 245 7.3.4.2 Mode Matching in Arrays 247 7.3.5 Mutual Coupling Analysis in Waveguide Apertures 249 7.3.5.1 Rectangular Waveguide Arrays 249 7.3.5.2 Self-Admittance of TE10 Mode 253 7.3.5.3 Arrays of Circular and Coaxial Waveguides 257 7.3.5.4 Self-Admittance of TE11 Mode in Circular Waveguide 262 7.3.5.5 Mutual Coupling in Other Geometries 266 7.3.5.6 Waveguide-Fed Slot Arrays 269 7.3.5.7 Arrays of Microstrip Patches 273 7.3.5.8 A Numerical Formulation of Coupling in Arbitrary Shaped Apertures 278 7.3.6 An Asymptotic Expression for Mutual Admittance 281 7.3.7 Radiation from Finite Arrays with Mutual Coupling 284 7.4 Techniques for Minimizing Effects of Mutual Coupling 286 7.4.1 Element Spacing 286 7.4.2 Aperture Field Taper 287 7.4.3 Electromagnetic Fences 287 7.4.4 Mutual Coupling Compensation 287 7.4.5 Power Pattern Synthesis Including the Effect of Mutual Coupling 289 7.5 Low-Sidelobe Arrays and Shaped Beams 289 7.6 Problems 300 References 302 8 Conformal Arrays of Aperture Antennas 307 8.1 Introduction 307 8.2 Radiation from a Conformal Aperture Array 308 8.2.1 Waveguide with E-Field Polarized in Circumferential Direction 308 8.2.2 Waveguide with E-Polarized in Axial Direction 315 8.2.3 Historical Overview of Asymptotic Solutions for Conformal Surfaces 317 8.3 Mutual Coupling in Conformal Arrays 319 8.3.1 Asymptotic Solution for Surface Dyadic 322 8.4 Coupling in a Concave Array: Periodic Solution 325 8.5 Problems 331 References 331 9 Reflectarrays and Other Aperture Antennas 335 9.1 Introduction 335 9.2 Basic Theory of Reflectarrays 337 9.3 Extensions to the Basic Theory 341 9.4 Other Aperture Antennas 344 9.4.1 Lenses 344 9.4.2 Fabry–Pérot Resonator Antennas 352 9.5 Problems 354 References 356 10 Aperture Antennas in Application 357 10.1 Fabrication 357 10.1.1 Machining 357 10.1.2 Printing 358 10.1.3 Mould Formation 358 10.1.4 Electroforming 358 10.1.5 Lightweight Construction 358 10.1.6 Pressing and Stretch Forming of Reflector Surfaces 359 10.1.7 Assembly and Alignment 360 10.2 Measurement and Testing 361 10.2.1 Far-Field Measurement 361 10.2.2 Near-Field Measurement 364 10.2.3 Intermediate-Field Measurement 369 10.3 Modern Aperture Antennas 371 10.3.1 Compact Low-Sidelobe Horns 371 10.3.2 Multibeam Earth Station 375 10.3.3 Radio Telescopes 379 10.4 Problems 387 References 388 Appendix A: Useful Identities 391 A.1 Vector Identities 391 A.2 Geometric Identities 392 A.3 Transverse Representation of the Electromagnetic Field 393 A.4 Useful Functions 394 References 394 Appendix B: Bessel Functions 395 B.1 Properties 395 B.2 Computation of Bessel Functions 400 References 401 Appendix C: Proof of Stationary Behaviour of Mutual Impedance 403 Appendix D: Free-Space Dyadic Magnetic Green’s Function 405 Reference 406 Appendix E: Complex Fresnel Integrals 407 References 409 Appendix F: Properties of Hankel Transform Functions 411 References 412 Appendix G: Properties of Fock Functions for Convex Surfaces 413 G.1 Surface Fock Functions 413 G.1.1 Soft Surface Functions (m > 0) 414 G.1.2 Hard Surface Fock Functions (m < 0) 415 G.2 Acoustic Fock Functions 417 G.2.1 Soft Acoustic Fock Function 418 G.2.2 Hard Acoustic Fock Function 419 References 421 Index 423

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe essential guide that combines power system fundamentals with the practical aspects of equipment design and operation in modern power systems Written by an experienced power engineer, AC Circuits and Power Systems in Practice offers a comprehensive guide that reviews power system fundamentals and network theorems while exploring the practical aspects of equipment design and application. The author covers a wide-range of topics including basic circuit theorems, phasor diagrams, per-unit quantities and symmetrical component theory, as well as active and reactive power and their effects on network stability, voltage support and voltage collapse. Magnetic circuits, reactor and transformer design are analyzed, as is the operation of step voltage regulators. In addition, detailed introductions are provided to earthing systems in LV and MV networks, the adverse effects of harmonics on power equipment and power system protection. Finally, European and American engineering standards are presTrade ReviewThis book combines the author�s rich experience in industry and teaching expertise in university. It covers the fundamental topics of AC circuits, and the application of those theories are discussed with numerous examples as well as the requirements of Engineering Standards. The writing style is logical and explicit, while illustrations and diagrams are with great accuracy, facilitating readers to have a systematic and in-depth understanding. Overall, I think this book can be an invaluable guide for recent graduate engineers working in power industry. -- Adrian Chen, Electrical Engineer, Moolarben Coal Operations Pty Ltd, Australia This is a refreshingly practical text which covers a wide range of topics relating to AC power systems. The book is divided into two parts with part one providing a broad overview of AC power systems and a review of fundamental AC circuit theory. Part two of the book covers specific areas of AC power systems in more detail with chapters on three phase transformers, voltage and current measurement, energy metering, harmonics and power system protection. One standout feature of this book is the writing style which I found to be very straight forward and easy to read. Additionally, excellent diagrams and illustrations work well to reinforce the subject material. The text is very well referenced with a list of sources provided at the conclusion of each chapter. The industry based examples in the text work well to link electrical engineering theory and practice and as such this book should find appeal with both undergraduate students studying a course of electrical engineering and recent graduates. - James Lamont, Electrical Engineering Technical Officer, Deakin University, Australia The genius of the text is that it presents sound theoretical concepts in a practical, easy to apply manner. The use of phasor diagrams and illustrated examples makes the application to real world problems easier, and gives the practitioner a �feel� for the solution – a valuable and necessary outcome in situations where not all the information is easily available and decisions must still be made. - David Gaskell, Nyrstar Hobart Smelter, AustraliaTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvii Part I 1 1 Power Systems: A General Overview 3 1.1 Three‐phase System of AC Voltages 3 1.2 Low Voltage Distribution 6 1.3 Examples of Distribution Transformers 8 1.4 Practical Magnitude Limits for LV Loads 10 1.5 Medium Voltage Network 11 1.6 Transmission and Sub‐Transmission Networks 24 1.7 Generation of Electrical Energy 32 1.8 Sources 41 Further Reading 41 2 Review of AC Circuit Theory and Application of Phasor Diagrams 43 2.1 Representation of AC Voltages and Currents 43 2.2 RMS Measurement of Time Varying AC Quantities 44 2.3 Phasor Notation (Phasor Diagram Analysis) 45 2.4 Passive Circuit Components: Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors 49 2.5 Review of Sign Conventions and Network Theorems 55 2.6 AC Circuit Analysis Examples 61 2.7 Resonance in AC Circuits 74 2.8 Problems 83 2.9 Practical Experiment 88 3 Active Power, Reactive Power and Power Factor 91 3.1 Single‐Phase AC Power 91 3.2 Active Power 92 3.3 Reactive Power 93 3.4 Apparent Power or the volt‐amp Product, S 96 3.5 Three‐Phase Power 97 3.6 Power Factor 99 3.7 Power Factor Correction 100 3.8 Typical Industrial Load Profiles 105 3.9 Directional Power Flows 107 3.10 Energy Retailing 110 3.11 Problems 111 4 Magnetic Circuits, Inductors and Transformers 115 4.1 Magnetic Circuits 115 4.2 Magnetic Circuit Model 116 4.3 Gapped Cores and Effective Permeability 119 4.4 Inductance Calculations 120 4.5 Core Materials 121 4.6 Magnetising Characteristics of GOSS 122 4.7 Energy Stored in the Air Gap 125 4.8 EMF Equation 126 4.9 Magnetic Circuit Topologies 127 4.10 Magnetising Losses 129 4.11 Two‐Winding Transformer Operation 131 4.12 Transformer VA Ratings and Efficiency 133 4.13 Two‐Winding Transformer Equivalent Circuit 134 4.14 The Per‐Unit System 137 4.15 Transformer Short‐Circuit and Open‐Circuit Tests 138 4.16 Transformer Phasor Diagram 140 4.17 Current Transformers 142 4.18 Problems 144 4.19 Sources 153 5 Symmetrical Components 155 5.1 Symmetrical Component Theory 156 5.2 Sequence Networks and Fault Analysis 160 5.3 Network Fault Connections 163 5.4 Measurement of Zero‐sequence Components (Residual Current and Voltage) 170 5.5 Phase‐to‐Ground Fault Currents Reflected from a Star to a Delta Connected Winding 171 5.6 Sequence Components Remote from a Fault 173 5.7 Problems 175 5.8 Sources 185 6 Power Flows in AC Networks 187 6.1 Power Flow Directions 188 6.2 Synchronous Condenser 188 6.3 Synchronous Motor 191 6.4 Generalised Power Flow Analysis 192 6.5 Low X/R Networks 197 6.6 Steady State Transmission Stability Limit 201 6.7 Voltage Collapse in Power Systems 202 6.8 Problems 207 6.9 Sources 209 Part II 211 7 Three‐Phase Transformers 213 7.1 Positive and Negative Sequence Impedance 213 7.2 Transformer Zero‐Sequence Impedance 219 7.3 Transformer Vector Groups 221 7.4 Transformer Voltage Regulation 222 7.5 Magnetising Current Harmonics 228 7.6 Tap‐changing Techniques 233 7.7 Parallel Connection of Transformers 245 7.8 Transformer Nameplate 249 7.9 Step Voltage Regulator 251 7.10 Problems 264 7.11 Sources 272 8 Voltage Transformers 273 8.1 Inductive and Capacitive Voltage Transformers 273 8.2 Voltage Transformer Errors 276 8.3 Voltage Transformer Equivalent Circuit 281 8.4 Voltage Transformer ‘Error Lines’ 284 8.5 Re‐rating Voltage Transformers 288 8.6 Accuracy Classes for Protective Voltage Transformers 289 8.7 Dual‐Wound Voltage Transformers 292 8.8 Earthing and Protection of Voltage Transformers 292 8.9 Non‐Conventional Voltage Transformers 297 8.10 Problems 299 8.11 Sources 301 9 Current Transformers 303 9.1 CT Secondary Currents and Ratios 304 9.2 Current Transformer Errors and Standards 306 9.3 IEEE C57.13 Metering Class Magnitude and Phase Errors 309 9.4 Current Transformer Equivalent Circuit 312 9.5 Magnetising Admittance Variation and CT Compensation Techniques 315 9.6 Composite Error 319 9.7 Instrument Security Factor for Metering CTs 322 9.8 Protection Current Transformers 324 9.9 Inter‐Turn Voltage Ratings 337 9.10 Non‐Conventional Current Transformers 338 9.11 Problems 341 9.12 Sources 349 10 Energy Metering 351 10.1 Metering Intervals 353 10.2 General Metering Analysis using Symmetrical Components 361 10.3 Metering Errors 367 10.4 Ratio Correction Factors 373 10.5 Reactive Power Measurement Error 378 10.6 Evaluation of the Overall Error for an Installation 379 10.7 Commissioning and Auditing of Metering Installations 381 10.8 Problems 383 10.9 Sources 388 11 Earthing Systems 391 11.1 Effects of Electricity on the Human Body 391 11.2 Residual Current Devices 399 11.3 LV Earthing Systems 402 11.4 LV Earthing Systems used Worldwide 413 11.5 Medium Voltage Earthing Systems 413 11.6 High Voltage Earthing 423 11.7 Exercise 423 11.8 Problems (Earthing Grid Design) 425 11.9 Sources 434 12 Introduction to Power System Protection 437 12.1 Fundamental Principles of Protection 437 12.2 Protection Relays 438 12.3 Primary and Backup Protection (Duplicate Protection) 439 12.4 Protection Zones 441 12.5 Overcurrent Protection 443 12.6 Differential Protection 451 12.7 Frame Leakage and Arc Flash Busbar Protection 462 12.8 Distance Protection (Impedance Protection) 464 12.9 Problems 469 12.10 Sources 475 13 Harmonics in Power Systems 477 13.1 Measures of Harmonic Distortion 479 13.2 Resolving a Non‐linear Current or Voltage into its Harmonic Components (Fourier Series) 480 13.3 Harmonic Phase Sequences 484 13.4 Triplen Harmonic Currents 487 13.5 Harmonic Losses in Transformers 487 13.6 Power Factor in the Presence of Harmonics 492 13.7 Management of Harmonics 495 13.8 Harmonic Standards 504 13.9 Measurement of Harmonics 514 13.10 Problems 515 13.11 Sources 519 14 Operational Aspects of Power Engineering 521 14.1 Device Numbers 521 14.2 One Line Diagram (OLD) 523 14.3 Switchgear Topologies 526 14.4 Switching Plans, Equipment Isolation and Permit to Work Procedures 537 14.5 Electrical Safety 542 14.6 Measurements with an Incorrectly Configured Multimeter 549 14.7 Sources 551 Index 553

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaster vSphere automation with this comprehensive reference VMware vSphere PowerCLI Reference, Automating vSphere Administration, 2nd Edition is a one-stop solution for vSphere automation. Fully updated to align with the latest vSphere and PowerCLI release, this detailed guide shows you how to get the most out of PowerCLI''s handy cmdlets using real-world examples and a practical, task-based approach. You''ll learn how to store, access, update, back up, and secure massive amounts of data quickly through the power of virtualization automation, and you''ll get acquainted with PowerCLI as you learn how to automate management, monitoring, and life-cycle operations for vSphere. Coverage includes areas like the PowerCLI SDK, SRM, vCOPS, and vCloud Air. Plus guidance toward scheduling and viewing automation, using DevOps methodology and structured testing and source control of your PowerCLI scripts. Clear language and detailed explanations make this reference the Table of ContentsIntroduction xxiii Part I Install, Configure, and Manage the vSphere Environment 1 Chapter 1 Automating vCenter Server Deployment and Configuration 3 Chapter 2 Automating vSphere Hypervisor Deployment and Configuration 41 Chapter 3 Automating Networking 75 Chapter 4 Automating Storage 119 Rule Sets 146 Chapter 5 Using Advanced vSphere Features 165 Part II Managing the Virtual Machine Life Cycle 211 Chapter 6 Creating Virtual Machines 213 Chapter 7 Using Templates and Customization Specifications 243 Chapter 8 Configuring Virtual Machine Hardware 265 Chapter 9 Advanced Virtual Machine Features 293 Chapter 10 Using vApps 331 Part III Securing Your vSphere Environment 373 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring Your Virtual Machines 375 Chapter 12 Organize Your Disaster Recovery 397 Chapter 13 Hardening the vSphere Environment 441 Chapter 14 Maintain Security in Your vSphere Environment 475 Part IV Monitoring and Reporting 495 Chapter 15 Reporting and Auditing 497 Chapter 16 Using Statistical Data 545 Chapter 17 Alarms 585 Part V Integration 619 Chapter 18 The SDK 621 Managed Object References 644 Chapter 19 vCloud Director 663 Chapter 20 vCloud Air 693 Chapter 21 vRealize Orchestrator 711 Chapter 22 Site Recovery Manager 791 Chapter 23 PowerActions 811 Part VI PowerCLI and DevOps 839 Chapter 24 Source Control 841 Chapter 25 Running Scripts 895 Appendix Example Reports 915 Index 935

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents a guidance on a large range of decision aids for risk analysts and decision makers in industry so that vital decisions can be made in a more consistent, logical, and rigorous manner. It provide good industry practices on how risk decision making is conducted in the chemical industry from many risk information sources as well as all the elements that need to be addressed to ensure good decisions are being made. Topics Include: Identifying Risk Decisions, A Risk Decision Strategy for Process Safety, Case Studies in Risk Decision Making Failures, Guidance on Selecting Decision Aids, Templates for Decision Making in Risk-Based Process Safety, Understanding Process Hazards & Worst Possible Consequences, Management of Change as an Exercise in Risk Identification, Inherently Safer Design as an Exercise in Risk Tradeoff Analysis, Using LOPA and Risk Matrices in Risk Decisions, Using CPQRA and Safety Risk Criteria in Risk Decisions, Group Decision Making, Avoiding DecisionTable of ContentsContents v List of Tables xi List of Figures xiii Acronyms and Abbreviations xv Glossary xix Acknowledgements xxxi Preface xxxiii Introduction 35 1.1 History of Approaches to Process Safety Management 35 1.2 The Paradigm of Risk-Based Process Safety Management 36 1.2.1 Risk Based Process Safety (RBPS) Management 36 1.2.2 Risk Decisions Characteristics 39 1.3 A Risk Decision Making Method 40 1.4 Road Map and Relationship of this Book with Other Material 41 1.5 Risk Decisions during Process Life Cycle 43 1.6 Pros and cons 44 1.7 Summary 44 Key Concepts in Risk Management 47 2.1 Risk Management Process 47 2.2 Risk Identification – Risk Scenario 47 2.2.1 Risk Identification 49 2.3 Risk Analysis - Consequences and Frequency 49 2.3.1 Consequences and Impacts 50 2.3.2 Frequency 50 2.3.3 Risk Estimation 51 2.4 Risk Evaluation 56 2.4.1 Decision criteria 56 2.4.2 Qualitative, Semi-Quantitative and Quantitative Risk Criteria 59 2.4.3 Risk Reduction Factor 61 2.5 Summary 62 Understanding Process Hazards, Consequences and Risks 63 3.1 Process Hazards 63 3.1.1 Acute Toxicity 63 3.1.2 Flammability and Explosivity 67 3.1.3 Chemical Reactivity 70 3.1.4 Significant or Large Environmental Release Hazards 72 3.1.5 Other Process Hazards 72 3.2 Risk Identification 73 3.3 Consequences and Impacts 73 3.4 Frequency 74 3.5 Risk 76 Risk Decisions and Strategies 79 4.1 Objectives and attributes 79 4.1.1 Objectives 79 4.1.2 Attributes 79 4.2 Process Life Cycle and Alternatives 81 4.3 The Decision Process 82 4.3.1 Define the Problem 82 4.3.2 Evaluate the Baseline Risk 83 4.3.3 Identify the Alternatives 83 4.3.4 Screen the Alternatives 84 4.3.5 Make the Decision 84 4.4 Objectives and Outcomes 84 4.5 Tradeoffs 85 4.6 Uncertainty 87 4.7 Risk Tolerance 90 4.8 Linked Decisions 91 4.9 Decision trees 92 Decision Making 95 5.1 Defining the Decision Problem 95 5.1.1 Types of Decisions 95 5.2 Selecting a Decision Tool 97 5.2.1 Progression of Risk Analysis Tools 97 5.2.2 Factors in Decision Tool Selection 98 5.3 Assembling the Appropriate Assessment Resources 101 5.3.1 Team Members 101 5.3.2 Opening Meeting 104 5.3.2 Tools/Methods 104 5.3.3 Time 105 5.4 Define decision criteria 105 5.4.1 Process Safety Risk Criteria 105 5.4.2 Other Criteria 107 5.5 Making the decision 107 5.5.1 Characteristics of Decision Aids 107 5.5.2 Appling the Decision Tools, Aids, and Criteria 108 5.5.3 Recognizing and Dealing with Uncertainties 111 5.5.4 Recognizing the Need to Escalate the Decision 113 5.6 Finalizing decision and the approval process 114 5.7 Communicating, Documenting, and implementing the Decision 114 5.7 Summary 116 Potential Decision Traps 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.2 Anchoring Trap 117 6.2.1 Anchoring Trap Example, Titanic 118 6.2.2 Countering the Anchoring Trap 118 6.3 Status-Quo Trap 119 6.3.1 Status Quo Examples 119 6.3.2 Countering the Status-Quo Trap 120 6.4 Sunk-cost and escalation of commitment trap 120 6.4.1 Countering the Sunk-Cost Trap 121 6.5 Confirming-Evidence Trap 121 6.5.1 Countering the Confirming Evidence Trap 122 6.6 Framing Trap 122 6.6.1 Framing Example 123 6.6.2 Countering the Framing Trap 123 6.7 Estimating and Forecasting Trap 123 6.7.1 Overconfidence 123 6.7.2 Prudence 126 6.7.3 Recallability 127 6.7.4 Countering Estimating and Forecasting Traps 127 6.8 Groupthink Trap 128 6.8.1 Groupthink Example, Flixborough, UK Explosion 128 6.8.2 Countering the Groupthink Trap 128 6.9 Summary 129 Inherently Safer Design 131 7.1 Introduction to inherently safer design 131 7.2 Inherently Safer Design Strategies 131 7.3 Hierarchy of Risk Management Controls 132 7.4 ISD examples to illustrate decision Process 133 7.4.1 Example with minimization 135 7.4.2 Example with moderation 136 7.4.3 Example with simplification 137 7.4.3 Other tradeoffs 137 Make versus buy 138 Substitution 138 7.5 Summary 138 Management of Change 139 8.1 Introduction 139 8.2 Decision Approval level 143 8.3 Examples of Decision Process Applied to Changes 144 8.3.1 Equipment Change 144 8.3.2 Procedural Change 145 8.3.3 Process Parameter Change 146 8.3.4 Organizational Change 147 8.3.5 Raw Material Change 148 8.3.6 Vendor Change 149 8.4 Summary 150 Using LOPA and Risk Matrices in Risk Decisions 151 9.1 Introduction 151 9.2 Risk Matrices 151 9.2.1 Risk Matrix Format 152 9.3 Layer of Protection Analysis 155 9.3.1 Independent Protection Layers 158 9.3.2 LOPA Format 159 9.4 Phosgene Handling Process for Risk Decision Example 159 9.4.1 Description 159 9.4.2 Risk Matrix for Phosgene Handling Example 161 9.5 Phosgene Example Decision Process Using Risk Matrix 164 9.6 Decision Process for Phosgene Example Using LOPA 165 9.7 Summary 172 Using QRA and Safety Risk Criteria in Risk Decisions 173 10.1 Introduction to CPQRA 173 10.1.1 Calculate Frequencies 173 10.1.2 Calculate Consequences 178 10.1.3 Quantitative Risk Analysis (QRA) 179 10.2 Safety Risk Criteria 179 10.2.1 Scope of Risk Criteria 179 10.2.2 Individual and Societal Risk 180 10.2.3 Continual Improvement 184 10.3 High Consequence Low Probability (HCLP) Events 185 10.4 Examples 188 10.4.1 Comparing Design Options: Bromine Handling Facility 188 10.4.2 Compliance and Continual Improvement: Organic Acid Vent System 192 10.4.3 Special Case: The Domino Effect 193 10.5 Summary 195 Decision Implementation 197 11.1 Introduction 197 11.2 Implementation 197 11.3 Documentation 197 11.3.1 Importance of a decision document 197 11.3.2 Writing recommendations 197 11.3.3 Advice of legal counsel 198 11.3.4 Contents of the decision document 199 11.3.5 Retention of the decision document 199 11.4 Revalidation 200 11.4.1 Time based 200 11.4.2 Situation based 200 11.5 Summary 201 Summary and Lessons 203 12.1 Introduction 203 12.2 Case Studies in Risk: Decision Making Failures 203 12.2.1 Failure to Define the Problem 203 12.2.2 Failure to Establish Baseline Risk and Identify Alternatives 204 12.2.3 Make the Decision - Failure to consider tradeoffs 205 12.2.4 Make the Decision - Failure to understand uncertainty 206 12.2.5 Make the Decision – Failure to do risk identification and Failure to probe risk tolerance 206 12.2.6 Make the Decision - Failure to recognize linked decisions 207 12.3 Lessons and Summary 207 References 211 Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisSustainable Aviation Technology and Operations Comprehensively covers research and development initiatives to enhance the environmental sustainability of the aviation sector Sustainable Aviation Technology and Operations provides a comprehensive and timely outlook of recent research advances in aeronautics and air transport, with emphasis on both long-term sustainable development goals and current achievements. This book discusses some of the most promising advances in aircraft technologies, air traffic management and systems engineering methodologies for sustainable aviation. The topics covered include: propulsion, aerodynamics, avionics, structures, materials, airspace management, biofuels and sustainable lifecycle management. The physical processes associated with various aircraft emissions including air pollutants, noise and contrails are presented to support the development of computational models for aircraft design, flight path optimization and eTable of ContentsList of Contributors vii About the Editors ix About the Companion Website x 1 Sustainable Aviation: An Introduction 1 Roberto Sabatini and Alessandro Gardi Section I Aviation Sustainability Fundamentals 29 2 Climate Impacts of Aviation 31 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 3 Noise Pollution and Other Environmental and Health Impacts of Aviation 49 Alessandro Gardi, Rohan Kapoor, Yixiang Lim, and Roberto Sabatini Section II Systems for Sustainable Aviation 79 4 Systems Engineering Evolutions 81 Anthony Zanetti, Arun Kumar, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 5 Life Cycle Assessment for Carbon Neutrality 113 Enda Crossin, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 6 Air Traffic Management and Avionics Systems Evolutions 145 Alessandro Gardi, Yixiang Lim, Nichakorn Pongsakornsathien, Roberto Sabatini, and Trevor Kistan 7 Optimisation of Flight Trajectories and Airspace 165 Alessandro Gardi, Yixiang Lim, and Roberto Sabatini Section III Aerostructures and Propulsive Technologies 213 8 Advanced Aerodynamic Configurations 215 Matthew Marino, Alessandro Gardi, Roberto Sabatini, and Yixiang Lim 9 Lightweight Structures and Advanced Materials 241 Raj Das and Joel Galos 10 Low-Emission Propulsive Technologies in Transport Aircraft 263 Kavindu Ranasinghe, Kai Guan, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 11 Approved Drop-in Biofuels and Prospects for Alternative Aviation Fuels 301 Graham Dorrington Section IV Research Case Studies 323 12 Overall Contribution of Wingtip Devices to Improving Aircraft Performance 325 Nikola Gavrilovi´c, Boško Rašuo, Vladimir Parezanovi´c, George Dulikravich, and Jean-Marc Moschetta 13 Integration of Naturally Occurring Materials in Lightweight Aerostructures 343 Jose Silva, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 14 Distributed and Hybrid Propulsion: A Tailored Design Methodology 355 Martin Burston, Kavindu Ranasinghe, Alessandro Gardi, Vladimir Parezanovic, Rafic Ajaj, and Roberto Sabatini 15 Integration of Hybrid-Electric Propulsion Systems in Small Unmanned Aircraft 393 Jacob Sliwinski, Alessandro Gardi, Matthew Marino, and Roberto Sabatini 16 Benefits and Challenges of Liquid Hydrogen Fuels for Commercial Transport Aircraft 417 Stephen Rondinelli, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 17 Multi-Objective Trajectory Optimisation Algorithms for Avionics and ATM Systems 433 Alessandro Gardi, Roberto Sabatini, and Trevor Kistan 18 Energy-Optimal 4D Guidance and Control for Terminal Descent Operations 457 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 19 Contrail Modelling for 4D Trajectory Optimisation 475 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 20 Trajectory Optimisation to Minimise the Combined Radiative Forcing Impacts of Contrails and CO2 499 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, Roberto Sabatini, and Trevor Kistan 21 The W Life Cycle Model – San Francisco Airport Case Study 509 Anthony Zanetti, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 22 Conclusions and Future Research 517 Roberto Sabatini and Alessandro Gardi Index 523

Read more less

Book SynopsisFlight Vehicle Dynamics and Control Rama K. Yedavalli, The Ohio State University, USA A comprehensive textbook which presents flight vehicle dynamics and control in a unified framework Flight Vehicle Dynamics and Controlpresents the dynamics and control of various flight vehicles, including aircraft, spacecraft, helicopter, missiles, etc, in a unified framework. It covers the fundamental topics in the dynamics and control of these flight vehicles, highlighting shared points as well as differences in dynamics and control issues, making use of the systems level' viewpoint. The book begins with the derivation of the equations of motion for a general rigid body and then delineates the differences between the dynamics of various flight vehicles in a fundamental way. It then focuses on the dynamic equations with application to these various flight vehicles, concentrating more on aircraft and spacecraft cases. Then the control systems analysis and design is carried out both from transfer fTable of ContentsPreface xxi Perspective of the Book xxix Part I Flight Vehicle Dynamics 1 Roadmap to Part I 2 1 An Overview of the Fundamental Concepts of Modeling of a Dynamic System 5 1.1 Chapter Highlights 5 1.2 Stages of a Dynamic System Investigation and Approximations 5 1.3 Concepts Needed to Derive Equations of Motion 8 1.4 Illustrative Example 15 1.5 Further Insight into Absolute Acceleration 20 1.6 Chapter Summary 20 1.7 Exercises 21 Bibliography 22 2 Basic Nonlinear Equations of Motion in Three Dimensional Space 23 2.1 Chapter Highlights 23 2.2 Derivation of Equations of Motion for a General Rigid Body 23 2.3 Specialization of Equations of Motion to Aero (Atmospheric) Vehicles 32 2.4 Specialization of Equations of Motion to Spacecraft 43 2.5 Flight Vehicle DynamicModels in State Space Representation 52 2.6 Chapter Summary 58 2.7 Exercises 58 Bibliography 60 3 Linearization and Stability of Linear Time Invariant Systems 61 3.1 Chapter Highlights 61 3.2 State Space Representation of Dynamic Systems 61 3.3 Linearizing a Nonlinear State Space Model 63 3.4 Uncontrolled, Natural Dynamic Response and Stability of First and Second Order Linear Dynamic Systems with State Space Representation 66 3.5 Chapter Summary 73 3.6 Exercises 74 Bibliography 75 4 Aircraft Static Stability and Control 77 4.1 Chapter Highlights 77 4.2 Analysis of Equilibrium (Trim) Flight for Aircraft: Static Stability and Control 77 4.3 Static Longitudinal Stability 79 4.4 Stick Fixed Neutral Point and CG Travel Limits 86 4.5 Static Longitudinal Control with Elevator Deflection 92 4.6 Reversible Flight Control Systems: Stick Free, Stick Force Considerations 99 4.7 Static Directional Stability and Control 105 4.8 Engine Out Rudder/Aileron Power Determination: Minimum Control Speed, VMC 107 4.9 Chapter Summary 111 4.10 Exercises 111 Bibliography 114 5 Aircraft Dynamic Stability and Control via Linearized Models 117 5.1 Chapter Highlights 117 5.2 Analysis of Perturbed Flight from Trim: Aircraft Dynamic Stability and Control 117 5.3 Linearized Equations of Motion in Terms of Stability Derivatives For the Steady, Level Equilibrium Condition 122 5.4 State Space Representation for Longitudinal Motion and Modes of Approximation 124 5.5 State Space Representation for Lateral/Directional Motion and Modes of Approximation 131 5.6 Chapter Summary 138 5.7 Exercises 139 Bibliography 140 6 Spacecraft Passive Stabilization and Control 143 6.1 Chapter Highlights 143 6.2 Passive Methods for Satellite Attitude Stabilization and Control 143 6.3 Stability Conditions for Linearized Models of Single Spin Stabilized Satellites 146 6.4 Stability Conditions for a Dual Spin Stabilized Satellite 149 6.5 Chapter Summary 151 6.6 Exercises 152 Bibliography 152 7 Spacecraft Dynamic Stability and Control via Linearized Models 155 7.1 Chapter Highlights 155 7.2 Active Control: Three Axis Stabilization and Control 155 7.3 Linearized Translational Equations of Motion for a Satellite in a Nominal Circular Orbit for Control Design 158 7.4 Linearized Rotational (Attitude) Equations of Motion for a Satellite in a Nominal Circular Orbit for Control Design 160 7.5 Open Loop (Uncontrolled Motion) Behavior of Spacecraft Models 161 7.6 External Torque Analysis: Control Torques Versus Disturbance Torques 161 7.7 Chapter Summary 162 7.8 Exercises 162 Bibliography 163 Part II Fight Vehicle Control via Classical Transfer Function Based Methods 165 Roadmap to Part II 166 8 Transfer Function Based Linear Control Systems 169 8.1 Chapter Highlights 169 8.2 Poles and Zeroes in Transfer Functions and Their Role in the Stability and Time Response of Systems 174 8.3 Transfer Functions for Aircraft Dynamics Application 179 8.4 Transfer Functions for Spacecraft Dynamics Application 183 8.5 Chapter Summary 184 8.6 Exercises 184 Bibliography 186 9 Block Diagram Representation of Control Systems 187 9.1 Chapter Highlights 187 9.2 Standard Block Diagram of a Typical Control System 187 9.3 Time Domain Performance Specifications in Control Systems 192 9.4 Typical Controller Structures in SISO Control Systems 196 9.5 Chapter Summary 200 9.6 Exercises 201 Bibliography 202 10 Stability Testing of Polynomials 203 10.1 Chapter Highlights 203 10.2 Coefficient Tests for Stability: Routh–Hurwitz Criterion 204 10.3 Left Column Zeros of the Array 208 10.4 Imaginary Axis Roots 208 10.5 Adjustable Systems 209 10.6 Chapter Summary 210 10.7 Exercises 210 Bibliography 211 11 Root Locus Technique for Control Systems Analysis and Design 213 11.1 Chapter Highlights 213 11.2 Introduction 213 11.3 Properties of the Root Locus 214 11.4 Sketching the Root Locus 218 11.5 Refining the Sketch 219 11.6 Control Design using the Root Locus Technique 223 11.7 Using MATLAB to Draw the Root Locus 225 11.8 Chapter Summary 226 11.9 Exercises 227 Bibliography 229 12 Frequency Response Analysis and Design 231 12.1 Chapter Highlights 231 12.2 Introduction 231 12.3 Frequency Response Specifications 232 12.4 Advantages of Working with the Frequency Response in Terms of Bode Plots 235 12.5 Examples on Frequency Response 238 12.6 Stability: Gain and Phase Margins 240 12.7 Notes on Lead and Lag Compensation via Bode Plots 246 12.8 Chapter Summary 248 12.9 Exercises 248 Bibliography 250 13 Applications of Classical Control Methods to Aircraft Control 251 13.1 Chapter Highlights 251 13.2 Aircraft Flight Control Systems (AFCS) 252 13.3 Longitudinal Control Systems 252 13.4 Control Theory Application to Automatic Landing Control System Design 259 13.5 Lateral/Directional Autopilots 265 13.6 Chapter Summary 267 Bibliography 267 14 Application of Classical Control Methods to Spacecraft Control 269 14.1 Chapter Highlights 269 14.2 Control of an Earth Observation Satellite Using a Momentum Wheel and Offset Thrusters: Case Study 269 14.3 Chapter Summary 281 Bibliography 281 Part III Flight Vehicle Control via Modern State Space Based Methods 283 Roadmap to Part III 284 15 Time Domain, State Space Control Theory 287 15.1 Chapter Highlights 287 15.2 Introduction to State Space Control Theory 287 15.3 State Space Representation in Companion Form: Continuous Time Systems 291 15.4 State Space Representation of Discrete Time (Difference) Equations 292 15.5 State Space Representation of Simultaneous Differential Equations 294 15.6 State Space Equations from Transfer Functions 296 15.7 Linear Transformations of State Space Representations 297 15.8 Linearization of Nonlinear State Space Systems 300 15.9 Chapter Summary 304 15.10 Exercises 305 Bibliography 306 16 Dynamic Response of Linear State Space Systems (Including Discrete Time Systems and Sampled Data Systems) 307 16.1 Chapter Highlights 307 16.2 Introduction to Dynamic Response: Continuous Time Systems 307 16.3 Solutions of Linear Constant Coefficient Differential Equations in State Space Form 309 16.4 Determination of State Transition Matrices Using the Cayley–Hamilton Theorem 310 16.5 Response of a Constant Coefficient (Time Invariant) Discrete Time State Space System 314 16.6 Discretizing a Continuous Time System: Sampled Data Systems 317 16.7 Chapter Summary 319 16.8 Exercises 320 Bibliography 321 17 Stability of Dynamic Systems with State Space Representation with Emphasis on Linear Systems 323 17.1 Chapter Highlights 323 17.2 Stability of Dynamic Systems via Lyapunov Stability Concepts 323 17.3 Stability Conditions for Linear Time Invariant Systems with State Space Representation 328 17.4 Stability Conditions for Quasi-linear (Periodic) Systems 337 17.5 Stability of Linear, Possibly Time Varying, Systems 338 17.6 Bounded Input–Bounded State Stability (BIBS) and Bounded Input–Bounded Output Stability (BIBO) 344 17.7 Chapter Summary 345 17.8 Exercises 345 Bibliography 346 18 Controllability, Stabilizability, Observability, and Detectability 349 18.1 Chapter Highlights 349 18.2 Controllability of Linear State Space Systems 349 18.3 State Controllability Test via Modal Decomposition 351 18.4 Normality or Normal Linear Systems 352 18.5 Stabilizability of Uncontrollable Linear State Space Systems 353 18.6 Observability of Linear State Space Systems 355 18.7 State Observability Test via Modal Decomposition 357 18.8 Detectability of Unobservable Linear State Space Systems 358 18.9 Implications and Importance of Controllability and Observability 361 18.10 A Display of all Three Structural Properties via Modal Decomposition 365 18.11 Chapter Summary 365 18.12 Exercises 366 Bibliography 368 19 Shaping of Dynamic Response by Control Design: Pole (Eigenvalue) Placement Technique 369 19.1 Chapter Highlights 369 19.2 Shaping of Dynamic Response of State Space Systems using Control Design 369 19.3 Single Input Full State Feedback Case: Ackermann’s Formula for Gain 373 19.4 Pole (Eigenvalue) Assignment using Full State Feedback: MIMO Case 375 19.5 Chapter Summary 379 19.6 Exercises 379 Bibliography 381 20 Linear Quadratic Regulator (LQR) Optimal Control 383 20.1 Chapter Highlights 383 20.2 Formulation of the Optimum Control Problem 383 20.3 Quadratic Integrals and Matrix Differential Equations 385 20.4 The Optimum Gain Matrix 387 20.5 The Steady State Solution 388 20.6 Disturbances and Reference Inputs 389 20.7 Trade-Off Curve Between State Regulation Cost and Control Effort 392 20.8 Chapter Summary 395 20.9 Exercises 395 Bibliography 396 21 Control Design Using Observers 397 21.1 Chapter Highlights 397 21.2 Observers or Estimators and Their Use in Feedback Control Systems 397 21.3 Other Controller Structures: Dynamic Compensators of Varying Dimensions 405 21.4 Spillover Instabilities in Linear State Space Dynamic Systems 408 21.5 Chapter Summary 410 21.6 Exercises 410 Bibliography 410 22 State Space Control Design: Applications to Aircraft Control 413 22.1 Chapter Highlights 413 22.2 LQR Controller Design for Aircraft Control Application 413 22.3 Pole Placement Design for Aircraft Control Application 414 22.4 Chapter Summary 421 22.5 Exercises 421 Bibliography 421 23 State Space Control Design: Applications to Spacecraft Control 423 23.1 Chapter Highlights 423 23.2 Control Design for Multiple Satellite Formation Flying 423 23.3 Chapter Summary 427 23.4 Exercises 428 Bibliography 428 Part IV Other Related Flight Vehicles 429 Roadmap to Part IV 430 24 Tutorial on Aircraft Flight Control by Boeing 433 24.1 Tutorial Highlights 433 24.2 System Overview 433 24.3 System Electrical Power 436 24.4 Control Laws and System Functionality 438 24.5 Tutorial Summary 441 Bibliography 442 25 Tutorial on Satellite Control Systems 443 25.1 Tutorial Highlights 443 25.2 Spacecraft/Satellite Building Blocks 443 25.3 Attitude Actuators 445 25.4 Considerations in Using Momentum Exchange Devices and Reaction Jet Thrusters for Active Control 445 25.5 Tutorial Summary 449 Bibliography 449 26 Tutorial on Other Flight Vehicles 451 26.1 Tutorial on Helicopter (Rotorcraft) Flight Control Systems 451 26.2 Tutorial on Quadcopter Dynamics and Control 462 26.3 Tutorial on Missile Dynamics and Control 465 26.4 Tutorial on Hypersonic Vehicle Dynamics and Control 468 Bibliography 470 Appendices 471 Appendix A Data for Flight Vehicles 472 A.1 Data for Several Aircraft 472 A.2 Data for Selected Satellites 476 Appendix B Brief Review of Laplace Transform Theory 479 B.1 Introduction 479 B.2 Basics of Laplace Transforms 479 B.3 Inverse Laplace Transformation using the Partial Fraction Expansion Method 482 B.4 Exercises 483 Appendix C A Brief Review of Matrix Theory and Linear Algebra 487 C.1 Matrix Operations, Properties, and Forms 487 C.2 Linear Independence and Rank 489 C.3 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 490 C.4 Definiteness of Matrices 492 C.5 Singular Values 493 C.6 Vector Norms 497 C.7 Simultaneous Linear Equations 499 C.8 Exercises 501 Bibliography 503 Appendix D Useful MATLAB Commands 505 D.1 Author Supplied Matlab Routine for Formation of Fuller Matrices 505 D.2 Available Standard Matlab Commands 507 Index 509

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is focused on the fundamental aspects of analysis, modeling and design of digital control loops around high-frequency switched-mode power converters in a systematic and rigorous manner Comprehensive treatment of digital control theory for power converters Verilog and VHDL sample codes are provided Enables readers to successfully analyze, model, design, and implement voltage, current, or multi-loop digital feedback loops around switched-mode power converters Practical examples are used throughout the book to illustrate applications of the techniques developed Matlab examples are also provided Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction 1 Chapter 1 Continuous-Time Averaged Modeling of DC–DC Converters 13 1.1 Pulse Width Modulated Converters 14 1.2 Converters in Steady State 16 1.2.1 Boost Converter Example 17 1.2.2 Estimation of the Switching Ripple 19 1.2.3 Voltage Conversion Ratios of Basic Converters 20 1.3 Converter Dynamics and Control 21 1.3.1 Converter Averaging and Linearization 22 1.3.2 Modeling of the Pulse Width Modulator 24 1.3.3 The System Loop Gain 25 1.3.4 Averaged Small-Signal Models of Basic Converters 26 1.4 State-Space Averaging 28 1.4.1 Converter Steady-State Operating Point 28 1.4.2 Averaged Small-Signal State-Space Model 29 1.4.3 Boost Converter Example 30 1.5 Design Examples 32 1.5.1 Voltage-Mode Control of a Synchronous Buck Converter 32 1.5.2 Average Current-Mode Control of a Boost Converter 42 1.6 Duty Ratio d[k] Versus d(t) 48 1.7 Summary of Key Points 50 Chapter 2 The Digital Control Loop 51 2.1 Case Study: Digital Voltage-Mode Control 52 2.2 A/D Conversion 53 2.2.1 Sampling Rate 53 2.2.2 Amplitude Quantization 56 2.3 The Digital Compensator 58 2.4 Digital Pulse Width Modulation 63 2.5 Loop Delays 65 2.5.1 Control Delays 65 2.5.2 Modulation Delay 66 2.5.3 Total Loop Delay 70 2.6 Use of Averaged Models in Digital Control Design 71 2.6.1 Limitations of Averaged Modeling 71 2.6.2 Averaged Modeling of a Digitally Controlled Converter 74 2.7 Summary of Key Points 78 Chapter 3 Discrete-Time Modeling 79 3.1 Discrete-Time Small-Signal Modeling 80 3.1.1 A Preliminary Example: A Switched Inductor 82 3.1.2 The General Case 85 3.1.3 Discrete-Time Models for Basic Types of PWM Modulation 87 3.2 Discrete-Time Modeling Examples 88 3.2.1 Synchronous Buck Converter 90 3.2.2 Boost Converter 97 3.3 Discrete-Time Modeling of Time-Invariant Topologies 102 3.3.1 Equivalence to Discrete-Time Modeling 106 3.3.2 Relationship with the Modified Z-Transform 108 3.3.3 Calculation of Tu(z) 108 3.3.4 Buck Converter Example Revisited 112 3.4 Matlab® Discrete-Time Modeling of Basic Converters 112 3.5 Summary of Key Points 117 Chapter 4 Digital Control 119 4.1 System-Level Compensator Design 119 4.1.1 Direct-Digital Design Using the Bilinear Transform Method 120 4.1.2 Digital PID Compensators in the z- and the p-Domains 123 4.2 Design Examples 126 4.2.1 Digital Voltage-Mode Control of a Synchronous Buck Converter 126 4.2.2 Digital Current-Mode Control of a Boost Converter 134 4.2.3 Multiloop Control of a Synchronous Buck Converter 136 4.2.4 Boost Power Factor Corrector 141 4.3 Other Converter Transfer Functions 154 4.4 Actuator Saturation and Integral Anti-Windup Provisions 160 4.5 Summary of Key Points 165 Chapter 5 Amplitude Quantization 167 5.1 System Quantizations 167 5.1.1 A/D Converter 167 5.1.2 DPWM Quantization 169 5.2 Steady-State Solution 172 5.3 No-Limit-Cycling Conditions 175 5.3.1 DPWM versus A/D Resolution 175 5.3.2 Integral Gain 178 5.3.3 Dynamic Quantization Effects 181 5.4 DPWM and A/D Implementation Techniques 182 5.4.1 DPWM Hardware Implementation Techniques 182 5.4.2 Effective DPWM Resolution Improvements via ΣΔ Modulation 186 5.4.3 A/D Converters 187 5.5 Summary of Key Points 190 Chapter 6 Compensator Implementation 191 6.1 PID Compensator Realizations 194 6.2 Coefficient Scaling and Quantization 197 6.2.1 Coefficients Scaling 198 6.2.2 Coefficients Quantization 200 6.3 Voltage-Mode Control Example: Coefficients Quantization 203 6.3.1 Parallel Structure 204 6.3.2 Direct Structure 206 6.3.3 Cascade Structure 208 6.4 Fixed-Point Controller Implementation 213 6.4.1 Effective Dynamic Range and Hardware Dynamic Range 214 6.4.2 Upper Bound of a Signal and the L1-Norm 216 6.5 Voltage-Mode Converter Example: Fixed-Point Implementation 218 6.5.1 Parallel Realization 220 6.5.2 Direct Realization 225 6.5.3 Cascade Realization 229 6.5.4 Linear versus Quantized System Response 233 6.6 HDL Implementation of the Controller 234 6.6.1 VHDL Example 235 6.6.2 Verilog Example 237 6.7 Summary of Key Points 239 Chapter 7 Digital Autotuning 241 7.1 Introduction to Digital Autotuning 242 7.2 Programmable PID Structures 243 7.3 Autotuning VIA Injection of a Digital Perturbation 247 7.3.1 Theory of Operation 249 7.3.2 Implementation of a PD Autotuner 253 7.3.3 Simulation Example 255 7.3.4 Small-Signal Analysis of the PD Autotuning Loop 261 7.4 Digital Autotuning Based on Relay Feedback 265 7.4.1 Theory of Operation 266 7.4.2 Implementation of a Digital Relay Feedback Autotuner 267 7.4.3 Simulation Example 271 7.5 Implementation Issues 272 7.6 Summary of Key Points 275 Appendix A Discrete-Time Linear Systems and The Z-Transform 277 A.1 Difference Equations 277 A.1.1 Forced Response 278 A.1.2 Free Response 279 A.1.3 Impulse Response and System Modes 281 A.1.4 Asymptotic Behavior of the Modes 282 A.1.5 Further Examples 283 A.2 Z-Transform 284 A.2.1 Definition 284 A.2.2 Properties 285 A.3 The Transfer Function 287 A.3.1 Stability 287 A.3.2 Frequency Response 288 A.4 State-Space Representation 288 Appendix B Fixed-Point Arithmetic and HDL Coding 291 B.1 Rounding Operation and Round-Off Error 291 B.2 Floating-Point versus Fixed-Point Arithmetic Systems 293 B.3 Binary Two’s Complement (B2C) Fixed-Point Representation 294 B.4 Signal Notation 296 B.5 Manipulation of B2C Quantities and HDL Examples 297 B.5.1 Sign Extension 298 B.5.2 Alignment 299 B.5.3 Sign Reversal 301 B.5.4 LSB and MSB Truncation 302 B.5.5 Addition and Subtraction 304 B.5.6 Multiplication 305 B.5.7 Overflow Detection and Saturated Arithmetic 307 Appendix C Small-Signal Phase Lag of Uniformly Sampled Pulse Width Modulators 313 C.1 Trailing-Edge Modulators 313 C.2 Leading-Edge Modulators 317 C.3 Symmetrical Modulators 318 References 321 Index 335

Read more less

Book SynopsisUniquely describes both the crystallography and properties of perovskite related materials. Practical applications in solar cells, microelectronics and telecommunications Interdisciplinary topic drawing on materials science, chemistry, physics, and geology Contains problems and answers to enhance knowledge retention Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 The ABX3 Perovskite Structure 1 1.1 Perovskites 1 1.2 The Cubic Perovskite Structure: SrTiO3 4 1.3 The Goldschmidt Tolerance Factor 6 1.4 ABX3 Perovskite Structure Variants 11 1.5 Cation Displacement: BaTiO3 as an Example 12 1.6 Jahn–Teller Octahedral Distortion: KCuF3 as an Example 16 1.7 Octahedral Tilting 19 1.7.1 Tilt Descriptions 19 1.7.2 Trigonal Symmetry: LaAlO3 as an Example 24 1.7.3 Orthorhombic Symmetry: GdFeO3 and CaTiO3 as Examples 26 1.8 Symmetry Relationships 30 1.9 Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Perovskites 33 1.10 Antiperovskites 34 1.10.1 Cubic and Related Structures 34 1.10.2 Other Structures 36 1.11 Structure‐Field Maps 36 1.12 Theoretical Calculations 38 References 40 Further Reading 40 2 ABX3–Related Structures 42 2.1 Double Perovskites and Related Ordered Structures 42 2.1.1 Rock‐Salt Ordered Double Perovskites 42 2.1.2 Other Ordered Perovskites 45 2.1.3 AA′3B4O12‐Related Phases 48 2.2 Anion Substituted Perovskites 51 2.2.1 Nitrides and Oxynitrides 51 2.2.2 Oxyfluorides 53 2.3 A‐Site‐Deficient Perovskite Structures 54 2.3.1 ReO3, WO3 and Related Structures 54 2.3.2 Perovskite Tungsten Bronzes 55 2.3.3 A‐Site‐Deficient Titanates, Niobates and Tantalates 55 2.4 Anion‐Deficient Phases Containing Tetrahedra 57 2.4.1 Brownmillerites 57 2.4.2 Brownmillerite Microstructures 62 2.4.3 Temperature Variation and Disorder 63 2.4.4 B‐Site Doped Brownmillerite Phases 64 2.4.5 B‐Site Doping and Oxygen Pressure 65 2.4.6 A‐Site Doped Brownmillerite Phases 65 2.4.7 Brownmillerite‐Related Phases 66 2.5 Anion‐Deficient Phases Containing Square Pyramids 69 2.5.1 Manganites 69 2.5.2 SrFeO2.5 and Related Phases 71 2.5.3 Cobaltite‐Related Phases 73 2.6 Point Defects, Microdomains and Modulated Phases 74 Further Reading 78 3 Hexagonal Perovskite–Related Structures 79 3.1 The BaNiO3 Structure 79 3.2 BaNiO3‐Related Phases Containing Trigonal Prisms 81 3.2.1 Commensurate Structures 81 3.2.2 Modulated Structures 89 3.3 Perovskites with Mixed Hexagonal/Cubic Packing: Nomenclature 92 3.4 Perovskites with Mixed Hexagonal/Cubic Packing: Stacking Sequences 95 3.5 Hexagonal Perovskites with chq and cph Stacking 98 3.5.1 (chq) Structures 98 3.5.2 (cph) Structures 99 3.5.3 cphq Intergrowth Structures 104 3.6 Hexagonal Perovskites with cphh Stacking 106 3.6.1 (cc…chh) AnBnO3n Structures 107 3.6.2 (cc…chh) AnBn−1O3n Structures 108 3.6.3 (hhcc…chhcc…c) Intergrowth Phases 110 3.6.4 (cc…ch) AnBn−1O3n Shift and Twinned Phases 112 3.7 Anion‐Deficient Phases Containing BaO2 (c′) Layers 112 3.7.1 (c…c′…ch) Structures 113 3.7.2 (c…c′…chh) Structures 113 3.7.3 (c…c′…chhh) Structures 115 3.8 Anion‐Deficient Phases with BaOX Layers 117 3.8.1 (h′) Layers 117 3.8.2 (c′c′) Layers 119 3.9 Sr4Mn3O10 and Ba6Mn5O16 120 3.10 Temperature and Pressure Variation 120 Reference 122 Further Reading 122 4 Modular Structures 123 4.1 K2NiF4 (A2BX4) and Ruddlesden–Popper Phases 123 4.1.1 The K2NiF4 (T or T/O) Structure 123 4.1.2 Ruddlesden–Popper Phases 127 4.2 The Nd2CuO4 (T′) and T* Structures 129 4.3 Dion–Jacobson and Related Phases 131 4.4 Aurivillius Phases 134 4.5 The Ca2Nb2O7‐Related Phases 136 4.6 Cuprate Superconductors and Related Phases 138 4.6.1 La2CuO4, Nd2CuO4 and YBa2Cu3O7 139 4.6.2 Layered Perovskite Structures 141 4.6.3 Structures Related to the Layered Cuprate Phases 142 4.7 Composition Variation 146 4.8 Intercalation and Exfoliation 151 Further Reading 154 5 Diffusion and Ionic Conductivity 156 5.1 Diffusion 156 5.2 Ionic Conductivity 159 5.3 Proton Conductivity 162 5.4 Oxygen Pressure Dependence and Electronic Conductivity 165 5.5 Oxide Ion Mixed Conductors 167 5.6 Proton Mixed Conductors 169 5.7 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 172 References 174 Further Reading 174 6 Dielectric Properties 176 6.1 Insulating Perovskites 176 6.2 Dielectric Perovskites 178 6.2.1 General Properties 178 6.2.2 Colossal Dielectric Constant Materials 181 6.3 Ferroelectric/Piezoelectric Perovskites 182 6.3.1 Spontaneous Polarisation and Domains 182 6.3.2 Ferroelectric Domain Switching 185 6.3.3 Ferroelectric Hysteresis Loops 188 6.3.4 Temperature Dependence of Ferroelectricity 189 6.3.5 Pyroelectrics, Piezoelectrics and Crystal Symmetry 191 6.3.6 Strain versus Electric Field Loops 192 6.4 The Development of Ferroelectric/Piezoelectric Ceramic Bodies 193 6.4.1 Ceramic Piezoelectrics 193 6.4.2 Electrostriction 195 6.5 Antiferroelectrics 196 6.6 Ferrielectrics 199 6.7 Relaxor Ferroelectrics 200 6.7.1 Macroscopic Characteristics of Relaxor Ferroelectrics 200 6.7.2 Microstructures of Relaxor Ferroelectrics 202 6.8 Improper Ferroelectricity 206 6.9 Doping and Modification of Properties 208 6.10 Nanoparticles and Thin Films 212 References 215 Further Reading 215 7 Magnetic Properties 217 7.1 Magnetism in Perovskites 217 7.2 Paramagnetic Perovskites 219 7.3 Antiferromagnetic Perovskites 222 7.3.1 Cubic Perovskite‐Related Structures 222 7.3.2 Hexagonal Perovskites 229 7.4 Ferromagnetic Perovskites 233 7.5 Ferrimagnetic Perovskites 236 7.6 Spin Glass Behaviour 237 7.7 Canted Spins and Other Magnetic Ordering 238 7.8 Thin Films 240 7.9 Nanoparticles 243 7.10 Multiferroic Perovskites 243 References 246 Further Reading 246 8 Electronic Conductivity 247 8.1 Perovskite Band Structure: Metallic Perovskites 247 8.2 Metal–Insulator Transitions 250 8.2.1 Titanates and Related Phases 250 8.2.2 LnNiO3 252 8.2.3 Lanthanoid Manganites 253 8.2.4 Lanthanoid Cobaltites 254 8.2.5 (Sr, Ca)2RuO4 and Ca2Ru1−xCrxO4 255 8.2.6 NaOsO3 256 8.3 Perovskite Superconductors 257 8.4 Cuprate High‐Temperature Superconductors 258 8.4.1 Overview 258 8.4.2 Lanthanum Cuprate, La2CuO4 259 8.4.3 Neodymium Cuprate, Nd2CuO4 260 8.4.4 Yttrium Barium Copper Oxide, YBa2Cu3O7 261 8.4.5 Perovskite‐Related Structures and Series 263 8.4.6 The Generic Superconductivity Phase Diagram 263 8.4.7 Defects and Conductivity 265 8.5 Spin Polarisation and Half‐Metals 267 8.6 Charge Ordering and Orbital Ordering 268 8.7 Magnetoresistance 270 8.7.1 Collosal Magnetoresistance (CMR) in Manganites 270 8.7.2 Low‐Field Magnetoresistance 272 8.8 Semiconductivity in Perovskites 272 8.9 Thin Films and Surface Conductivity 275 References 275 Further Reading 275 9 Thermal and Optical Properties 277 9.1 Thermal Expansion 277 9.1.1 Normal Thermal Expansion 277 9.1.2 Thermal Contraction 280 9.1.3 Zero Thermal Expansion Materials 283 9.2 Thermoelectric Properties 284 9.3 The Magnetocaloric Effect 287 9.4 The Pyroelectric and Electrocaloric Effect 288 9.5 Transparency 289 9.6 Electrochromic Films 291 9.7 Electro‐optic Properties 293 9.7.1 Refractive Index Changes 293 9.7.2 Electro‐optic Phase Modulators 294 9.7.3 Electro‐optic Intensity Modulators 296 9.7.4 Ceramic Modulators 299 9.8 Perovskite Solar Cells 299 Reference 302 Further Reading 302 Appendix A The Bond Valence Model for Perovskites 303 Appendix B Summary of the Kröger–Vink Defect Notation 307 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisBuilding on the success of the previous three editions, Foundations for Microstrip Circuit Design offers extensive new, updated and revised material based upon the latest research.Table of ContentsPreface xxiii Acknowledgements xxv 1 Introduction to Design Using Microstrip and Planar Lines 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Origins of Microstrip 2 1.3 RF and Microwave Modules 4 1.4 Interconnections on RF and Microwave Integrated Circuits 13 1.5 High-speed Digital Interconnections 15 1.6 Summary 18 References 18 2 Fundamentals of Signal Transmission on Interconnects 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Transmission Lines and Interconnects 19 2.3 Interconnects as Part of a Packaging Hierarchy 20 2.4 The Physical Basis of Interconnects 21 2.5 The Physics, a Guided Wave 23 2.6 When an Interconnect Should be Treated as a Transmission Line 32 2.7 The Concept of RF Transmission Lines 34 2.8 Primary Transmission Line Constants 34 2.9 Secondary Constants for Transmission Lines 35 2.10 Transmission Line Impedances 37 2.11 Reflection 38 2.12 Multiple Conductors 41 2.13 Return Currents 44 2.14 Modeling of Interconnects 47 2.15 Summary 49 References 50 3 Microwave Network Analysis 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Two-port Networks 51 3.3 Scattering Parameter Theory 55 3.4 Signal-flow Graph Techniques and S Parameters 70 3.5 Summary 74 References 74 4 Transmission Line Theory 76 4.1 Introduction 76 4.2 Transmission Line Theory 76 4.3 Chain (ABCD) Parameters for a Uniform Length of Loss-free Transmission Line 81 4.4 Change in Reference Plane 82 4.5 Working With a Complex Characteristic Impedance 83 4.6 Summary 87 References 88 5 Planar Interconnect Technologies 89 5.1 Introductory Remarks 89 5.2 Microwave Frequencies and Applications 89 5.3 Transmission Line Structures 91 5.4 Substrates for Planar Transmission Lines 98 5.5 Thin-film Modules 102 5.6 Thick-film Modules 104 5.7 Monolithic Technology 105 5.8 Printed Circuit Boards 108 5.9 Multichip Modules 111 5.10 Summary 116 References 117 6 Microstrip Design at Low Frequencies 120 6.1 The Microstrip Design Problem 120 6.2 The Quasi-TEM Mode of Propagation 122 6.3 Static-TEM Parameters 124 6.4 Effective Permittivity and Characteristic Impedance of Microstrip 127 6.5 Filling Factor 132 6.6 Approximate Graphically Based Synthesis 134 6.7 Formulas for Accurate Static-TEM Design Calculations 137 6.8 Electromagnetic Analysis-based Techniques 139 6.9 A Worked Example of Static-TEM Synthesis 140 6.10 Microstrip on a Dielectrically Anisotropic Substrate 141 6.11 Microstrip and Magnetic Materials 146 6.12 Effects of Finite Strip Thickness, Metallic Enclosure, and Manufacturing Tolerances 147 6.13 Pulse Propagation along Microstrip Lines 151 6.14 Recommendations Relating to the Static-TEM Approaches 152 6.15 Summary 154 References 155 7 Microstrip at High Frequencies 157 7.1 Introduction 157 7.2 Frequency-dependent Effects 157 7.3 Approximate Calculations Accounting for Dispersion 169 7.4 Accurate Design Formulas 173 7.5 Effects due to Ferrite and to Dielectrically Anisotropic Substrates 182 7.6 Field Solutions 183 7.7 Frequency Dependence of Microstrip Characteristic Impedance 186 7.8 Multimoding and Limitations on Operating Frequency 190 7.9 Design Recommendations 194 7.10 Summary 196 References 196 8 Loss and Power-dependent Effects in Microstrip 200 8.1 Introduction 200 8.2 Q Factor as a Measure of Loss 200 8.3 Power Losses and Parasitic Effects 208 8.4 Superconducting Microstrip Lines 216 8.5 Power-handling Capabilities 219 8.6 Passive Intermodulation Distortion 221 8.7 Summary 224 References 224 9 Discontinuities in Microstrip 227 9.1 Introduction 227 9.2 The Main Discontinuities 228 9.3 Bends in Microstrip 236 9.4 Step Changes in Width (Impedance Step) 241 9.5 The Narrow Transverse Slit 243 9.6 Microstrip Junctions 245 9.7 Recommendations for the Calculation of Discontinuities 261 9.8 Summary 266 References 266 10 Parallel-coupled Microstrip Lines 268 10.1 Introduction 268 10.2 Coupled Transmission Line Theory 269 10.3 Formulas for Characteristic Impedance of Coupled Lines 278 10.4 Semi-empirical Analysis Formulas as a Design Aid 290 10.5 An Approximate Synthesis Technique 301 10.6 Summary 304 References 304 11 Applications of Parallel-coupled Microstrip Lines 306 11.1 Introduction 306 11.2 Directional Couplers 306 11.3 Design Example: Design of a 10 dB Microstrip Coupler 308 11.4 Frequency- and Length-Dependent Characteristics of Directional Couplers 310 11.5 Special Coupler Designs with Improved Performance 315 11.6 Thickness Effects, Power Losses, and Fabrication Tolerances 329 11.7 Choice of Structure and Design Recommendations 331 11.8 Summary 336 References 337 12 Microstrip Passive Elements 339 12.1 Introduction 339 12.2 Lumped Elements 339 12.3 Terminations and Attenuators 343 12.4 Microstrip Stubs 345 12.5 Hybrids and Couplers 348 12.6 Power Combiners and Dividers 355 12.7 Baluns 357 12.8 Integrated Components 359 12.9 Summary 365 References 365 13 Stripline Design 369 13.1 Introduction 369 13.2 Symmetrical Stripline 370 13.3 Asymmetrical Stripline 373 13.4 Suspended Stripline 375 13.5 Coupled Stripline 375 13.6 Double-sided Stripline 379 13.7 Discontinuities 380 13.8 Design Recommendations 381 13.9 Summary 382 References 382 14 CPW Design Fundamentals 384 14.1 Introduction to Properties of Coplanar Waveguide 384 14.2 Modeling CPWs 389 14.3 Formulas for Accurate Calculations 391 14.4 Loss Mechanisms 393 14.5 Dispersion 397 14.6 Discontinuities 408 14.7 Circuit Elements 421 14.8 Variants on the Basic CPW Structure 430 14.9 Summary 439 References 439 15 Slotline 443 15.1 Introduction 443 15.2 Basic Concept and Structure 444 15.3 Operating Principles and Modes 444 15.4 Propagation and Dispersion Characteristics 447 15.5 Evaluation of Guide Wavelength and Characteristic Impedance 451 15.6 Losses 453 15.7 End-effects: Open Circuits and Short Circuits 455 15.8 Summary 463 References 463 16 Slotline Applications 465 16.1 Introduction 465 16.2 Comparators and Couplers 465 16.3 Filter Applications 472 16.4 Magic T 474 16.5 The Marchand Balun 477 16.6 Phase Shifters 480 16.7 Isolators and Circulators 481 16.8 A Double-sided, Balanced Microwave Circuit 486 16.9 Summary 486 References 486 17 Transitions 488 17.1 Introduction 488 17.2 Coaxial-to-microstrip Transitions 488 17.3 Waveguide-to-microstrip Transitions 490 17.4 Transitions between CPW and other Mediums 495 17.5 Slotline Transitions 498 17.6 Other Microstrip Transitions 510 17.7 Summary 511 References 511 18 Measurements of Planar Transmission Line Structures 514 18.1 Introduction 514 18.2 Instrumentation Systems for Microstrip Measurements 514 18.3 Measurement of Scattering Parameters 515 18.4 Measurement of Substrate Properties 519 18.5 Microstrip Resonator Methods 523 18.6 Q Factor Measurements 533 18.7 Measurements of Parallel-coupled Microstrips 535 18.8 Time-domain Reflectometry Techniques 537 18.9 Summary 539 References 539 19 Filters Using Planar Transmission Lines 541 19.1 Introduction 541 19.2 Filter Prototypes 541 19.3 Microstrip Filters 554 19.4 Microstrip Bandpass Filters 559 19.5 Parallel-coupled Line Bandpass Filters 561 19.6 Filter Design Accounting for Losses 572 19.7 Dielectric Resonators and Filters Using Them 572 19.8 Spurline Bandstop Filters 573 19.9 Summary 575 References 575 20 Magnetic Materials and Planar Transmission Lines 576 20.1 Introduction 576 20.2 Microwave Magnetic Materials 577 20.3 Effective Permeability of Magnetic Materials 587 20.4 Microstrip on a Ferrite Substrate 589 20.5 Isolators and Circulators 592 20.6 Transmission Lines Using Metaconductors 595 20.7 Frequency Selective Limiter 606 20.8 Summary 607 References 607 21 Interconnects for Digital Systems 610 21.1 Introduction 610 21.2 Overview of On-chip Interconnects 610 21.3 RC Modeling of On-chip Interconnects 613 21.4 Modeling Inductance 619 21.5 Clock Distribution 622 21.6 Resonant Clock Distribution 625 21.7 Summary 626 References 627 A Physical and Mathematical Properties 629 A.1 SI Units 629 A.2 SI Prefixes 629 A.3 Physical and Mathematical Constants 631 A. 4 Basis of Electromagnetic SI Units 631 A.5 Relationship of SI Units to CGS Units 632 B Material Properties 635 References 642 C RF and Microwave Substrates 643 C.1 Hard substrates 643 C.2 Soft Substrates 644 Index 647

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAbout the Author xiii About the Companion Website xiv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 Book Overview 4 2 Wireless System Models 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.1.1 Modulation and Coding Scheme and Link Adaptation 24 2.1.2 Link Adaptation 26 2.2 DS-CDMA Basic Formulation 27 2.2.1 Pulse-shaping Filter 30 2.2.2 Discrete Time Model 30 2.2.3 Channel Model 32 2.2.4 Matrix Formulation for DS/CDMA System Model 38 2.2.5 Synchronous DS/CDMA System 41 2.3 Performance Evaluation 43 2.3.1 Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio 43 2.3.2 Bit Error Rate 44 2.4 MIMO/OFDM System Model 46 2.4.1 FFT and IFFT 49 2.4.2 Cyclic Prefix 52 2.4.3 Single-user MIMO/OFDM 53 2.4.3.1 3GPP LTE MIMO 55 2.4.4 Adaptive Resource Management 64 2.4.5 Multi-User MIMO/OFDM 69 2.4.6 Adaptive filtering in MIMO/OFDM System 71 2.4.7 Performance Evaluation of MIMO/MBER System 71 2.5 Adaptive Antenna Array 73 2.5.1 Uniform Linear Array 73 2.5.2 DS/CDMA with Antenna Array 78 2.6 Simulation Software 80 References 82 3 Adaptive Detection Algorithms 89 3.1 Introduction 89 3.2 The Conventional Detector 90 3.3 Multiuser Detection 91 3.3.1 Decorrelating Detector 93 3.3.2 Minimum Mean-squared Error Detector 93 3.3.3 Adaptive Detection 95 3.3.4 Blind Detection 95 3.3.4.1 Constrained Optimization 96 3.3.5 Constant Modulus Approach 105 3.3.6 Subspace Approach 107 3.4 Simulation Results 109 3.4.1 Linear Detectors 109 3.4.2 MOE Detectors 111 3.4.2.1 MOE Detector with Single Constraint 111 3.4.2.2 MOE Detector with Multiple Constraints 112 3.4.3 Channel Estimation Techniques 113 3.4.4 LCCMA Detector 115 References 118 4 Robust RLS Adaptive Algorithms 127 4.1 Introduction 127 4.2 IQRD-RLS Algorithm 131 4.3 IQRD-Based Receivers with Fixed Constraints 132 4.3.1 Direct-form MOE Detector 132 4.3.2 MOE Detector based on IQRD-RLS and PLIC 133 4.4 IQRD-based Receiver with Optimized Constraints 135 4.5 Channel Estimation Techniques 139 4.5.1 Noise Cancellation Schemes 139 4.5.1.1 Adaptive Implementation of Improved Cost Function 139 4.5.1.2 Adaptive Implementation of Modified Cost Function 140 4.5.2 Adaptive Implementation of POR Method 141 4.5.3 Adaptive Implementation of Capon Method 142 4.6 New Robust Detection Technique 144 4.7 Systolic Array Implementation 148 4.8 Simulation Results 153 4.8.1 Experiment 1 153 4.8.2 Experiment 2 155 4.8.3 Experiment 3 158 4.8.4 Experiment 4 160 4.8.5 Experiment 5 162 4.9 Complexity Analysis 163 Appendix 4.A Summary of Inverse QR Algorithm with Inverse Updating 167 Appendix 4.B QR Decomposition Algorithms 169 Appendix 4.C Subspace Tracking Algorithms 171 References 173 5 Quadratically Constrained Simplified Robust Adaptive Detection 181 5.1 Introduction 181 5.2 Robust Receiver Design 187 5.2.1 Quadratic Inequality Constraint 187 5.2.1.1 SP Approach 188 5.2.1.2 Tian Approach 189 5.2.1.3 A Simplified VL Approach 191 5.2.2 Optimum Step-size Estimation 194 5.2.3 Low-complexity Recursive Implementation based on PLIC 195 5.2.4 Convergence Analysis 198 5.3 Geometric Approach 199 5.4 Simulation Results 202 5.5 Complexity Analysis 213 Appendix 5.A Robust Recursive Conjugate Gradient (RCG) Algorithm 215 References 217 6 Robust Constant Modulus Algorithms 225 6.1 Introduction 225 6.2 Robust LCCMA Formulation 232 6.3 Low-complexity Recursive Implementation of LCCMA 234 6.4 BSCMA Algorithm 237 6.5 BSCMA with Quadratic Inequality Constraint 239 6.6 Block Processing and Adaptive Implementation 241 6.7 Simulation Results for Robust LCCMA 243 6.8 Simulation Results for Robust BSCMA 246 6.9 Complexity Analysis 250 References 253 7 Robust Adaptive Beamforming 263 7.1 Introduction 263 7.2 Beamforming Formulation 279 7.2.1 Capon Beamforming 279 7.2.2 LCMV Beamforming 281 7.3 Robust Beamforming Design 283 7.3.1 Adaptive Implementation 288 7.4 Cooperative Joint Constraint Robust Beamforming 292 7.4.1 Adaptive Implementation 295 7.5 Robust Adaptive MVDR Beamformer with Single WC Constraint 296 7.5.1 Lagrange Approach 299 7.5.2 Eigendecomposition Method 299 7.5.3 Taylor Series Approximation Method 300 7.5.4 Adaptive MVDR Beamformer with Single WC Constraint 300 7.5.4.1 Lagrange Multiplier Estimation 301 7.5.4.2 Recursive Implementation 303 7.6 Robust LCMV Beamforming with MBWC Constraints 304 7.7 Geometric Interpretation 306 7.7.1 Ellipsoidal Constraint Beamforming 306 7.7.2 Worst-case Constraint Beamforming 308 7.8 Simulation Results 310 7.8.1 Simulations Results for Ellipsoidal Constraint Beamforming 310 7.8.2 Simulation for WC Constraint Beamforming 322 7.8.2.1 DOA Mismatch Scenario 322 7.8.2.2 Small Angular Spread Scenario 328 7.8.2.3 Large Angular Spread Scenario 331 7.9 Summary 332 References 333 8 Minimum BER Adaptive Detection and Beamforming 345 8.1 Introduction 345 8.2 MBER Beamformer 347 8.2.1 AMBER 351 8.2.2 LMBER 352 8.2.3 Gradient Newton Algorithms 353 8.2.3.1 Newton-AMBER 354 8.2.3.2 Newton-LMBER 354 8.2.4 Normalized Gradient Algorithms 354 8.2.4.1 Normalized-AMBER 355 8.2.4.2 Normalized-LMBER 355 8.2.5 Normalized Newton Gradient Algorithms 355 8.2.5.1 Normalized-Newton-AMBER 355 8.2.5.2 Normalized-Newton-LMBER 356 8.2.6 Block-Shanno MBER 356 8.3 MBER Simulation Results 360 8.3.1 BER Performance versus SNR 361 8.3.2 Convergence Rate Comparison 366 8.3.3 BER Performance versus Number of Subscribers 370 8.3.4 Computational Complexity 371 8.4 MBER Spatial MUD in MIMO/OFDM Systems 372 8.4.1 AMBER 375 8.4.2 LMBER 376 8.4.3 Gradient Newton Algorithms 376 8.4.3.1 Newton-AMBER 377 8.4.3.2 Newton-LMBER 377 8.4.4 Normalized Gradient Algorithms 377 8.4.4.1 Normalized-AMBER 378 8.4.4.2 Normalized-LMBER 378 8.4.5 Normalized Newton Gradient Algorithms 378 8.4.5.1 Normalized-Newton-AMBER 378 8.4.5.2 Normalized-Newton-LMBER 379 8.4.6 Block-Shanno MBER 379 8.5 MBER Simulation Results 381 8.5.1 Convergence Rate Comparison 382 8.5.2 BER Performance versus SNR 384 8.6 Summary 386 References 387 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroductory textbook in the important area of network security for undergraduate and graduate students Comprehensively covers fundamental concepts with newer topics such as electronic cash, bit-coin, P2P, SHA-3, E-voting, and Zigbee security Fully updated to reflect new developments in network security Introduces a chapter on Cloud security, a very popular and essential topic Uses everyday examples that most computer users experience to illustrate important principles and mechanisms Features a companion website with Powerpoint slides for lectures and solution manuals to selected exercise problems, available at http://www.cs.uml.edu/~wang/NetSec Table of ContentsPreface xv About the Authors xix 1 Network Security Overview 1 1.1 Mission and Definitions 1 1.2 Common Attacks and Defense Mechanisms 3 1.2.1 Eavesdropping 3 1.2.2 Cryptanalysis 4 1.2.3 Password Pilfering 5 1.2.4 Identity Spoofing 13 1.2.5 Buffer-Overflow Exploitations 16 1.2.6 Repudiation 18 1.2.7 Intrusion 19 1.2.8 Traffic Analysis 19 1.2.9 Denial of Service Attacks 20 1.2.10 Malicious Software 22 1.3 Attacker Profiles 25 1.3.1 Hackers 25 1.3.2 Script Kiddies 26 1.3.3 Cyber Spies 26 1.3.4 Vicious Employees 27 1.3.5 Cyber Terrorists 27 1.3.6 Hypothetical Attackers 27 1.4 Basic Security Model 27 1.5 Security Resources 29 1.5.1 CERT 29 1.5.2 SANS Institute 29 1.5.3 Microsoft Security 29 1.5.4 NTBugtraq 29 1.5.5 Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures 30 1.6 Closing Remarks 30 1.7 Exercises 30 1.7.1 Discussions 30 1.7.2 Homework 31 2 Data Encryption Algorithms 45 2.1 Data Encryption Algorithm Design Criteria 45 2.1.1 ASCII Code 46 2.1.2 XOR Encryption 46 2.1.3 Criteria of Data Encryptions 48 2.1.4 Implementation Criteria 50 2.2 Data Encryption Standard 50 2.2.1 Feistel’s Cipher Scheme 50 2.2.2 DES Subkeys 52 2.2.3 DES Substitution Boxes 54 2.2.4 DES Encryption 55 2.2.5 DES Decryption and Correctness Proof 57 2.2.6 DES Security Strength 58 2.3 Multiple DES 59 2.3.1 Triple-DES with Two Keys 59 2.3.2 2DES and 3DES/3 59 2.3.3 Meet-in-the-Middle Attacks on 2DES 60 2.4 Advanced Encryption Standard 61 2.4.1 AES Basic Structures 61 2.4.2 AES S-Boxes 63 2.4.3 AES-128 Round Keys 65 2.4.4 Add Round Keys 66 2.4.5 Substitute-Bytes 67 2.4.6 Shift-Rows 67 2.4.7 Mix-Columns 67 2.4.8 AES-128 Encryption 68 2.4.9 AES-128 Decryption and Correctness Proof 69 2.4.10 Galois Fields 70 2.4.11 Construction of the AES S-Box and Its Inverse 73 2.4.12 AES Security Strength 74 2.5 Standard Block Cipher Modes of Operations 74 2.5.1 Electronic-Codebook Mode 75 2.5.2 Cipher-Block-Chaining Mode 75 2.5.3 Cipher-Feedback Mode 75 2.5.4 Output-Feedback Mode 76 2.5.5 Counter Mode 76 2.6 Offset Codebook Mode of Operations 77 2.6.1 Basic Operations 77 2.6.2 OCB Encryption and Tag Generation 78 2.6.3 OCB Decryption and Tag Verification 79 2.7 Stream Ciphers 80 2.7.1 RC4 Stream Cipher 80 2.7.2 RC4 Security Weaknesses 81 2.8 Key Generations 83 2.8.1 ANSI X9.17 PRNG 83 2.8.2 BBS Pseudorandom Bit Generator 83 2.9 Closing Remarks 84 2.10 Exercises 85 2.10.1 Discussions 85 2.10.2 Homework 85 3 Public-Key Cryptography and Key Management 93 3.1 Concepts of Public-Key Cryptography 93 3.2 Elementary Concepts and Theorems in Number Theory 95 3.2.1 Modular Arithmetic and Congruence Relations 96 3.2.2 Modular Inverse 96 3.2.3 Primitive Roots 98 3.2.4 Fast Modular Exponentiation 98 3.2.5 Finding Large Prime Numbers 100 3.2.6 The Chinese Remainder Theorem 101 3.2.7 Finite Continued Fractions 102 3.3 Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange 103 3.3.1 Key Exchange Protocol 103 3.3.2 Man-in-the-Middle Attacks 104 3.3.3 Elgamal PKC 106 3.4 RSA Cryptosystem 106 3.4.1 RSA Key Pairs, Encryptions, and Decryptions 106 3.4.2 RSA Parameter Attacks 109 3.4.3 RSA Challenge Numbers 112 3.5 Elliptic-Curve Cryptography 113 3.5.1 Commutative Groups on Elliptic Curves 113 3.5.2 Discrete Elliptic Curves 115 3.5.3 ECC Encodings 116 3.5.4 ECC Encryption and Decryption 117 3.5.5 ECC Key Exchange 118 3.5.6 ECC Strength 118 3.6 Key Distributions and Management 118 3.6.1 Master Keys and Session Keys 119 3.6.2 Public-Key Certificates 119 3.6.3 CA Networks 120 3.6.4 Key Rings 121 3.7 Closing Remarks 123 3.8 Exercises 123 3.8.1 Discussions 123 3.8.2 Homework 124 4 Data Authentication 129 4.1 Cryptographic Hash Functions 129 4.1.1 Design Criteria of Cryptographic Hash Functions 130 4.1.2 Quest for Cryptographic Hash Functions 131 4.1.3 Basic Structure of Standard Hash Functions 132 4.1.4 SHA-512 132 4.1.5 WHIRLPOOL 135 4.1.6 SHA-3 Standard 139 4.2 Cryptographic Checksums 143 4.2.1 Exclusive-OR Cryptographic Checksums 143 4.2.2 Design Criteria of MAC Algorithms 144 4.2.3 Data Authentication Algorithm 144 4.3 HMAC 144 4.3.1 Design Criteria of HMAC 144 4.3.2 HMAC Algorithm 145 4.4 Birthday Attacks 145 4.4.1 Complexity of Breaking Strong Collision Resistance 146 4.4.2 Set Intersection Attack 147 4.5 Digital Signature Standard 149 4.5.1 Signing 149 4.5.2 Signature Verifying 150 4.5.3 Correctness Proof of Signature Verification 150 4.5.4 Security Strength of DSS 151 4.6 Dual Signatures and Electronic Transactions 151 4.6.1 Dual Signature Applications 152 4.6.2 Dual Signatures and Electronic Transactions 152 4.7 Blind Signatures and Electronic Cash 153 4.7.1 RSA Blind Signatures 153 4.7.2 Electronic Cash 154 4.7.3 Bitcoin 156 4.8 Closing Remarks 158 4.9 Exercises 158 4.9.1 Discussions 158 4.9.2 Homework 158 5 Network Security Protocols in Practice 165 5.1 Crypto Placements in Networks 165 5.1.1 Crypto Placement at the Application Layer 168 5.1.2 Crypto Placement at the Transport Layer 168 5.1.3 Crypto Placement at the Network Layer 168 5.1.4 Crypto Placement at the Data-Link Layer 169 5.1.5 Implementations of Crypto Algorithms 169 5.2 Public-Key Infrastructure 170 5.2.1 X.509 Public-Key Infrastructure 170 5.2.2 X.509 Certificate Formats 171 5.3 IPsec: A Security Protocol at the Network Layer 173 5.3.1 Security Association 173 5.3.2 Application Modes and Security Associations 174 5.3.3 AH Format 176 5.3.4 ESP Format 178 5.3.5 Secret Key Determination and Distribution 179 5.4 SSL/TLS: Security Protocols at the Transport Layer 183 5.4.1 SSL Handshake Protocol 184 5.4.2 SSL Record Protocol 187 5.5 PGP and S/MIME: Email Security Protocols 188 5.5.1 Basic Email Security Mechanisms 189 5.5.2 PGP 190 5.5.3 S/MIME 191 5.6 Kerberos: An Authentication Protocol 192 5.6.1 Basic Ideas 192 5.6.2 Single-Realm Kerberos 193 5.6.3 Multiple-Realm Kerberos 195 5.7 SSH: Security Protocols for Remote Logins 197 5.8 Electronic Voting Protocols 198 5.8.1 Interactive Proofs 198 5.8.2 Re-encryption Schemes 199 5.8.3 Threshold Cryptography 200 5.8.4 The Helios Voting Protocol 202 5.9 Closing Remarks 204 5.10 Exercises 204 5.10.1 Discussions 204 5.10.2 Homework 204 6 Wireless Network Security 211 6.1 Wireless Communications and 802.11 WLAN Standards 211 6.1.1 WLAN Architecture 212 6.1.2 802.11 Essentials 213 6.1.3 Wireless Security Vulnerabilities 214 6.2 Wired Equivalent Privacy 215 6.2.1 Device Authentication and Access Control 215 6.2.2 Data Integrity Check 215 6.2.3 LLC Frame Encryption 216 6.2.4 Security Flaws of WEP 218 6.3 Wi-Fi Protected Access 221 6.3.1 Device Authentication and Access Controls 221 6.3.2 TKIP Key Generations 222 6.3.3 TKIP Message Integrity Code 224 6.3.4 TKIP Key Mixing 226 6.3.5 WPA Encryption and Decryption 229 6.3.6 WPA Security Strength and Weaknesses 229 6.4 IEEE 802.11i/WPA2 230 6.4.1 Key Generations 231 6.4.2 CCMP Encryptions and MIC 231 6.4.3 802.11i Security Strength and Weaknesses 232 6.5 Bluetooth Security 233 6.5.1 Piconets 233 6.5.2 Secure Pairings 235 6.5.3 SAFER+ Block Ciphers 235 6.5.4 Bluetooth Algorithms E1, E21, and E22 238 6.5.5 Bluetooth Authentication 240 6.5.6 A PIN Cracking Attack 241 6.5.7 Bluetooth Secure Simple Pairing 242 6.6 ZigBee Security 243 6.6.1 Joining a Network 243 6.6.2 Authentication 244 6.6.3 Key Establishment 244 6.6.4 Communication Security 245 6.7 Wireless Mesh Network Security 245 6.7.1 Blackhole Attacks 247 6.7.2 Wormhole Attacks 247 6.7.3 Rushing Attacks 247 6.7.4 Route-Error-Injection Attacks 247 6.8 Closing Remarks 248 6.9 Exercises 248 6.9.1 Discussions 248 6.9.2 Homework 248 7 Cloud Security 253 7.1 The Cloud Service Models 253 7.1.1 The REST Architecture 254 7.1.2 Software-as-a-Service 254 7.1.3 Platform-as-a-Service 254 7.1.4 Infrastructure-as-a-Service 254 7.1.5 Storage-as-a-Service 255 7.2 Cloud Security Models 255 7.2.1 Trusted-Third-Party 255 7.2.2 Honest-but-Curious 255 7.2.3 Semi-Honest-but-Curious 255 7.3 Multiple Tenancy 256 7.3.1 Virtualization 256 7.3.2 Attacks 258 7.4 Access Control 258 7.4.1 Access Control in Trusted Clouds 259 7.4.2 Access Control in Untrusted Clouds 260 7.5 Coping with Untrusted Clouds 263 7.5.1 Proofs of Storage 264 7.5.2 Secure Multiparty Computation 265 7.5.3 Oblivious Random Access Machines 268 7.6 Searchable Encryption 271 7.6.1 Keyword Search 271 7.6.2 Phrase Search 274 7.6.3 Searchable Encryption Attacks 275 7.6.4 Searchable Symmetric Encryptions for the SHBC Clouds 276 7.7 Closing Remarks 280 7.8 Exercises 280 7.8.1 Discussions 280 7.8.2 Homework 280 8 Network Perimeter Security 283 8.1 General Firewall Framework 284 8.2 Packet Filters 285 8.2.1 Stateless Filtering 285 8.2.2 Stateful Filtering 287 8.3 Circuit Gateways 288 8.3.1 Basic Structures 288 8.3.2 SOCKS 290 8.4 Application Gateways 290 8.4.1 Cache Gateways 291 8.4.2 Stateful Packet Inspections 291 8.5 Trusted Systems and Bastion Hosts 291 8.5.1 Trusted Operating Systems 292 8.5.2 Bastion hosts and Gateways 293 8.6 Firewall Configurations 294 8.6.1 Single-Homed Bastion Host System 294 8.6.2 Dual-Homed Bastion Host System 294 8.6.3 Screened Subnets 296 8.6.4 Demilitarized Zones 297 8.6.5 Network Security Topology 297 8.7 Network Address Translations 298 8.7.1 Dynamic NAT 298 8.7.2 Virtual Local Area Networks 298 8.7.3 Small Office and Home Office Firewalls 299 8.8 Setting Up Firewalls 299 8.8.1 Security Policy 300 8.8.2 Building a Linux Stateless Packet Filter 300 8.9 Closing Remarks 301 8.10 Exercises 301 8.10.1 Discussions 301 8.10.2 Homework 302 9 Intrusion Detections 309 9.1 Basic Ideas of Intrusion Detection 309 9.1.1 Basic Methodology 310 9.1.2 Auditing 311 9.1.3 IDS Components 312 9.1.4 IDS Architecture 313 9.1.5 Intrusion Detection Policies 315 9.1.6 Unacceptable Behaviors 316 9.2 Network-Based Detections and Host-Based Detections 316 9.2.1 Network-Based Detections 317 9.2.2 Host-Based Detections 318 9.3 Signature Detections 319 9.3.1 Network Signatures 320 9.3.2 Host-Based Signatures 321 9.3.3 Outsider Behaviors and Insider Misuses 322 9.3.4 Signature Detection Systems 323 9.4 Statistical Analysis 324 9.4.1 Event Counter 324 9.4.2 Event Gauge 324 9.4.3 Event Timer 325 9.4.4 Resource Utilization 325 9.4.5 Statistical Techniques 325 9.5 Behavioral Data Forensics 325 9.5.1 Data Mining Techniques 326 9.5.2 A Behavioral Data Forensic Example 326 9.6 Honeypots 327 9.6.1 Types of Honeypots 327 9.6.2 Honeyd 328 9.6.3 MWCollect Projects 331 9.6.4 Honeynet Projects 331 9.7 Closing Remarks 331 9.8 Exercises 332 9.8.1 Discussions 332 9.8.2 Homework 332 10 The Art of Anti-Malicious Software 337 10.1 Viruses 337 10.1.1 Virus Types 338 10.1.2 Virus Infection Schemes 340 10.1.3 Virus Structures 341 10.1.4 Compressor Viruses 342 10.1.5 Virus Disseminations 343 10.1.6 Win32 Virus Infection Dissection 344 10.1.7 Virus Creation Toolkits 345 10.2 Worms 346 10.2.1 Common Worm Types 346 10.2.2 The Morris Worm 346 10.2.3 The Melissa Worm 347 10.2.4 The Code Red Worm 348 10.2.5 The Conficker Worm 348 10.2.6 Other Worms Targeted at Microsoft Products 349 10.2.7 Email Attachments 350 10.3 Trojans 351 10.3.1 Ransomware 353 10.4 Malware Defense 353 10.4.1 Standard Scanning Methods 354 10.4.2 Anti-Malicious-Software Products 354 10.4.3 Malware Emulator 355 10.5 Hoaxes 356 10.6 Peer-to-Peer Security 357 10.6.1 P2P Security Vulnerabilities 357 10.6.2 P2P Security Measures 359 10.6.3 Instant Messaging 359 10.6.4 Anonymous Networks 359 10.7 Web Security 360 10.7.1 Basic Types of Web Documents 361 10.7.2 Security of Web Documents 362 10.7.3 ActiveX 363 10.7.4 Cookies 364 10.7.5 Spyware 365 10.7.6 AJAX Security 365 10.7.7 Safe Web Surfing 367 10.8 Distributed Denial-of-Service Attacks 367 10.8.1 Master-Slave DDoS Attacks 367 10.8.2 Master-Slave-Reflector DDoS Attacks 367 10.8.3 DDoS Attacks Countermeasures 368 10.9 Closing Remarks 370 10.10 Exercises 370 10.10.1 Discussions 370 10.10.2 Homework 370 Appendix A 7-bit ASCII code 377 Appendix B SHA-512 Constants (in Hexadecimal) 379 Appendix C Data Compression Using ZIP 381 Exercise 382 Appendix D Base64 Encoding 383 Exercise 384 Appendix E Cracking WEP Keys Using WEPCrack 385 E.1 System Setup 385 AP 385 Trim Size: 170mm x 244mm Wang ftoc.tex V1 - 04/21/2015 10:14 P.M. Page xiv xiv Contents User’s Network Card 385 Attacker’s Network Card 386 E.2 Experiment Details 386 Step 1: Initial Setup 386 Step 2: Attacker Setup 387 Step 3: Collecting Weak Initialization Vectors 387 Step 4: Cracking 387 E.3 Sample Code 388 Appendix F Acronyms 393 Further Reading 399 Index 406

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnderstanding electromagnetic wave theory is pivotal in the design of antennas, microwave circuits, radars, and imaging systems. Researchers behind technology advances in these and other areas need to understand both the classical theory of electromagnetics as well as modern and emerging techniques of solving Maxwell''s equations. To this end, the book provides a graduate-level treatment of selected analytical and computational methods. The analytical methods include the separation of variables, perturbation theory, Green''s functions, geometrical optics, the geometrical theory of diffraction, physical optics, and the physical theory of diffraction. The numerical techniques include mode matching, the method of moments, and the finite element method. The analytical methods provide physical insights that are valuable in the design process and the invention of new devices. The numerical methods are more capable of treating general and complex structures. Together, they form a baTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xvii 1 Background 1 1.1 Field Laws 1 1.2 Properties of Materials 2 1.3 Types of Currents 3 1.4 Capacitors, Inductors 4 1.5 Differential Form 6 1.6 Time-Harmonic Fields 8 1.7 Sufficient Conditions 9 1.8 Magnetic Currents, Duality 9 1.9 Poynting's Theorem 10 1.10 Lorentz Reciprocity Theorem 13 1.11 Friis and Radar Equations 14 1.12 Asymptotic Techniques 16 1.13 Further Reading 17 References 18 Problems 18 2 TEM Waves 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Plane Waves 22 2.3 Oblique Plane Waves 28 2.4 Plane Wave Reflection and Transmission 29 2.5 Multilayer Slab 36 2.6 Impedance Boundary Condition 38 2.7 Transmission Lines 44 2.8 Transverse Equivalent Network 60 2.9 Absorbers 62 2.10 Phase and Group Velocity 63 2.11 Further Reading 65 References 66 Problems 66 3 Waveguides 71 3.1 Separation of Variables 71 3.2 Rectangular Waveguide 73 3.3 Cylindrical Waves 80 3.4 Circular Waveguide 81 3.5 Waveguide Excitation 84 3.6 2D Waveguides 85 3.7 Transverse Resonance Method 94 3.8 Other Waveguide Types 98 3.9 Waveguide Discontinuities 101 3.10 Mode Matching 107 3.11 Waveguide Cavity 114 3.12 Perturbation Method 121 3.13 Further Reading 127 References 127 Problems 127 4 Potentials, Concepts, and Theorems 135 4.1 Vector Potentials A and F 135 4.2 Hertz Potentials 140 4.3 Vector Potentials and Boundary Conditions 141 4.4 Uniqueness Theorem 148 4.5 Radiation Condition 151 4.6 Image Theory 151 4.7 Physical Optics 153 4.8 Surface Equivalent 154 4.9 Love’s Equivalent 158 4.10 Induction Equivalent 161 4.11 Volume Equivalent 162 4.12 Radiation by Planar Sources 164 4.13 2D Sources and Fields 165 4.14 Derivation of Vector Potential Integral 168 4.15 Solution Without Using Potentials 170 4.16 Further Reading 171 References 171 Problems 172 5 Canonical Problems 177 5.1 Cylinder 177 5.2 Wedge 184 5.3 The Relation Between 2D and 3D Solutions 188 5.4 Spherical Waves 192 5.5 Method of Stationary Phase 199 5.6 Further Reading 201 References 202 Problems 202 6 Method of Moments 209 6.1 Introduction 209 6.2 General Concepts 209 6.3 2D Conducting Strip 212 6.4 2D Thin Wire MoM 220 6.5 Periodic 2D Wire Array 224 6.6 3D Thin Wire MoM 228 6.7 EFIE and MFIE 234 6.8 Internal Resonances 236 6.9 PMCHWT Formulation 237 6.10 Basis Functions 238 6.11 Further Reading 240 References 240 Problems 241 7 Finite Element Method 245 7.1 Introduction 245 7.2 Laplace’s Equation 246 7.3 Piecewise-planar Potential 246 7.4 Stored Energy 248 7.5 Connection of Elements 248 7.6 Energy Minimization 250 7.7 Natural Boundary Conditions 252 7.8 Capacitance, Inductance 255 7.9 Computer Program 257 7.10 Poisson’s Equation 258 7.11 Scalar Wave Equation 262 7.12 Galerkin’s Method 266 7.13 Vector Wave Equation 270 7.14 Other Element Types 270 7.15 Radiating Structures 274 7.16 Further Reading 278 References 278 Problems 278 8 Uniform Theory of Diffraction 283 8.1 Fermat’s Principle 283 8.2 2D Fields 284 8.3 Scattering and GTD 292 8.4 3D Fields 294 8.5 Curved Surface Reflection 306 8.6 Curved Wedge Face 308 8.7 Non-Metallic Wedge 308 8.8 Slope Diffraction 309 8.9 Double Diffraction 310 8.10 GTD Equivalent Edge Currents 311 8.11 Surface-Ray Diffraction 315 8.12 Further Reading 324 References 325 Problems 326 9 Physical Theory of Diffraction 337 9.1 PO and an Edge 337 9.2 Asymptotic Evaluation 338 9.3 Reflector Antenna 344 9.4 RCS of a Disc 347 9.5 PTD Equivalent Edge Currents 351 9.6 Further Reading 351 References 352 Problems 352 10 Scalar and Dyadic Green’s Functions 355 10.1 Impulse Response 355 10.2 Green’s Function for A 357 10.3 2D Field Solutions Using Green’s Functions 358 10.4 3D Dyadic Green’s Functions 362 10.5 Some Dyadic Identities 363 10.6 Solution Using a Dyadic Green’s Function 364 10.7 Symmetry Property of G 365 10.8 Interpretation of the Radiation Integrals 367 10.9 Free Space Dyadic Green’s Function 367 10.10Dyadic Green’s Function Singularity 368 10.11Dielectric Rod 370 10.12Further Reading 372 References 372 Problems 372 11 Green’s Functions Construction I 375 11.1 Sturm Liouville Problem 375 11.2 Green’s Second Identity 376 11.3 Hermitian Property 376 11.4 Particular Solution 377 11.5 Properties of the Green’s Function 377 11.6 UT Method 378 11.7 Discrete and Continuous Spectra 382 11.8 Generalized Separation of Variables 388 11.9 Further Reading 396 References 396 Problems 396 12 Green’s Functions Construction II 401 12.1 Sommerfeld Integrals 401 12.2 The Function k(v) = √k2−ν2 402 12.3 The Transformation v= k sin w 405 12.4 Saddle Point Method 406 12.5 SDP Branch Cuts 415 12.6 Grounded Dielectric Slab 417 12.7 Half Space 426 12.8 Circular Cylinder 435 12.9 Strip Grating on a Dielectric Slab 443 12.10Further Reading 455 References 456 Problems 456 Appendix A Constants and Formulas 461 A.1 Constants 461 A.2 Definitions 461 A.3 Trigonometry 462 A.4 The Impulse Function 462 References 463 B Coordinates and Vector Calculus 465 B.1 Coordinate Transformations 466 B.2 Volume and Surface Elements 466 B.3 Vector Derivatives 468 B.4 Vector Identities 469 B.5 Integral Relations 470 References 472 C Bessel’s Differential Equation 473 C.1 Bessel Functions 473 C.2 Roots of H(1,2)νp(x)=0 476 C.3 Integrals 476 C.4 Orthogonality 477 C.5 Recursion Relations 477 C.6 Gamma Function 478 C.7 Wronskians 478 C.8 Spherical Bessel Functions 479 References 480 D Legendre’s Differential Equation 481 D.1 Legendre Functions 481 D.2 Associated Legendre Functions 482 D.3 Orthogonality 482 D.4 Recursion Relations 483 D.5 Spherical Form 483 References 483 E Complex Variables 485 E.1 Residue Calculus 485 E.2 Branch Cuts 486 References 487 F Compilers and Programming 489 F.1 Getting Started 489 F.2 Fortran 90 491 F.3 More on the OS 499 F.4 Plotting 501 F.5 Further Reading 502 References 502 G Numerical Methods 503 G.1 Numerical Integration 503 G.2 Root Finding 507 G.3 Matrix Equations 509 G.4 Matrix Eigenvalues 510 G.5 Bessel Functions 511 G.6 Legendre Polynomials 511 References 512 H Software Provided 513 Index 515

Read more less

Book SynopsisPractical Field Robotics: A Systems Approach is an introductory book in the area of field robotics. It approaches the subject with a systems design methodology, showing the reader every important decision made in the process of planning, designing, making and testing a field robot. Key features: Takes a practical approach to field robotics, presenting the design and implementation of a robot from start to end Provides multiple robot examples including those used in in nuclear service, underground coalmining and mowing Bridges the gap between existing mathematically based texts and the real work that goes on in research labs all over the world Establishes a structured approach to thinking about hardware and software design Includes problems and is accompanied by a website providing supporting videos and additional problemsTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Overview of Field Robotics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Methodology 3 1.3 High-Level Decisions 3 Problems 4 Notes 4 2 A Mobile Robot System for Nuclear Service 7 2.1 Field Environment: Commercial Nuclear Plants 7 2.2 Field Work: Component Maintenance 8 2.3 Equipment Requirements 9 2.4 Conceptual and Operational Designs 12 2.5 Safety and Reliability 19 2.6 Detail Designs of the Service Arm 20 2.7 Detail Designs of the Walker 20 2.8 Conclusion 21 Problems 21 Notes 22 3 The Largest Mobile Robot in the World 23 3.1 Field Environment: Underground Mining 23 3.2 Field Work: Continuous Coal Haulage 25 3.3 Equipment Requirements 26 3.4 Conceptual and Operational Designs 29 3.5 Safety and Reliability 30 3.6 Detail Conceptual Designs 30 3.7 Conclusion 31 Problems 31 Note 31 4 A Mobile Robot for Mowing a Lawn 33 4.1 Field Environment: Suburban Lawns 33 4.2 Field Work: Navigation and Mowing 34 4.3 Equipment Requirements 34 4.4 Conceptual and Operational Designs 35 4.5 Safety and Reliability 37 4.6 Detail Conceptual Designs 37 4.7 High-Level Decisions 37 4.8 Conceptual Design—Technologies 38 4.9 Conceptual Design—Set Parameters 40 4.10 Conceptual Design—Operate Robot 42 Problems 42 Notes 43 5 The Next Levels of Functional Detail 45 5.1 Quantifying Conceptual Design 45 5.2 Quantifying Send Sound 46 5.3 Quantifying Receive Sound 53 5.4 Quantifying Interpret Sound 56 5.5 Design Choices—Setting Parameters 65 5.6 Select a Platform 66 5.7 Select Frequencies 68 5.8 Select Motions 70 Problems 72 Notes 72 6 Operate Robot 73 6.1 Control System 75 6.2 Control System Select Operation 76 6.3 All About main() 78 6.4 Control System—Control Motions 79 6.5 Control Motions—Rotate Motors 81 6.6 Control Motions—Design Infrastructure 83 6.7 Control Motions—Program Speeds 88 6.8 Control Motions—Move Robot 89 6.9 Control Motions—Sequence Motions 92 6.10 Control Information 92 Problems 102 Notes 103 7 Software Functions 105 7.1 Displays: To Place Needed Information to the User Screen 107 7.2 Field Data and Triangulation: Geometric Locating Functions 109 7.3 Operation: The Calls that Make the Robot Move and Stop 121 7.4 History and Diagnostics: The Immediate Past Used for Analysis 130 Problems 136 Note 137 Appendix A: Myth and Creativity in Conceptual Design 139 Appendix B: Real-World Automation Control through the USB Interface 159 Appendix C: Microchip Code for USB Board to PPM Translation 173 Appendix D: Selected Electronic Parts for Mowing Robot 179 Appendix E: Software Concordance 181 Appendix F: Solutions 187 Index 197

Read more less

Book SynopsisBuilding an Effective Security Program for Distributed Energy Resources and Systems Build a critical and effective security program for DERsBuilding an Effective Security Program for Distributed Energy Resources and Systems requires a unified approach to establishing a critical security program for DER systems and Smart Grid applications. The methodology provided integrates systems security engineering principles, techniques, standards, and best practices. This publication introduces engineers on the design, implementation, and maintenance of a security program for distributed energy resources (DERs), smart grid, and industrial control systems. It provides security professionals with understanding the specific requirements of industrial control systems and real-time constrained applications for power systems. This book:Describes the cybersecurity needs for DERs and power grid as critical infrastructureIntroduces the information security principles to assess and manage the security anTable of ContentsPart I Understanding Security and Privacy Problem 1 Security 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Smart Grid 1.2.1 Traditional Power Grid Architecture 1.2.2 Smart Grid Definitions 1.2.3 Drivers for Change 1.2.4 Smart Grid Communication Infrastructure 1.3 Distributed Energy Resources 1.3.1 DER Characteristics 1.3.2 DER Uses 1.3.3 DER Systems 1.3.4 Microgrid 1.3.5 Virtual Power Plant 1.4 Scope of Security and Privacy 1.4.1 Security for the Smart Grid 1.4.2 Privacy 1.4.3 The Need for Security and Privacy 1.5 Computing and Information Systems for Business and Industrial Applications 1.5.1 Information Systems Classification 1.5.2 Information Systems in Power Grids 1.5.3 DER Information Systems 1.6 Integrated Systems in a Smart Grid 1.6.1 Trends 1.6.2 Characteristics 1.7 Critical Smart Grid Systems 1.7.1 Industrial Control Systems 1.7.2 SCADA Systems 1.7.3 Energy Management Systems 1.7.4 Advanced Meter Systems 1.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 1.8.1 Overview of Various Standards 1.8.2 Key Standard Attributes and Conformance 1.8.3 Smart Grid Standards 1.8.3.1 Key Players in Smart Grid Standards Development 1.8.3.2 How to Use Standards 1.8.4 Cybersecurity Standards 2 Advancing Security 2.1 Emerging Technologies 2.1.1 Internet of Things 2.1.1.1 Characteristics of Objects 2.1.1.2 Technologies 2.1.1.3 IoT Applications 2.1.1.4 IoT Security and Privacy 2.1.1.5 Challenges 2.1.2 Internet of Everything (IoE) 2.1.3 Cyber-Physical Systems 2.1.4 Cyber-Physical Systems Applications 2.2 Cybersecurity 2.2.1 Cybersecurity Definitions 2.2.2 Understanding Cybersecurity Terms 2.2.3 Cybersecurity Evolution 2.3 Advancing Cybersecurity 2.3.1 Contributing Factors to Cybersecurity Success 2.3.2 Advancing Cybersecurity and Privacy Design 2.4 Smart Grid Cybersecurity: A Perspective on Comprehensive Characterization 2.4.1 Forces Shaping Cybersecurity 2.4.2 Smart Grid Trends 2.5 Security as a Personal, Organizational, National, and Global Priority 2.5.1 Security as Personal Priority 2.5.2 Protection of Private Information 2.5.3 Protecting Cyberspace as a National Asset 2.6 Cybersecurity for Electrical Sector as a National Priority 2.6.1 Need for Cybersecurity Solutions 2.6.2 The US Plans 2.7 The Need for Security and Privacy Programs 2.7.1 Security Program 2.7.2 Privacy Program 2.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 2.8.1 Electricity Sector Guidance 2.8.2 International Collaboration References-Part1 Part II Applying Security Principles to Smart Grid 3 Principles of Cybersecurity 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Information Security 3.2.1 Terminology 3.2.2 Information Security Components 3.2.3 Security Principles 3.3 Security Related Concepts 3.3.1 Basic Security Concepts 3.3.2 The Basis for Security 3.4 Characteristics of Information 3.4.1 Data Transformation 3.4.2 Data Characteristics 3.4.3 Data Quality 3.4.4 Information Quality 3.4.5 System Quality 3.4.6 Data Quality Characteristics Assigned to Systems 3.5 Information Systems Characteristics 3.5.1 Software Quality 3.5.2 System Quality Attributes 3.6 Critical Information Systems 3.6.1 Critical Systems Characteristics 3.6.2 Information Life Cycle 3.6.3 Information Assurance 3.6.4 Critical Security Characteristics of Information 3.7 Information Security Models 3.7.1 Evolving Models 3.7.2 RMIAS Model 3.7.3 Information Security Goals 3.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 3.8.1 SGIP Catalog of Standards 3.8.2 Cybersecurity Standards for Smart Grid 4 Applying Security Principles to Smart Grid 4.1 Smart Grid Security Goals 4.2 DERs Information Security Characteristics 4.2.1 Information Classification 4.2.2 Information Classification Levels 4.2.3 Information Evaluation Criteria 4.3 Infrastructure 4.3.1 Information Infrastructure 4.3.2 Information Assurance Infrastructure 4.3.3 Information Management Infrastructure 4.3.4 Outsourced Services 4.3.5 Information Security Management Infrastructure 4.3.6 Cloud Infrastructure 4.4 Smart Grid Infrastructure 4.4.1 Hierarchical Structures 4.4.2 Smart Grid Needs 4.4.3 Cyber Infrastructure 4.4.4 Smart Grid Technologies 4.5 Building an Information Infrastructure for Smart Grid 4.5.1 Various Perspectives 4.5.2 Challenges and Relevant Approaches 4.5.3 Common Employed Infrastructures 4.6 IT Systems versus Industrial Control Systems Infrastructure 4.6.1 Industrial Control Systems General Concepts 4.6.2 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA) 4.6.3 Differences and Similarities 4.7 Convergence Trends 4.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 5 Planning Security Protection 5.1 Threats and Vulnerabilities 5.1.1 Threats Characterization 5.1.2 Vulnerabilities Characteristics 5.2 Attacks 5.2.1 Attacks Categories 5.2.2 Reasons for Attack 5.3 Energy Sector: Threats, Vulnerabilities, and Attacks Overview 5.3.1 Threats 5.3.2 Vulnerabilities 5.3.3 Energy Sector Attacks 5.3.4 Smart Grid Cybersecurity Challenges 5.4 Security Controls 5.4.1 Security Controls Categories 5.4.2 Common Security Controls 5.4.3 Applying Security Controls to Smart Grid 5.5 Security Training and Skills 5.5.1 Education, Training, and Awareness 5.5.2 Security Awareness Program 5.6 Planning for Security and Privacy 5.6.1 Plan Structure 5.6.2 Security Team 5.7 Legal and Ethical Issues 5.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations References-Part2 Part III Security of Critical Infrastructure 6 Critical Infrastructure 6.1 Introduction 6.1.1 Critical Infrastructure 6.1.2 Critical Information Infrastructure 6.2 Associated Industries with Critical Infrastructure 6.2.1 US Critical Sectors 6.2.2 Other Countries 6.3 Critical Infrastructure Components 6.4 Energy Sector 6.4.1 Electrical Subsector 6.4.2 Smart Grid Infrastructure 6.5 Critical Infrastructures Interdependencies 6.5.1 Interdependency Dimensions 6.5.2 Dependencies 6.6 Electrical Power System 6.6.1 Electrical Power System Components 6.6.2 Electrical Power System Evolution and Challenges 6.6.3 Needs 6.7 Recent Threats and Vulnerabilities 6.7.1 Reported Cyber Attacks 6.7.2 ICS/SCADA Incidents and Challenges 6.7.2.1 Stuxnet Exploitation 6.7.2.2 Exposure to Post Stuxnet Malware in Rise 6.7.2.3 Inappropriate Design and Lack of Management 6.7.2.4 Safety 6.7.3 Equipment Failure 6.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 7 Critical Infrastructure Protection 7.1 Critical Infrastructure Attacks and Challenges 7.1.1 Power Grid 7.1.2 Attacks on Information Technology and Telecommunications 7.1.3 Attacks in Manufacturing 7.1.4 Defense 7.2 The Internet as a Critical Infrastructure 7.3 Critical Infrastructure Protection 7.3.1 Policies, Laws, and Regulations 7.3.2 Protection Issues 7.4 Information Security Frameworks 7.4.1 NIST Cybersecurity Framework 7.4.2 NIST Updated Cybersecurity Framework 7.4.3 Generic Framework 7.5 NIST Privacy Framework 7.6 Addressing Security of Control Systems 7.6.1 Challenges 7.6.2 Terrorism Challenges 7.7 Emerging Technologies and Impacts 7.7.1 Control Systems Open to Internet 7.7.2 Wireless and Mobile 7.7.3 Internet of Things and Internet of Everything 7.7.4 WEB Technologies 7.7.5 Embedded Systems 7.7.6 Cloud Computing 7.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 7.8.1 Department of Homeland Security (DHS) 7.8.2 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 7.8.3 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 7.8.4 North American Energy Reliability Corporation (NERC) 7.8.5 Federal Regulatory Energy Commission 7.8.6 DOE Critical Infrastructure Guidance 7.8.7 US-CERT References-Part3 Part IV The Characteristics of Smart Grid and DER Systems 8 Smart Power Grid 8.1 Electric Power System 8.1.1 Power System Services 8.1.2 Power System Operations 8.1.3 Energy Management System Overview 8.1.4 Electrical Utilities Evolution 8.2 Smart Grid – What it Is? 8.2.1 Definitions 8.2.2 Vision of the Future Smart Grid 8.2.3 Tomorrow’s Utility 8.2.4 EMS Upgrades 8.2.5 Electricity Trade 8.2.6 Trading Capabilities 8.3 Smart Grid Characteristics 8.3.1 Relevant Characteristics 8.3.2 Electrical Infrastructure Evolution 8.4 Smart Grid Conceptual Models 8.4.1 NIST Conceptual Model 8.4.2 IEEE Model 8.4.3 European Conceptual Model 8.5 Power and Smart Devices 8.5.1 Smart Meters 8.5.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices 8.5.3 Phasor Measurement Units 8.5.4 Intelligent Universal Transformers 8.6 Examples of Key Technologies and Solutions 8.6.1 Communications Networks 8.6.2 Integrated Communications 8.6.3 Sensor Networks 8.6.4 Infrastructure for Transmission and Substations 8.6.5 Wireless Technologies 8.6.6 Advanced Metering Infrastructure 8.7 Networking Challenges 8.7.1 Architecture 8.7.2 Protocols 8.7.2 Constraints 8.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 8.8.1 Smart Grid Interoperability 8.8.2 Representative Standards 9 Power Systems Characteristics 9.1 Analysis of Power Systems 9.1.1 Analysis of Basic Characteristics 9.1.2 Stability 9.1.3 Partial Stability 9.2 Analysis of Impacts 9.2.1 DERs Impacts 9.2.2 Interconnectivity 9.3 Reliability 9.3.1 Reliable System Characteristics 9.3.2 Addressing Reliability 9.3.3 Evaluating Reliability 9.3.4 ICT Reliability Issues 9.3.5 DERs Impacts 9.4 Resiliency 9.4.1 Increasing Resiliency 9.4.2 DERs Opportunities 9.5 Addressing Various Issues 9.5.1 Addressing Cybersecurity 9.5.2 Cyber-Physical System 9.5.3 Cyber-Physical Resilience 9.5.4 Related Characteristics, Relationships, Differences and Similarities 9.6 Power Systems Interoperability 9.6.1 Interoperability Dimensions 9.6.2 Smart Grid Interoperability 9.6.3 Interoperability Framework 9.6.6 Addressing Cross-Cutting Issues 9.7 Smart Grid Interoperability Challenges 9.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 9.8.1 ISO/IEC Standards 9.8.2 IEEE Standards 10 Distributed Energy Systems 10.1 Introduction 10.1.1 Distributed Energy 10.2 Distributed Energy Resources 10.2.1 Energy Storage Technologies 10.2.2 Electric Vehicles 10.2.3 Distributed Energy Resource Systems 10.2.4 Electrical Energy Storage Systems 10.2.5 Virtual Power Plant 10.3 DER Applications and Security 10.3.1 Energy Storage Applications 10.3.2 Microgrid 10.4 Smart Grid Security Goals 10.4.1 Cybersecurity 10.4.2 Reliability and Security 10.4.3 DER Security Challenges 10.5 Security Governance in Energy Industry 10.5.1 Security Governance Overview 10.5.2 Information Governance 10.5.3 EAC Recommendations 10.5.4 Establishing Information Security Governance 10.5.5 Governance for Building Security In 10.6 What Kind of Threats and Vulnerabilities? 10.6.1 Threats 10.6.2 Reported Cyber Incidents 10.6.3 Vulnerabilities 10.6.4 ICS Reported Vulnerabilities 10.6.5 Addressing Privacy Issues 10.7 Examples of Smart Grid Applications 10.7.1 Smart Grid Expectations 10.7.2 Demand Response Management Systems (DRMS) 10.7.3 Distribution Automation 10.7.4 Advanced Distribution Management System 10.7.5 Smart Home 10.7.6 Smart Microgrid 10.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 10.8.1 NIST Roadmap, Standards, and Guidelines 10.8.2 NERC CIP Standards 10.8.3 Security Standards Governance References-Part4 Part V Security Program Management 11 Security Management 11.1 Security Management Overview 11.1.1 Information Security 11.1.2 Security Management Components 11.1.3 Management Tasks 11.2 Security Program 11.2.1 Security Program Functions 11.2.2 Building a Security Program: Which Approach? 11.2.3 Security Management Process 11.3 Asset Management 11.3.1 Asset Management for Power System 11.3.2 Asset Management Perspectives 11.3.3 Benefits of Asset Management 11.3.3.1 DER Assets Classification 11.3.3.2 DER Asset Data 11.3.3.3 Asset Management Analytics 11.3.3.4 Applications 11.3.3.5 Asset Management Metrics 11.3.3.6 Asset Management Services 11.4 Physical Security and Safety 11.4.1 Physical Security Measures 11.4.2 Physical Security Evolution 11.4.3 Human Resources and Public Safety 11.5 Human and Technology Relationship 11.5.1 Use Impacts 11.5.2 DER Systems Challenges 11.5.3 Security vs. Safety 11.6 Information Security Management 11.6.1 Information Security Management Infrastructure 11.6.2 Enterprise Security Model 11.6.3 Cycle of the Continuous Information Security Process 11.6.4 Information Security Process for Smart Grid 11.6.5 Systems Engineering and Processes 11.7 Models and Frameworks for Information Security Management 11.7.1 ISMS Models 11.7.2 Information Security Management Maturity Model (ISM3) Model 11.7.3 BMIS Model 11.7.4 Systems Security Engineering - Capability Maturity Model (SSE-CMM) 11.7.5 Standard of Good Practice (SoGP) 11.7.6 Examples of Other Frameworks 11.7.7 Combining Models, Frameworks, Standards, and Best Practices 11.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 12 Security Management for Smart Grid Systems 12.1 Strategic, Tactical, and Operational Security Management 12.1.1 Unified View of Smart Grid Systems 12.1.2 Organizational Security Model 12.2 Security as Business Issue 12.2.1 Strategic Management 12.2.2 Tactical Management 12.2.3 Operational Management 12.3 Systemic Security Management 12.3.1 Comparison and Discussion of Models 12.3.2 Efficient and Effective Management Solutions 12.3.3 Means for Improvement 12.4 Security Model for Electrical Sector 12.4.1 Electricity Subsector Cybersecurity Capability Maturity Model (ES-C2M2) 12.4.2 Which Guidance and Recommendations Apply to Electrical Sector? 12.4.3 Implementing ISMS 12.4.4 NIST Framework 12.4.5 Blueprints 12.4.6 Control Systems 12.5 Achieving Security Governance 12.5.1 Security Strategy Principles 12.5.2 Governance Definitions and Developments 12.5.3 Information Security Governance 12.5.4 Implementation Challenges 12.5.5 Responsibilities and Roles 12.5.6 Governance Model 12.6 Ensuring Information Assurance 12.6.1 NIST SP800-55 12.6.2 ISO/IEC 27004 12.7 Certification and Accreditation 12.7.1 Common Criteria 12.7.2 ISO/IEC 27001 12.7.3 ISMS Accreditation 12.8 Standards, Guidelines, and Recommendations 12.8.1 ISO/IEC Standards 12.8.2 ISA Standards 12.8.3 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 12.8.4 Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) 12.8.5 ISF Standards 12.8.6 European Union Agency for Network and Information Security Guidelines 12.8.7 Information Assurance for Small Medium Enterprise (IASME) References-Part5 Appendix A Cybersecurity Appendix B Power Appendix C Critical Infrastructures and Energy Infrastructure Appendix D Smart Grid – Policy, Concepts, and Technologies Appendix J Acronyms Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn-depth and systemic examination of distribution automation with specific focus on fault location and service restoration Focuses on the detailed and systemic examination of fault location and service restoration in distribution gridArms the readers with a complete picture of what fault location and service restoration is from both theoretical and practical perspectivesPresents the authors' research on fault location and restoration for distribution systems since 1995Introduces the first-hand application experience obtained from over 30 DAS (Distribution Automation System) projects in ChinaExamines the protection approaches of electrical distribution networks automation and on relevant mechanisms associated to electrical supply restoration after (local) blackoutsTable of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi 1 Progresses and Prospects for Fault Processing in Distribution Grids 1Liu Jian 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Progresses in Local Intelligence-Based Fault Processing 3 1.3 Progresses in Distributed Intelligence-Based Fault Processing 3 1.4 Progresses in Centralized Intelligence-Based Fault Processing 4 1.4.1 Fault Location 5 1.4.2 Fault Isolation and Service Restoration 5 1.5 Progresses in Single]Phase Grounding Fault Processing 6 1.6 Prospects 7 2 Fault Processing Based on Local Intelligence 9Tong Xiangqian and Liu Jian 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Fault Processing Based on Local Intelligence for Distribution Networks 10 2.2.1 Auto-Reclosure Control 10 2.2.2 Automatic Backup Switching Control of the Reserve Source 11 2.2.3 Voltage Protection 13 2.2.4 Three-Section Over-Current Protection 14 2.2.5 Coordination between Current Protection Relaying and Auto-Reclosure 22 2.2.6 Directional Over-Current Protection 23 2.2.7 Longitudinal Current Differential Protection 25 2.2.8 The Second Harmonic Braking Criterion in Current Protection 28 2.3 Fault Protection of the Active Distribution Network 32 2.3.1 The Influence of Distributed Generation on Current Protection and the Adaptive Improvement of Protection 32 2.3.2 Influence of Distributed Generation on Auto]Reclosure and its Adaptive Improvements 38 2.3.3 Longitudinal Current Differential Protection of DG Connected Distribution Networks 40 2.4 Coordination of Multistage Protection in the Distribution Network 41 2.4.1 Time Difference Based Coordination of Multistage Protection in the Distribution Network 42 2.4.2 The Coordination of Multistage Protection Based on Three]Section Over]Current Protection in the Distribution Network 50 2.4.3 Coordination Modes and Setting Methods of Multistage Protection of Distribution Networks 58 2.4.4 Example Analysis 68 2.5 Summary 71 3 Fault Processing Based on Distributed Intelligence 73Liu Jian, Xu Shiming and Chen Xingying 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 FA based on Recloser and Voltage-Delay Type Sectionalizers 74 3.3 Reclosing with the Fast Over-Current Protection Mode 78 3.3.1 Basic Principle 78 3.3.2 Improvements 80 3.4 Fast Healing Approach based on Neighbor Communication 82 3.4.1 Basic Principle 82 3.4.2 Improvements 85 3.5 Conclusion and Summary 88 4 Fault Processing Based on Centralized Intelligence 89Liu Jian and Chen Xingying 4.1 Introduction 89 4.2 Simplified Modeling of Distribution Grids 92 4.2.1 Distribution Network Structure 92 4.2.2 Simplified Load Flow Analysis 98 4.3 Interphase Short Circuit Fault Location 103 4.3.1 Fault Location with Sufficient Information 103 4.3.2 Fault Location with Insufficient Information 111 4.3.3 Fault Location for Distribution Grids with DGs 117 4.4 Fault Isolation and Service Restoration 132 4.4.1 Fault Isolation 133 4.4.2 Service Restoration 135 4.4.3 Modeled Service Restoration 152 4.4.4 Coordination of the Four Types of Service Restoration 159 4.5 Conclusion and Summary 161 5 Single Phase to Ground Fault Processing 163Dong Xinzhou and Shi Shenxing 5.1 Types of Ground Fault and Protection Strategy 164 5.1.1 The Neutral Grounding Mode and Ground Fault Types 164 5.1.2 The Protection Strategies for Different Types of Ground Faults 167 5.2 Detection of High Resistance Ground Faults in Low Resistance Grounded Systems 168 5.2.1 High Resistance Ground Faults 168 5.2.2 Zero Sequence Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection 169 5.2.3 Grounded Protection based on the Amplitude and Phase of the Third Harmonic Current 170 5.3 Grounding Protection in the System with Neutral Isolated 174 5.3.1 Characteristics of Single-Phase-to-Ground Faults in Systems with Neutral Isolated 174 5.3.2 Single-Phase-to-Ground Protection in Grids with Neutral Isolated 179 5.4 Grounding Protection in the System with Neutral Grounded Through an Arc Suppression Coil 180 5.4.1 Characteristics of Single-Phase-to-Ground Faults in Systems with Neutral Grounded through an Arc Suppression Coil 181 5.4.2 Single-Phase-to-Ground Protection in Systems with Neutral Grounded through an Arc Suppression Coil 185 5.5 Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Feeder Selection Technology in a Power Distribution System with Neutral Non-Effectively Grounded 186 5.5.1 Comparison of Magnitude and Phase based Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Feeder Selection Methods 187 5.5.2 Characteristics of Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Generated Current Traveling Waves 187 5.5.3 Current Traveling Wave-based Fault Feeder Selection Method 194 5.6 Prevention of and Protection from Single]Phase]to]Ground Faults in Power Distribution Systems with Neutral Non-Effectively Grounded 195 5.6.1 Basic Principle of Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Prevention 195 5.6.2 Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Prevention Technology 196 5.7 Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Location in Systems with Neutral Non]Effectively Grounded 198 5.7.1 Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Generated Initial Traveling Waves 198 5.7.2 Single-Phase-to-Ground Fault Location Method based on Propagation Speed of Traveling Waves 202 5.8 Conclusion and Summary 203 6 Practical Aspects of Fault Processing 204Liu Jian and Zhang Xiaoqing 6.1 Introduction 204 6.2 Coordination of Fault Processing Approaches 205 6.2.1 Fault Processing Performance of Various Methodologies 205 6.3 Planning of Terminal Units 214 6.3.1 Elements Affecting the Reliability of Service 214 6.3.2 Cost-Benefit Analysis of Action Node Planning 215 6.3.3 Planning the Amount of Terminal Units to Meet the Requirement of Service Reliability 217 6.4 Verification of the Property of Fault Processing 226 6.4.1 Master Injection Testing Methodology and the Testing Tool 227 6.4.2 Secondary Synchronous Injection Testing Methodology and Testing Facilities 231 6.4.3 Master and Secondary Synchronous Injection Testing Methodology 232 6.4.4 Direct Short-Circuit Test 234 6.4.5 Comparison of the Four Testing Methodologies 235 6.5 Conclusion and Summary 235 References 238 Index 242

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book introduces theoretical concepts to explain the fundamentals of the design and evaluation of software estimation models. It provides software professionals with vital information on the best software management software out there. End-of-chapter exercises Over 100 figures illustrating the concepts presented throughout the book Examples incorporated with industry data Table of ContentsForeword xiii Overview xvii Acknowledgments xxiii About the Author xxv Part One Understanding the Estimation Process 1 1. The Estimation Process: Phases and Roles 3 1.1. Introduction 3 1.2. Generic Approaches in Estimation Models: Judgment or Engineering? 4 1.2.1. Practitioner’s Approach: Judgment and Craftsmanship 4 1.2.2. Engineering Approach: Modest–One Variable at a Time 5 1.3. Overview of Software Project Estimation and Current Practices 6 1.3.1. Overview of an Estimation Process 6 1.3.2. Poor Estimation Practices 7 1.3.3. Examples of Poor Estimation Practices 9 1.3.4. The Reality: A Tally of Failures 10 1.4. Levels of Uncertainty in an Estimation Process 11 1.4.1. The Cone of Uncertainty 11 1.4.2. Uncertainty in a Productivity Model 12 1.5. Productivity Models 14 1.6. The Estimation Process 16 1.6.1. The Context of the Estimation Process 16 1.6.2. The Foundation: The Productivity Model 17 1.6.3. The Full Estimation Process 18 1.7. Budgeting and Estimating: Roles and Responsibilities 23 1.7.1. Project Budgeting: Levels of Responsibility 23 1.7.2. The Estimator 25 1.7.3. The Manager (Decision-Taker and Overseer) 25 1.8. Pricing Strategies 27 1.8.1. Customers-Suppliers: The Risk Transfer Game in Estimation 28 1.9. Summary – Estimating Process, Roles, and Responsibilities 28 Exercises 30 Term Assignments 31 2. Engineering and Economics Concepts for Understanding Software Process Performance 32 2.1. Introduction: The Production (Development) Process 32 2.2. The Engineering (and Management) Perspective on a Production Process 34 2.3. Simple Quantitative Process Models 36 2.3.1. Productivity Ratio 36 2.3.2. Unit Effort (or Unit Cost) Ratio 38 2.3.3. Averages 39 2.3.4. Linear and Non-Linear Models 42 2.4. Quantitative Models and Economics Concepts 45 2.4.1. Fixed and Variable Costs 45 2.4.2. Economies and Diseconomies of Scale 48 2.5. Software Engineering Datasets and Their Distribution 49 2.5.1. Wedge-Shaped Datasets 49 2.5.2. Homogeneous Datasets 50 2.6. Productivity Models: Explicit and Implicit Variables 52 2.7. A Single and Universal Catch-All Multidimensional Model or Multiple Simpler Models? 54 2.7.1. Models Built from Available Data 55 2.7.2. Models Built on Opinions on Cost Drivers 55 2.7.3. Multiple Models with Coexisting Economies and Diseconomies of Scale 56 Exercises 58 Term Assignments 59 3. Project Scenarios, Budgeting, and Contingency Planning 60 3.1. Introduction 60 3.2. Project Scenarios for Estimation Purposes 61 3.3. Probability of Underestimation and Contingency Funds 65 3.4. A Contingency Example for a Single Project 67 3.5. Managing Contingency Funds at the Portfolio Level 69 3.6. Managerial Prerogatives: An Example in the AGILE Context 69 3.7. Summary 71 Further Reading: A Simulation for Budgeting at the Portfolio Level 71 Exercises 74 Term Assignments 75 Part Two Estimation Process: What Must be Verified? 77 4. What Must be Verified in an Estimation Process: An Overview 79 4.1. Introduction 79 4.2. Verification of the Direct Inputs to An Estimation Process 81 4.2.1. Identification of the Estimation Inputs 81 4.2.2. Documenting the Quality of These Inputs 82 4.3. Verification of the Productivity Model 84 4.3.1. In-House Productivity Models 84 4.3.2. Externally Provided Models 85 4.4. Verification of the Adjustment Phase 86 4.5. Verification of the Budgeting Phase 87 4.6. Re-Estimation and Continuous Improvement to the Full Estimation Process 88 Further Reading: The Estimation Verification Report 89 Exercises 92 Term Assignments 93 5. Verification of the Dataset Used to Build the Models 94 5.1. Introduction 94 5.2. Verification of DIRECT Inputs 96 5.2.1. Verification of the Data Definitions and Data Quality 96 5.2.2. Importance of the Verification of the Measurement Scale Type 97 5.3. Graphical Analysis – One-Dimensional 100 5.4. Analysis of the Distribution of the Input Variables 102 5.4.1. Identification of a Normal (Gaussian) Distribution 102 5.4.2. Identification of Outliers: One-Dimensional Representation 103 5.4.3. Log Transformation 107 5.5. Graphical Analysis – Two-Dimensional 108 5.6. Size Inputs Derived from a Conversion Formula 111 5.7. Summary 112 Further Reading: Measurement and Quantification 113 Exercises 116 Term Assignments 117 Exercises–Further Reading Section 117 Term Assignments–Further Reading Section 118 6. Verification of Productivity Models 119 6.1. Introduction 119 6.2. Criteria Describing the Relationships Across Variables 120 6.2.1. Simple Criteria 120 6.2.2. Practical Interpretation of Criteria Values 122 6.2.3. More Advanced Criteria 124 6.3. Verification of the Assumptions of the Models 125 6.3.1. Three Key Conditions Often Required 125 6.3.2. Sample Size 126 6.4. Evaluation of Models by Their Own Builders 127 6.5. Models Already Built–Should You Trust Them? 128 6.5.1. Independent Evaluations: Small-Scale Replication Studies 128 6.5.2. Large-Scale Replication Studies 129 6.6. Lessons Learned: Distinct Models by Size Range 133 6.6.1. In Practice, Which is the Better Model? 138 6.7. Summary 138 Exercises 139 Term Assignments 139 7. Verification of the Adjustment Phase 141 7.1. Introduction 141 7.2. Adjustment Phase in the Estimation Process 142 7.2.1. Adjusting the Estimation Ranges 142 7.2.2. The Adjustment Phase in the Decision-Making Process: Identifying Scenarios for Managers 144 7.3. The Bundled Approach in Current Practices 145 7.3.1. Overall Approach 145 7.3.2. Detailed Approach for Combining the Impact of Multiple Cost Drivers in Current Models 146 7.3.3. Selecting and Categorizing Each Adjustment: The Transformation of Nominal Scale Cost Drivers intoNumbers 147 7.4. Cost Drivers as Estimation Submodels! 148 7.4.1. Cost Drivers as Step Functions 148 7.4.2. Step Function Estimation Submodels with Unknown Error Ranges 149 7.5. Uncertainty and Error Propagation 151 7.5.1. Error Propagation in Mathematical Formulas 151 7.5.2. The Relevance of Error Propagation in Models 153 Exercises 156 Term Assignments 157 Part Three Building Estimation Models: Data Collection and Analysis 159 8. Data Collection and Industry Standards: The ISBSG Repository 161 8.1. Introduction: Data Collection Requirements 161 8.2. The International Software Benchmarking Standards Group 163 8.2.1. The ISBSG Organization 163 8.2.2. The ISBSG Repository 164 8.3. ISBSG Data Collection Procedures 165 8.3.1. The Data Collection Questionnaire 165 8.3.2. ISBSG Data Definitions 167 8.4. Completed ISBSG Individual Project Benchmarking Reports: Some Examples 170 8.5. Preparing to Use the ISBSG Repository 173 8.5.1. ISBSG Data Extract 173 8.5.2. Data Preparation: Quality of the Data Collected 173 8.5.3. Missing Data: An Example with Effort Data 175 Further Reading 1: Benchmarking Types 177 Further Reading 2: Detailed Structure of the ISBSG Data Extract 179 Exercises 183 Term Assignments 183 9. Building and Evaluating Single Variable Models 185 9.1. Introduction 185 9.2. Modestly, One Variable at a Time 186 9.2.1. The Key Independent Variable: Software Size 186 9.2.2. Analysis of the Work–Effort Relationship in a Sample 188 9.3. Data Preparation 189 9.3.1. Descriptive Analysis 189 9.3.2. Identifying Relevant Samples and Outliers 189 9.4. Analysis of the Quality and Constraints of Models 193 9.4.1. Small Projects 195 9.4.2. Larger Projects 195 9.4.3. Implication for Practitioners 195 9.5. Other Models by Programming Language 196 9.6. Summary 202 Exercises 203 Term Assignments 203 10. Building Models with Categorical Variables 205 10.1. Introduction 205 10.2. The Available Dataset 206 10.3. Initial Model with a Single Independent Variable 208 10.3.1. Simple Linear Regression Model with Functional Size Only 208 10.3.2. Nonlinear Regression Models with Functional Size 208 10.4. Regression Models with Two Independent Variables 210 10.4.1. Multiple Regression Models with Two Independent Quantitative Variables 210 10.4.2. Multiple Regression Models with a Categorical Variable: Project Difficulty 210 10.4.3. The Interaction of Independent Variables 215 Exercises 216 Term Assignments 217 11. Contribution of Productivity Extremes in Estimation 218 11.1. Introduction 218 11.2. Identification of Productivity Extremes 219 11.3. Investigation of Productivity Extremes 220 11.3.1. Projects with Very Low Unit Effort 221 11.3.2. Projects with Very High Unit Effort 222 11.4. Lessons Learned for Estimation Purposes 224 Exercises 225 Term Assignments 225 12. Multiple Models from a Single Dataset 227 12.1. Introduction 227 12.2. Low and High Sensitivity to Functional Size Increases: Multiple Models 228 12.3. The Empirical Study 230 12.3.1. Context 230 12.3.2. Data Collection Procedures 231 12.3.3. Data Quality Controls 231 12.4. Descriptive Analysis 231 12.4.1. Project Characteristics 231 12.4.2. Documentation Quality and Its Impact on Functional Size Quality 233 12.4.3. Unit Effort (in Hours) 234 12.5. Productivity Analysis 234 12.5.1. Single Model with the Full Dataset 234 12.5.2. Model of the Least Productive Projects 235 12.5.3. Model of the Most Productive Projects 237 12.6. External Benchmarking with the ISBSG Repository 238 12.6.1. Project Selection Criteria and Samples 238 12.6.2. External Benchmarking Analysis 239 12.6.3. Further Considerations 240 12.7. Identification of the Adjustment Factors for Model Selection 241 12.7.1. Projects with the Highest Productivity (i.e., the Lowest Unit Effort) 241 12.7.2. Lessons Learned 242 Exercises 243 Term Assignments 243 13. Re-Estimation: A Recovery Effort Model 244 13.1. Introduction 244 13.2. The Need for Re-Estimation and Related Issues 245 13.3. The Recovery Effort Model 246 13.3.1. Key Concepts 246 13.3.2. Ramp-Up Process Losses 247 13.4. A Recovery Model When a Re-Estimation Need is Recognized at Time T > 0 248 13.4.1. Summary of Recovery Variables 248 13.4.2. A Mathematical Model of a Recovery Course in Re-Estimation 248 13.4.3. Probability of Underestimation −p(u) 249 13.4.4. Probability of Acknowledging the Underestimation on a Given Month −p(t) 250 Exercises 251 Term Assignments 251 References 253 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisPower Electronics and Electric Drives for Traction Applications offers a practical approach to understanding power electronics applications in transportation systems ranging from railways to electric vehicles and ships.Trade Review"The book shows how each drive is sized to provide the desired performance, provides real-world examples and illustrates the technology changes experienced by the drive, showing past, present and potential future technology and future trends" IEEE, July 2017Table of ContentsList of contributors viii Preface x 1 Introduction 1 Gonzalo Abad 1.1 Introduction to the book 1 1.2 Traction applications 3 1.3 Electric drives for traction applications 9 1.4 Classification of different parts of electric drives: converter, machines, control strategies, and energy sources 26 1.5 Future challenges for electric drives 33 1.6 Historical evolution 34 References 36 2 Control of Induction Machines 37 Fernando Briz and Gonzalo Abad 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Modeling of induction motors 37 2.3 Rotor flux oriented vector control 52 2.4 Torque capability of the induction machine 69 2.5 Rotor flux selection 71 2.6 Outer control loops 78 2.7 Sensorless control 84 2.8 Steady-state equations and limits of operation of the induction machine 88 References 98 3 Control of Synchronous Machines 100 Fernando Briz and Gonzalo Abad 3.1 Introduction 100 3.2 Types of synchronous machines 100 3.3 Modeling of synchronous machines 103 3.4 Torque equation for synchronous machines 106 3.5 Vector control of permanent magnet synchronous machines 111 3.6 Operation under voltage and current constraints 115 3.7 Speed control 124 3.8 Sensorless control 125 3.9 Numerical calculation of the steady-state of synchronous machines 140 References 146 4 Control of Grid-Connected Converters 148 Aritz Milicua and Gonzalo Abad 4.1 Introduction 148 4.2 Three-phase grid-connected converter model 149 4.3 Three-phase grid-connected converter control 175 4.4 Three-phase grid-connected converter control under unbalanced voltage conditions 185 4.5 Single-phase grid-connected converter model and modulation 207 4.6 Single-phase grid-connected converter control 212 References 220 5 Railway Traction 221 Xabier Agirre and Gonzalo Abad 5.1 Introduction 221 5.2 General description 221 5.3 Physical approach 248 5.4 Electric drive in railway traction 255 5.5 Railway power supply system 276 5.6 ESSs for railway applications 278 5.7 Ground level power supply systems 332 5.8 Auxiliary power systems for railway applications 338 5.9 Real examples 340 5.10 Historical evolution 351 5.11 New trends and future challenges 351 References 357 6 Ships 362 Iñigo Atutxa and Gonzalo Abad 6.1 Introduction 362 6.2 General description 362 6.3 Physical approach of the ship propulsion system 376 6.4 Variable speed drive in electric propulsion 392 6.5 Power generation and distribution system 409 6.6 Computer-based simulation example 439 6.7 Design and dimensioning of the electric system 448 6.8 Real examples 450 6.9 Dynamic positioning (DP) 455 6.10 Historical evolution 458 6.11 New trends and future challenges 463 References 466 7 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles 468 David Garrido and Gonzalo Abad 7.1 Introduction 468 7.2 Physical approach to the electric vehicle: Dynamic model 468 7.3 Electric vehicle configurations 492 7.4 Hybrid electric vehicle configurations 497 7.5 Variable speed drive of the electric vehicle 506 7.6 Battery chargers in electric vehicles 515 7.7 Energy storage systems in electric vehicles 525 7.8 Battery management systems (BMS) 530 7.9 Computer-based simulation example 534 7.10 Electric vehicle design example: Battery pack design 542 7.11 Real examples 543 7.12 Historical evolution 546 7.13 New trends and future challenges 546 References 548 8 Elevators 550 Ana Escalada and Gonzalo Abad 8.1 Introduction 550 8.2 General description 550 8.3 Physical approach 569 8.4 Electric drive 577 8.5 Computer-based simulation 599 8.6 Elevator manufacturers 602 8.7 Summary of the most interesting standards and norms 609 8.8 Door opening/closing mechanism 610 8.9 Rescue system 611 8.10 Traffic 612 8.11 Historical evolution 612 8.12 New trends and future challenges 616 References 618 Index 619

Read more less

Book SynopsisESD: Circuits and Devices 2nd Edition provides a clear picture of layout and design of digital, analog, radio frequency (RF) and power applications for protection from electrostatic discharge (ESD), electrical overstress (EOS), and latchup phenomena from a generalist perspective and design synthesis practices providing optimum solutions in advanced technologies. New features in the 2nd edition: Expanded treatment of ESD and analog design of passive devices of resistors, capacitors, inductors, and active devices of diodes, bipolar junction transistors, MOSFETs, and FINFETs. Increased focus on ESD power clamps for power rails for CMOS, Bipolar, and BiCMOS. Co-synthesizing of semiconductor chip architecture and floor planning with ESD design practices for analog, and mixed signal applications Illustrates the influence of analog design practices on ESD design circuitry, from integration, synthesis and layout, to symmetry, matching, inter-diTable of ContentsAbout the Author xix Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxv 1 Electrostatic Discharge 1 1.1 Electricity and Electrostatic Discharge 1 1.1.1 Electricity and Electrostatics 1 1.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge 2 1.1.3 Key ESD Patents, Inventions, and Innovations 4 1.1.4 Table of ESD Defect Mechanisms 8 1.2 Fundamental Concepts of ESD Design 11 1.2.1 Concepts of ESD Design 12 1.2.2 Device Response to External Events 13 1.2.3 Alternate Current Loops 14 1.2.4 Switches 14 1.2.5 Decoupling of Current Paths 15 1.2.6 Decoupling of Feedback Loops 15 1.2.7 Decoupling of Power Rails 15 1.2.8 Local and Global Distribution 15 1.2.9 Usage of Parasitic Elements 16 1.2.10 Buffering 16 1.2.11 Ballasting 16 1.2.12 Unused Section of a Semiconductor Device, Circuit, or Chip Function 17 1.2.13 Impedance Matching between Floating and Nonfloating Networks 17 1.2.14 Unconnected Structures 17 1.2.15 Utilization of Dummy Structures and Dummy Circuits 17 1.2.16 Nonscalable Source Events 17 1.2.17 Area Efficiency 18 1.3 ESD, EOS, EMI, Electromagnetic Compatibility, and Latchup 18 1.3.1 Esd 18 1.3.2 Electrical Overstress 19 1.3.3 Electromagnetic Interference 19 1.3.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility 19 1.3.5 Latchup 19 1.4 ESD Models 19 1.4.1 Human Body Model 20 1.4.2 Machine Model 21 1.4.3 Cassette Model (Small Charge Model) 24 1.4.4 Charged Device Model 24 1.4.5 Transmission Line Pulse 25 1.4.6 Very Fast Transmission Line Pulse 26 1.5 ESD and System-Level Test Models 28 1.5.1 IEC 61000-4-2 29 1.5.2 Human Metal Model 29 1.5.3 IEC 61000-4-5 30 1.5.4 Charged Board Model 31 1.5.5 Cable Discharge Event 32 1.5.5.1 CDE and Scaling 36 1.5.5.2 CDE—Cable Measurement Equipment 37 1.5.5.3 Cable Configuration—Test Configuration 38 1.5.5.4 Cable Configuration—Floating Cable 38 1.5.5.5 Cable Configuration—Held Cable 38 1.5.5.6 CDE—Peak Current versus Charged Voltage 39 1.5.5.7 CDE—Plateau Current versus Charged Voltage 39 1.6 Time Constants 39 1.6.1 Characteristic Times 39 1.6.2 Electrostatic and Magnetostatic Time Constants 39 1.6.2.1 Charge Relaxation Time 39 1.6.2.2 Magnetic Diffusion Time 40 1.6.2.3 Electromagnetic Wave Transit Time 40 1.6.3 Thermal Time Constants 42 1.6.3.1 Heat Capacity 42 1.6.3.2 Thermal Diffusion 42 1.6.3.3 Heat Transport Equation 42 1.6.4 Thermal Physics Time Constants 43 1.6.4.1 Adiabatic, Thermal Diffusion Timescale, and Steady State 44 1.6.5 Semiconductor Device Time Constants 45 1.6.5.1 Depletion Region Transit Time 45 1.6.5.2 Silicon Diode Storage Delay Time 45 1.6.5.3 Bipolar Base Transit Time 46 1.6.5.4 Bipolar Turn-on Transient Time 46 1.6.5.5 Bipolar Turn-off Transient Time 46 1.6.5.6 Bipolar Emitter Transition Capacitance Charging Time 46 1.6.5.7 Bipolar Collector Capacitance Charging Time 47 1.6.5.8 SCR Time Response 47 1.6.5.9 MOSFET Transit Time 47 1.6.5.10 MOSFET Drain Charging Time 48 1.6.5.11 MOSFET Gate Charging Time 48 1.6.5.12 MOSFET Parasitic Bipolar Response Time 48 1.6.6 Circuit Time Constants 49 1.6.6.1 Pad Capacitance 49 1.6.6.2 Half-Pass TGs 49 1.6.6.3 N-Channel Half-Pass Transistor Charging Time Constant 49 1.6.6.4 Half-pass Transistor TG Discharge Time Constant 49 1.6.6.5 P-Channel Half-Pass Transistor Charging Time Constant 49 1.6.6.6 Inverter Propagation Delay Time Constants 50 1.6.6.7 High-to-Low and Low-to-High Transition Time 50 1.6.6.8 Inverter Propagation Delay Time 51 1.6.6.9 Series N-channel MOSFETs Discharge Delay Time 51 1.6.6.10 Series P-channel MOSFETs Charge Delay Time 51 1.6.7 Chip-Level Time Constants 52 1.6.7.1 Peripheral I/O Power Bus Time Constant 52 1.6.7.2 Core Chip Time Constant 53 1.6.7.3 Substrate Time Constants 53 1.6.7.4 Package Time Constants 54 1.6.8 ESD Time Constants 54 1.6.8.1 ESD Events 55 1.6.8.2 HBM Characteristic Time 55 1.6.8.3 mm Characteristic Time 56 1.6.8.4 CDM Characteristic Time 57 1.6.8.5 Charged Cable Model Characteristic Time 57 1.6.8.6 CDE Model 57 1.6.8.7 CCM Characteristic Time 58 1.6.8.8 TLP Model Characteristic Time 58 1.6.8.9 VF-TLP Model Characteristic Time 59 1.7 Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance and ESD 59 1.7.1 The Role of Capacitance 59 1.7.2 The Role of Resistance 60 1.7.3 The Role of Inductance 61 1.8 Rules of Thumb and ESD 62 1.8.1 ESD Design: An “ESD Ohm’s Law”—A Simple ESD Rule-of-Thumb Design Approach 62 1.9 ESD Scaling 63 1.10 Lumped versus Distributed Analysis and ESD 65 1.10.1 Current and Voltage Distributions 65 1.10.2 Lumped versus Distributed Systems 66 1.10.3 Distributed Systems—Ladder Network Analysis 67 1.10.4 RLC Distributed Systems 69 1.10.5 Resistor–Capacitor (RC) Distributed Systems 74 1.10.6 RG Distributed Systems 77 1.11 ESD Metrics: Chip-Level ESD Metrics and Figures of Merit 79 1.11.1 Chip Mean Pin Power-to-Failure 80 1.11.2 Chip Pin Standard Deviation Power-to-Failure 80 1.11.3 Chip Mean Pin Power-to-Failure to ESD Specification Margin 80 1.11.4 Worst-Case Pin Power-to-Failure to Specification ESD Margin 81 1.11.5 Total ESD Area to Total Chip Area Ratio 81 1.11.6 ESD Area to I/O Area Ratio 81 1.11.7 Circuit ESD Metrics 82 1.11.7.1 Circuit ESD Protection Level to ESD Loading Effect 82 1.11.7.2 Circuit Performance to ESD Loading Effect 82 1.11.7.3 ESD Area to Total Circuit Area Ratio 83 1.11.7.4 Circuit ESD Level to Specification Margin 83 1.11.7.5 Device ESD Metric 83 1.12 ESD Quality and Reliability Business Metrics 84 1.13 Twelve Steps to Building an ESD Strategy 85 1.14 Summary and Closing Comments 86 Problems 87 References 87 2 Design Synthesis 94 2.1 Synthesis and Architecture of a Semiconductor Chip for ESD Protection 94 2.2 Electrical and Spatial Connectivity 95 2.2.1 Electrical Connectivity 95 2.2.2 Thermal Connectivity 95 2.2.3 Spatial Connectivity 96 2.3 ESD, Latchup, and Noise 96 2.3.1 Noise 97 2.3.2 Latchup 98 2.4 Interface Circuits and ESD Elements 98 2.5 ESD Power Clamp Networks 101 2.5.1 Placement of ESD Power Clamps 104 2.6 ESD Rail-to-Rail Networks 105 2.6.1 Placement of ESD Rail-to-Rail Networks 107 2.6.2 Peripheral and Array I/O 107 2.7 Guard Rings 109 2.8 Pads, Floating Pads, and No-connect Pads 111 2.9 Structures under Bond Pads 112 2.10 Mixed Signal Architecture: CMOS 112 2.10.1 Digital and Analog CMOS Architecture 114 2.10.2 Digital and Analog Floor Plan: Placement of Analog Circuits 114 2.11 MS Architecture: Digital, Analog, and RF Architecture 116 2.12 Digital-to-Analog Interdomain Signal Line Failures 118 2.12.1 Digital-to-Analog Core Spatial Isolation 120 2.12.2 Digital-to-Analog Core Ground Coupling 120 2.12.3 Digital-to-Analog Core Resistive Ground Coupling 120 2.12.4 Digital-to-Analog Core Diode Ground Coupling 120 2.12.5 Domain-to-Domain Signal Line ESD Networks 122 2.12.6 Domain-to-Domain Third-Party Coupling Networks 122 2.12.7 Domain-to-Domain Cross-Domain ESD Power Clamp 123 2.13 Summary and Closing Comments 124 Problems 124 References 125 3 MOSFET ESD Design 129 3.1 Basic ESD Design Concepts 129 3.2 ESD MOSFET Design: Channel Length 136 3.2.1 Channel Length and Linewidth Control 136 3.2.2 ACLV Control 138 3.2.3 MOSFET ESD Design Practices 142 3.3 N-Channel MOSFET Design: Channel Width 143 3.4 ESD MOSFET Design: Contacts 144 3.4.1 Gate-to-Contact Spacing 144 3.4.1.1 Off-Axis Current Distribution 148 3.4.1.2 Self-Heating Equienergy Contours 148 3.4.2 Contact-to-Contact Space 149 3.4.3 ESD Design: End Contact 152 3.4.4 ESD MOSFET Design: Contacts to Isolation Edge 153 3.5 ESD MOSFET Design: Metal Distribution 153 3.5.1 MOSFET Metal Bus Design and Current Distribution 153 3.5.2 MOSFET Ladder Network Model 154 3.5.3 MOSFET Wiring: Parallel Current Distribution 158 3.5.4 MOSFET Wiring: Antiparallel Current Distribution 162 3.6 ESD MOSFET Design: Silicide Masking 165 3.6.1 ESD MOSFET Design: Silicide Mask Design 165 3.6.2 ESD MOSFET Design: Silicide Mask Design over Source and Drain 166 3.6.3 ESD MOSFET Design: Silicide Mask Design over Gate 167 3.7 ESD MOSFET Design: Series Cascode Configurations 170 3.7.1 MOSFET ESD Design: Series Cascode MOSFET 170 3.7.2 Integrated Cascoded MOSFETs 171 3.8 ESD MOSFET Design: Multifinger MOSFET Design—Integration of Coupling and Ballasting Techniques 174 3.8.1 Grounded-Gate Resistor-Ballasted MOSFET 174 3.8.2 Soft Substrate Grounded-Gate Resistor-Ballasted MOSFET 176 3.8.3 Gate-Coupled Domino Resistor-Ballasted MOSFET 177 3.8.4 MOSFET Source-Initiated Gate-Bootstrapped Resistor-Ballasted Multifinger MOSFET with MOSFET 179 3.8.5 MOSFET Source-Initiated Gate-Bootstrapped Resistor-Ballasted Multifinger MOSFET with Diode 180 3.9 ESD MOSFET Design: Enclosed Drain Design Practice 181 3.10 ESD MOSFET Interconnect Ballasting Design 182 3.11 ESD MOSFET Design: Source and Drain Segmentation 184 3.12 MOSFET Design for Analog Applications 185 3.13 Summary and Closing Comments 187 Problems 187 References 188 4 ESD Design: Diode Design 191 4.1 ESD Diode Design: ESD Basics 191 4.1.1 Basic ESD Design Concepts 191 4.1.2 ESD Diode Design: ESD Diode Operation 193 4.2 ESD Diode Anode Design 194 4.2.1 P+ Diffusion Anode Width Effect 195 4.2.2 P+ Anode Contacts 195 4.2.3 P+ Anode Silicide to Edge Design 195 4.2.4 P+ Anode to N+ Cathode Isolation Spacing 198 4.2.5 P+ Anode Diode End Effects 198 4.2.6 Circular and Octagonal ESD Diode Design 200 4.3 ESD Diode Design: Interconnect Wiring 202 4.3.1 Parallel Wiring Design 203 4.3.2 Antiparallel Wiring Design 203 4.3.3 Quantized Tapered Parallel and Antiparallel Wiring 203 4.3.4 Continuous Tapered Antiparallel and Parallel Wiring 203 4.3.5 Perpendicular (and Broadside) Wiring with Center-Fed Design 205 4.3.6 Perpendicular (and Broadside) with Uniform Metal Width 206 4.3.7 Perpendicular (and Broadside) Wiring with T-Shaped Extensions 207 4.3.8 Metal Design for Structures under Bond Pads 208 4.4 ESD Design: Polysilicon-Bound Diode Designs 210 4.4.1 ESD Design Issues with Polysilicon-Bound Diode Structures 212 4.5 N-Well Diode Design 213 4.5.1 N-Well Diode Wiring Design 213 4.5.2 N-Well Contact Density 214 4.5.3 N-Well ESD Design, Guard Rings, and Adjacent Structures 214 4.6 N+/P Substrate Diode Design 216 4.7 ESD Design: Diode String Design 217 4.7.1 ESD Design: Diode String Design—Architecture 223 4.7.2 Diode String Elements in Multiple I/O Environments 223 4.7.3 Integration of Signal Pads 224 4.7.4 ESD Design: Diode String Design—Darlington Amplification 227 4.7.5 ESD Design: Diode String Design—Area Scaling 229 4.8 Triple-Well ESD Diode Design 231 4.9 Summary and Closing Comments 234 Problems 234 References 236 5 ESD Design: Passive Resistors 239 5.1 N-Well Resistors 239 5.1.1 N-Well ESD Design Issues 239 5.1.2 N-Well Resistors ESD Design Issues: Integration with MOSFETs 243 5.1.3 N-Well Resistor Ballasting Design 245 5.2 N-Diffusion Resistor Design 248 5.2.1 N-Diffusion Resistors for ESD Protection 248 5.2.2 N-Diffusion Resistors Ballasting Design 249 5.3 P-Diffusion Resistor Design 252 5.3.1 P-Diffusion Resistors for ESD Protection 253 5.4 Br 254 5.4.1 BR Design 254 5.4.2 BR as an ESD Diode Element 256 5.4.3 BR as an ESD HBM and CDM Element 257 5.4.4 BR Ballasting 260 5.4.5 BR Design Integration and ESD 261 5.4.6 BR: Current Robbing and Balancing ESD and Resistor Parasitics 263 5.4.7 BR-to-BR ESD Failure Mechanisms 266 5.4.8 BR Gate Connection and Failure Mechanisms 267 5.5 Summary and Closing Comments 268 Problems 268 References 270 6 Passives for Digital, Analog, and RF Applications 271 6.1 Analog Design Layout Revisited 271 6.1.1 Analog Design: Local Matching 272 6.1.2 Analog Design: Global Matching 272 6.1.3 Symmetry 273 6.1.4 Layout Design Symmetry 273 6.1.5 Thermal Symmetry 273 6.2 Common Centroid Design 274 6.2.1 Common Centroid Arrays 274 6.2.2 One-Axis Common Centroid Design 275 6.2.3 Two-Axis Common Centroid Design 275 6.3 Interdigitation Design 275 6.4 Common Centroid and Interdigitation Design 276 6.5 Passive Element Design 277 6.6 Resistor Element Design 277 6.6.1 Resistor Element Design: Dogbone Layout 277 6.6.2 Resistor Design: Analog Interdigitated Layout 278 6.6.3 Dummy Resistor Layout 278 6.6.4 Thermoelectric Cancellation Layout 279 6.6.5 Electrostatic Shield 280 6.6.6 Interdigitated Resistors and ESD Parasitics 281 6.7 Capacitor Element Design 283 6.8 Inductor Element Design 283 6.9 Summary and Closing Comments 286 Problems 286 References 286 7 Off-Chip Drivers and ESD 288 7.1 Off-chip Drivers 288 7.1.1 OCD I/O Standards and ESD 289 7.1.2 OCD ESD Design Basics 290 7.1.3 OCD: CMOS Asymmetric Pull-Up/Pull-Down 291 7.1.4 OCD: CMOS Symmetric Pull-Up/Pull-Down 292 7.1.5 OCD: Gunning Transceiver Logic 294 7.1.6 OCD: High-Speed Transceiver Logic 295 7.1.7 OCD: Stub Series-Terminated Logic 296 7.2 OCDs: mvi 297 7.3 OCDs: Self-Bias Well OCD Networks 297 7.3.1 Self-Bias Well OCD Networks 297 7.3.2 ESD Protection Networks for Self-Bias Well OCD Networks 300 7.4 Programmable Impedance OCD Network 302 7.4.1 OCD: PIMP OCD Networks 302 7.4.2 ESD Input Protection Networks for PIMP OCDs 305 7.5 OCDs: Universal OCDs 305 7.6 OCDs: Gate-Array OCD Design 306 7.6.1 Gate-Array OCD ESD Design Practices 306 7.6.2 Gate-Array OCD Design—Usage of Unused Elements 306 7.6.3 Gate-Array OCD Design—Impedance Matching of Unused Elements 307 7.6.4 OCD ESD Design—Power Rails Over Multifinger MOSFETs 308 7.7 OCDs: Gate-Modulated Networks 309 7.7.1 OCD: Gate-Modulated MOSFET ESD Network 309 7.7.2 OCD Simplified Gate-Modulated Network 310 7.8 OCDs ESD Design: Integration of Coupling and Ballasting Techniques 311 7.8.1 Ballasting and Coupling 311 7.8.2 MOSFET Source-Initiated Gate-Bootstrapped Resistor-Ballasted Multifinger MOSFET with Diode 311 7.8.3 MOSFET Source-Initiated Gate-Bootstrapped Resistor-Ballasted Multifinger MOSFET with an MOSFET 312 7.8.4 Gate-Coupled Domino Resistor-Ballasted MOSFET 314 7.9 Substrate-Modulated Resistor-Ballasted MOSFET 315 7.10 Summary and Closing Comments 317 Problems 318 References 319 8 Receiver Circuits 322 8.1 Receivers and ESD 322 8.1.1 Receivers and Receiver Delay Time 323 8.1.2 ESD Loading Effect on Receiver Performance 323 8.2 Receivers and ESD 324 8.2.1 Receivers and HBM 324 8.2.2 Receivers and CDM 325 8.3 Receivers and Receiver Evolution 327 8.3.1 Receiver Circuits with Half-Pass TG 327 8.3.2 Receiver with Full-Pass TG 330 8.3.3 Receiver, Half-Pass TG, and Keeper Network 332 8.3.4 Receiver, Half-Pass TG, and the Modified Keeper Network 335 8.4 Receiver Circuits with Pseudozero V T Half-Pass TG 337 8.5 Receiver with ZVT TG 339 8.6 Receiver Circuits with Bleed Transistors 342 8.7 Receiver Circuits with Test Functions 343 8.8 Receiver with Schmitt Trigger Feedback Network 344 8.9 Bipolar Transistor Receivers 347 8.9.1 Bipolar Single-Ended Receiver Circuits 347 8.10 Differential Receivers 349 8.10.1 Signal Differential Receiver 350 8.10.2 Signal CMOS Differential Receivers 350 8.10.3 Signal Bipolar Differential Receivers 350 8.11 CMOS Differential Receiver with Analog Layout Concepts 355 8.11.1 CMOS Differential Receiver Capacitance Loading 355 8.11.2 CMOS Differential Receiver ESD Mismatch 356 8.11.3 Analog Differential Pair ESD Signal Pin Matching with Common Well Layout 359 8.11.4 Analog Differential Pair Common Centroid Design Layout: Signal Pin-to-Signal Pin and Parasitic ESD Elements 359 8.12 Summary and Closing Comments 363 Problems 364 References 366 9 Silicon on Insulator (SOI) ESD Design 368 9.1 Silicon on Insulator ESD Design Concepts 368 9.2 SOI Design MOSFET with Body Contact: T-Shape Layout Style 372 9.3 SOI Lateral Diode Structure 375 9.3.1 Transistors: Bulk Versus SOI Technology 375 9.3.2 SOI Lateral Diode Design 376 9.3.3 SOI Lateral Diode Perimeter Design 376 9.3.4 SOI Lateral Diode Channel Length Design 377 9.3.5 SOI Lateral P+/N−/N+ Diode Structure 377 9.3.6 SOI Lateral P+/P−/N+ Diode Structure 377 9.3.7 SOI Lateral P+/P−/N−/N+ Diode Structure 378 9.3.8 SOI Lateral Ungated P+/P−/N−/N+ Diode Structure 379 9.3.9 SOI Lateral Diode Structures and SOI MOSFET Halos 379 9.4 SOI BR Elements 380 9.5 Dynamic Threshold SOI MOSFET 381 9.6 SOI Dual-Gate MOSFET 384 9.7 SOI ESD Design: Mixed Voltage T-Shape Layout Style 384 9.8 SOI ESD Design: Mixed Voltage Diode Strings 384 9.9 SOI ESD Design: Double-Diode Network 385 9.10 Bulk to SOI ESD Design Remapping 387 9.11 SOI ESD Design in MVI Environments 391 9.12 Comparison of Bulk to SOI ESD Results 393 9.13 SOI ESD Design with Aluminum Interconnects 394 9.14 SOI ESD Design with Copper Interconnects 395 9.15 SOI ESD Design with Gate Circuitry 397 9.16 SOI FinFET Structure 399 9.17 Summary and Closing Comments 403 Problems 403 References 405 10 ESD Circuits: BiCMOS 408 10.1 Bipolar ESD Input Circuits 408 10.2 Diode-Configured Bipolar ESD Input Circuits 412 10.3 Bipolar ESD Input Circuits: Voltage-Triggered Elements 413 10.3.1 Voltage Triggered Bipolar ESD Input Circuits Classifications 413 10.3.2 Bipolar ESD Input: Resistor Grounded-Base ESD Input 414 10.3.3 Bipolar ESD Input Circuits: Zener Breakdown Voltage Triggered 418 10.3.4 Bipolar ESD: BV CEO Voltage-Triggered ESD Input 423 10.3.5 Bipolar ESD Input Circuits: Ultralow-Voltage Forward-Biased Voltage Trigger 430 10.3.6 ESD Bipolar Input Circuits: Future Networks and Scaling 433 10.3.7 Bipolar ESD Input Device Scaling 436 10.4 BiCMOS Mixed Signal Designs 437 10.5 Summary and Closing Comments 437 Problems 437 References 438 11 ESD Power Clamps 442 11.1 ESD Power Clamp Design Practices 442 11.1.1 Classification of ESD Power Clamps 444 11.1.2 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamp: Key Design Parameters 446 11.2 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamps Trigger Networks 446 11.2.1 Transient Response Frequency Trigger Element and the ESD Frequency Window 446 11.2.2 The ESD Power Clamp Frequency Design Window 447 11.2.3 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamp: Voltage-Triggered ESD Trigger Elements 447 11.3 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamp: The ESD Power Clamp Shunting Element 449 11.3.1 ESD Power Clamp Trigger Condition versus Shunt Failure 450 11.3.2 ESD Clamp Element: Width Scaling 450 11.3.3 ESD Clamp Element: On-Resistance 451 11.3.4 ESD Clamp Element: Safe Operating Area 451 11.4 ESD Power Clamp Issues 452 11.4.1 ESD Power Clamp Issues: Power-Up and Power-Down 452 11.4.2 ESD Power Clamp Issues: False Triggering 452 11.4.3 ESD Power Clamp Issues: Precharging 452 11.4.4 ESD Power Clamp Issues: Postcharging 453 11.5 ESD Power Clamp Design 453 11.5.1 Native Power Supply RC-Triggered MOSFET ESD Power Clamp 453 11.5.2 Nonnative Power Supply RC-Triggered MOSFET ESD Power Clamp 454 11.5.3 ESD Power Clamp Networks with Improved Inverter Stage Feedback 454 11.5.4 ESD Power Clamp Design Synthesis: Forward-Bias-Triggered ESD Power Clamps 456 11.5.5 ESD Power Clamp Design Synthesis: IEC 61000-4-2 Responsive ESD Power Clamps 457 11.5.6 ESD Power Clamp Design Synthesis: Precharging and Postcharging Insensitive ESD Power Clamps 457 11.6 Master/Slave ESD Power Clamp Systems 458 11.7 Series-Stacked RC-Triggered ESD Power Clamps 460 11.8 ESD Power Clamps: Triple-Well Series Diodes as Core Clamps 460 11.9 Summary and Closing Comments 464 Problems 465 References 466 12 Bipolar ESD Power Clamps 468 12.1 Bipolar ESD Power Clamps 468 12.2 Bipolar Voltage-Triggered ESD Power Clamps 468 12.2.1 Bipolar ESD Power Clamp: Zener Breakdown Voltage Triggered 469 12.2.2 Bipolar ESD Power Clamp: BV CEO Voltage-Triggered ESD Power Clamp 470 12.3 ESD Power Clamp Design Synthesis: Bipolar ESD Power Clamps 473 12.4 Mixed Voltage Interface Forward-Bias Voltage and BV CEO Breakdown Synthesized Bipolar ESD Power Clamps 476 12.5 Ultralow-Voltage Forward-Biased Voltage-Trigger BiCMOS ESD Power Clamp 480 12.6 Bipolar ESD Power Clamps with Frequency Trigger Elements: Capacitance Triggered 485 12.7 Summary and Closing Comments 485 Problems 486 References 487 13 Silicon-Controlled Rectifier Power Clamps 489 13.1 ESD Silicon-Controlled Rectifier Circuits 489 13.1.1 Unidirectional SCR 489 13.1.2 Bidirectional SCR ESD Power Clamps 489 13.1.3 Medium-Level SCR ESD Power Clamps 490 13.1.4 Low Voltage Triggered SCR ESD Power Clamps 490 13.2 Lateral Diffused MOS Circuits 492 13.2.1 LOCOS-Defined LDMOS 492 13.2.2 Shallow Trench Isolation-Defined LDMOS 493 13.2.3 STI-Defined Isolated LDMOS 494 13.3 DeMOS Circuits 496 13.3.1 DeNMOS 497 13.3.2 DeNMOS-SCR Transistor 497 13.4 Ultrahigh-Voltage LDMOS (UHV-LDMOS) Circuits 497 13.4.1 Uhv-ldmos 497 13.4.2 Uhv-ldmos-scr 497 13.5 Summary and Closing Comments 501 Problems 501 References 501 Glossary of Terms 504 Standards 509 Index 512

Read more less

Book SynopsisMODERN FERRITES, Volume 1 A robust exploration of the basic principles of ferrimagnetics and their applications In Modern Ferrites Volume 1: Basic Principles, Processing and Properties, renowned researcher and educator Vincent G. Harris delivers a comprehensive overview of the basic principles and ferrimagnetic phenomena of modern ferrite materials. Volume 1 explores the fundamental properties of ferrite systems, including their structure, chemistry, and magnetism; the latest in processing methodologies; and the unique properties that result. The authors explore the processing, structure, and property relationships in ferrites as nanoparticles, thin and thick films, compacts, and crystals and how these relationships are key to realizing practical device applications laying the foundation for next generation technologies. This volume also includes: Comprehensive investigation of the historical and scientific significance of ferrites upon ancientTable of ContentsContents Preface ix List of Contributors xi 1 Historical Evolution of Systeme International d’Unites and Its Application to Electromagnetism and Magnetic Materials 1 Vincent G. Harris 2 Societal Benefits of Ferrites: Historical, Scientific, and Commercial Breakthroughs 9 Vincent G. Harris 3 Structure and Chemistry of Ferrites and Related Oxide Systems 21 Michael E. McHenry and David E. Laughlin 4 Ferrite Magnetism: Fundamentals of Néel’s Molecular Field Theory 47 Michael E. McHenry and David E. Laughlin 5 Molecular Field and Exchange-Interaction Theories Applied to Ferrimagnetic Systems 75 Ke Sun, Chuanjian Wu, Zhong Yu, Rongdi Guo, Xiaona Jiang, and Zhongwen Lan 6 Ferrite Magnetism: A First-Principles Approach 93 Xu Zuo 7 Gyromagnetic Properties of Ferrites 129 Marina Koledintseva and Takanori Tsutaoka 8 Nonlinear Excitations in Ferrites 221 Pavel Kabos, John D. Adam, and Boris A. Kalinikos 9 Chemical Processing and Magnetic Properties of Ferrite Nanoparticles 269 Sarah E. Smith, Melissa Tsui, Brent Williams, and Everett E. Carpenter 10 Ferrite Films: Deposition Methods and Properties in View of Applications 295 Pieter J. van der Zaag, O. Fitchorova, A. Sokolov, and Vincent G. Harris 11 Properties and Applications of Single-Crystal Ferrite Films Grown by Liquid-Phase Epitaxy 413 Huaiwu Zhang, Qinghui Yang, Qiye Wen, Yingli Liu, and Vincent G. Harris 12 Ferrite-Based Electronic Bandgap Heterostructures and Metamaterials 457 Martha Pardavi-Horvath Index 473

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn original advanced level reference appealing to both the microwave and antenna communities An overview of the research activity devoted to the synthesis of transmission lines by means of electrically small planar elements, highlighting the main microwave applications and the potential for circuit miniaturization Showcases the research of top experts in the field Presents innovative topics on synthesized transmission lines, which represent fundamental elements in microwave and mm-wave integrated circuits, including on-chip integration Covers topics that are related to the microwave community (transmission lines), and topics that are related to the antenna community (phased arrays), broadening the readership appeal Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction to Synthesized Transmission Lines 1C. W. Wang and T. G. Ma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Propagation Characteristics of a TEM Transmission Line 2 1.2.1 Wave Equations 2 1.2.2 Keys to Miniaturization 5 1.3 Analysis of Synthesized Transmission Lines 7 1.3.1 Bloch Theorem and Characterization of a Periodic Synthesized Transmission Line 7 1.3.2 Characterization of a Non‐Periodic Synthesized Transmission Line 9 1.3.3 Extraction of Line Parameters from S‐Parameters 10 1.4 Lumped and Quasi‐Lumped Approaches 11 1.4.1 Lumped Networks 11 1.4.2 Shunt‐Stub Loaded Lines 14 1.5 One‐Dimensional Periodic Structures 16 1.5.1 Complementary‐Conducting‐Strip Lines 19 1.6 Photonic Bandgap Structures 20 1.7 Left‐Handed Structures 21 References 24 2 Non‐Periodic Synthesized Transmission Lines for Circuit Miniaturization 26C. W. Wang and T. G. Ma 2.1 Introduction 26 2.2 Non‐Periodic Synthesized Microstrip Lines and Their Applications 27 2.2.1 Design Details and Propagation Characteristics 27 2.2.2 90° and 180° Hybrid Couplers 30 2.2.3 Application to Butler Matrix as Array Feeding Network 32 2.3 Non‐Periodic Synthesized Coplanar Waveguides and Their Applications 34 2.3.1 Synthesis and Design 34 2.3.2 180° Hybrid Using Synthesized CPWs 37 2.3.3 Dual‐Mode Ring Bandpass Filters 38 2.4 Non‐Periodic Quasi‐Lumped Synthesized Coupled Lines 42 2.4.1 Basics of Coupled Transmission Lines 42 2.4.2 Miniaturization of Coupled Lines and the Directional Couplers 44 2.4.3 Marchand Baluns Using Synthesized Coupled Lines 49 2.4.4 Lumped Directional Coupler and the Phase Shifter 53 2.5 Non‐Periodic Synthesized Lines Using Vertical Inductors 55 References 60 3 Dual/Tri‐Operational Mode Synthesized Transmission Lines: Design and Analysis 62C. H. Lai and T. G. Ma 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 Equivalent Circuit Models and Analysis 63 3.2.1 Ladder‐Type Approximation in the Passband 63 3.2.2 Half‐Circuit Model at Resonance 64 3.3 Dual‐Operational Mode Synthesized Transmission Lines 65 3.3.1 Design Concept 65 3.3.2 Dual‐Mode Synthesized Line Using a Series Resonator 66 3.3.3 Dual‐Mode Synthesized Line Using Open-Circuited Stubs 70 3.3.4 Dual‐Mode Synthesized Line Using Parallel Resonators 72 3.4 Tri‐Operational Mode Synthesized Lines Using Series Resonators 74 3.4.1 Design Concept 74 3.4.2 Tri‐Mode Synthesized Line as Category‐1 Design 75 3.4.3 Tri‐Mode Synthesized Line as Category‐2 Design 79 3.4.4 Tri‐Mode Synthesized Line as Category‐3 Design 83 3.5 Multi‐Operational Mode Synthesized Lines as Diplexer and Triplexer 87 3.5.1 Diplexer 87 3.5.2 Triplexer 89 References 94 4 Applications to Heterogeneous Integrated Phased Arrays 95C. H. Lai and T. G. Ma 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Dual‐Mode Retrodirective Array 96 4.2.1 Design Goal 96 4.2.2 System Architecture 97 4.2.3 Circuit Realization 98 4.2.4 Bistatic Radiation Patterns 102 4.2.5 Alternative Architecture 103 4.3 Dual‐Mode Integrated Beam‐Switching/Retrodirective Array 106 4.3.1 Design Goal 106 4.3.2 System Architecture 106 4.3.3 Circuit Realization 109 4.3.4 Radiation Characteristics 111 4.3.5 Complementary Design 111 4.4 Tri‐Mode Heterogeneous Integrated Phased Array 115 4.4.1 Design Goal 115 4.4.2 System Architecture 116 4.4.3 Operation and System Implementation 117 4.4.4 Circuit Responses and Radiation Patterns 119 4.4.4.1 Beam‐Switching Mode 120 4.4.4.2 Van Atta Mode 122 4.4.4.3 PCA Mode 122 4.5 Simplified Dual‐Mode Integrated Array Using Two Elements 122 References 124 5 On‐Chip Realization of Synthesized Transmission Lines Using IPD Processes 126Y. C. Tseng and T. G. Ma 5.1 Introduction 126 5.2 Integrated Passive Device (IPD) Process 127 5.3 Tight Couplers Using Synthesized CPWs 128 5.3.1 Quadrature Hybrid 128 5.3.2 Wideband Rat‐Race Coupler 129 5.3.3 Dual‐Band Rat‐Race Coupler 132 5.3.4 Coupled‐Line Coupler 137 5.3.5 Butler Matrix 139 5.4 Bandpass/Bandstop Filters Using Synthesized CPWs 142 5.4.1 Bandpass Filter Using Synthesized Stepped‐Impedance Resonators 143 5.4.2 Transformer‐Coupled Bandpass Filter 146 5.4.3 Bridged T‐Coils as Common‐Mode Filter 147 5.5 Chip Designs Using Multi‐Mode Synthesized CPWs 151 5.5.1 Diplexer 151 5.5.2 Dual‐Mode Rat‐Race Coupler 154 5.5.3 Triplexer 157 5.5.4 On‐Chip Liquid Detector 161 References 166 6 Periodic Synthesized Transmission Lines with Two‐Dimensional Routing 168T. G. Ma 6.1 Introduction 168 6.2 Design of the Unit Cells 169 6.2.1 Formulation 169 6.2.2 Quarter‐Wavelength Lines 172 6.3 Power Divider and Couplers 174 6.4 Broadside Directional Coupler 178 6.4.1 Design Principle 178 6.4.2 Circuit Realization 180 6.5 Common‐Mode Rejection Filter 184 6.5.1 Design Principle 184 6.5.2 Circuit Realization 187 6.6 On‐Chip Implementation 189 6.6.1 Unit Cells and Quarter‐Wavelength Lines 189 6.6.2 Circuit Implementations and Compensation 192 References 194 Index 196

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book applying HBFEM to practical electronic nonlinear field and circuit problems Examines and solves wide aspects of practical electrical and electronic nonlinear field and circuit problems presented by HBFEM Combines the latest research work with essential background knowledge, providing an all-encompassing reference for researchers, power engineers and students of applied electromagnetics analysis There are very few books dealing with the solution of nonlinear electric- power-related problems The contents are based on the authors' many years' research and industry experience; they approach the subject in a well-designed and logical way It is expected that HBFEM will become a more useful and practical technique over the next 5 years due to the HVDC power system, renewable energy system and Smart Grid, HF magnetic used in DC/DC converter, and Multi-pulse transformer for HVDC power supply HBFEM can provide effective anTable of ContentsPreface xii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction to Harmonic Balance Finite Element Method (HBFEM) 1 1.1 Harmonic Problems in Power Systems 1 1.1.1 Harmonic Phenomena in Power Systems 2 1.1.2 Sources and Problems of Harmonics in Power Systems 3 1.1.3 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) 4 1.2 Definitions of Computational Electromagnetics and IEEE Standards 1597.1 and 1597.2 7 1.2.1 “The Building Block” of the Computational Electromagnetics Model 7 1.2.2 The Geometry of the Model and the Problem Space 8 1.2.3 Numerical Computation Methods 8 1.2.4 High-Performance Computation and Visualization (HPCV) in CEM 9 1.2.5 IEEE Standards 1597.1 and 1597.2 for Validation of CEM Computer Modeling and Simulations 9 1.3 HBFEM Used in Nonlinear EM Field Problems and Power Systems 12 1.3.1 HBFEM for a Nonlinear Magnetic Field With Current Driven 13 1.3.2 HBFEM for Magnetic Field and Electric Circuit Coupled Problems 14 1.3.3 HBFEM for a Nonlinear Magnetic Field with Voltage Driven 14 1.3.4 HBFEM for a Three-Phase Magnetic Tripler Transformer 14 1.3.5 HBFEM for a Three-Phase High-Speed Motor 15 1.3.6 HBFEM for a DC-Biased 3D Asymmetrical Magnetic Structure Simulation 15 1.3.7 HBFEM for a DC-Biased Problem in HV Power Transformers 16 References 17 2 Nonlinear Electromagnetic Field and Its Harmonic Problems 19 2.1 Harmonic Problems in Power Systems and Power Supply Transformers 19 2.1.1 Nonlinear Electromagnetic Field 19 2.1.2 Harmonics Problems Generated from Nonlinear Load and Power Electronics Devices 21 2.1.3 Harmonics in the Time Domain and Frequency Domain 25 2.1.4 Examples of Harmonic Producing Loads 28 2.1.5 Harmonics in DC/DC Converter of Isolation Transformer 28 2.1.6 Magnetic Tripler 33 2.1.7 Harmonics in Multi-Pulse Rectifier Transformer 35 2.2 DC-Biased Transformer in High-Voltage DC Power Transmission System 38 2.2.1 Investigation and Suppression of DC Bias Phenomenon 38 2.2.2 Characteristics of DC Bias Phenomenon and Problems to be Solved 40 2.3 Geomagnetic Disturbance and Geomagnetic Induced Currents (GIC) 41 2.3.1 Geomagnetically Induced Currents in Power Systems 42 2.3.2 GIC-Induced Harmonic Currents in the Transformer 46 2.4 Harmonic Problems in Renewable Energy and Microgrid Systems 47 2.4.1 Power Electronic Devices – Harmonic Current and Voltage Sources 48 2.4.2 Harmonic Distortion in Renewable Energy Systems 50 2.4.3 Harmonics in the Microgrid and EV Charging System 52 2.4.4 IEEE Standard 519-2014 56 References 58 3 Harmonic Balance Methods Used in Computational Electromagnetics 60 3.1 Harmonic Balance Methods Used in Nonlinear Circuit Problems 60 3.1.1 The Basic Concept of Harmonic Balance in a Nonlinear Circuit 60 3.1.2 The Theory of Harmonic Balance Used in a Nonlinear Circuit 63 3.2 CEM for Harmonic Problem Solving in Frequency, Time and Harmonic Domains 65 3.2.1 Computational Electromagnetics (CEM) Techniques and Validation 65 3.2.2 Time Periodic Electromagnetic Problems Using the Finite Element Method (FEM) 66 3.2.3 Comparison of Time-Periodic Steady-State Nonlinear EM Field Analysis Method 71 3.3 The Basic Concept of Harmonic Balance in EM Fields 73 3.3.1 Definition of Harmonic Balance 73 3.3.2 Harmonic Balance in EM Fields 73 3.3.3 Nonlinear Medium Description 75 3.3.4 Boundary Conditions 76 3.3.5 The Theory of HB-FEM in Nonlinear Magnetic Fields 76 3.3.6 The Generalized HBFEM 83 3.4 HBFEM for Electromagnetic Field and Electric Circuit Coupled Problems 85 3.4.1 HBFEM in Voltage Source-Driven Magnetic Field 85 3.4.2 Generalized Voltage Source-Driven Magnetic Field 86 3.5 HBFEM for a DC-Biased Problem in High-Voltage Power Transformers 91 3.5.1 DC-Biased Problem in HVDC Transformers 91 3.5.2 HBFEM Model of HVDC Transformer 91 References 95 4 HBFEM for Nonlinear Magnetic Field Problems 96 4.1 HBFEM for a Nonlinear Magnetic Field with Current-Driven Source 96 4.1.1 Numerical Model of Current Source to Magnetic Field 97 4.1.2 Example of Current-Source Excitation to Nonlinear Magnetic Field 99 4.2 Harmonic Analysis of Switching Mode Transformer Using Voltage-Driven Source 99 4.2.1 Numerical Model of Voltage Source to Magnetic System 99 4.2.2 Example of Voltage-Source Excitation to Nonlinear Magnetic Field 106 4.3 Three-Phase Magnetic Frequency Tripler Analysis 107 4.3.1 Magnetic Frequency Tripler 107 4.3.2 Nonlinear Magnetic Material and its Saturation Characteristics 107 4.3.3 Voltage Source-Driven Connected to the Magnetic Field 109 4.4 Design of High-Speed and Hybrid Induction Machine using HBFEM 115 4.4.1 Construction of High-Speed and Hybrid Induction Machine 115 4.4.2 Numerical Model of High-Speed and Hybrid Induction Machine using HBFEM, Taking Account of Motion Effect 117 4.4.3 Numerical Analysis of High Speed and Hybrid Induction Machine using HBFEM 126 4.5 Three-Dimensional Axi-Symmetrical Transformer with DC-Biased Excitation 131 4.5.1 Numerical Simulation of 3-D Axi-Symmetrical Structure 133 4.5.2 Numerical Analysis of the Three-Dimensional Axi-Symmetrical Model 136 4.5.3 Eddy Current Calculation of DC-Biased Switch Mode Transformer 138 References 139 5 Advanced Numerical Approach using HBFEM 141 5.1 HBFEM for DC-Biased Problems in HVDC Power Transformers 141 5.1.1 DC Bias Phenomena in HVDC 141 5.1.2 HBFEM for DC-Biased Magnetic Field 142 5.1.3 High-Voltage DC (HVDC) Transformer 160 5.2 Decomposed Algorithm of HBFEM 165 5.2.1 Introduction 165 5.2.2 Decomposed Harmonic Balanced System Equation 166 5.2.3 Magnetic Field Coupled with Electric Circuits 169 5.2.4 Computational Procedure Based on the Block Gauss-Seidel Algorithm 170 5.2.5 DC-Biasing Test on the LCM and Computational Results 172 5.2.6 Analysis of the Flux Density and Flux Distribution Under DC Bias Conditions 176 5.3 HBFEM with Fixed-Point Technique 178 5.3.1 Introduction 178 5.3.2 DC-Biasing Magnetization Curve 180 5.3.3 Fixed-Point Harmonic-Balanced Theory 182 5.3.4 Electromagnetic Coupling 184 5.3.5 Validation and Discussion 184 5.4 Hysteresis Model Based on Neural Network and Consuming Function 188 5.4.1 Introduction 188 5.4.2 Hysteresis Model Based on Consuming Function 189 5.4.3 Hysteresis Loops and Simulation 191 5.4.4 Hysteresis Model Based on a Neural Network 194 5.4.5 Simulation and Validation 196 5.5 Analysis of Hysteretic Characteristics Under Sinusoidal and DC-Biased Excitation 199 5.5.1 Globally Convergent Fixed-Point Harmonic-Balanced Method 199 5.5.2 Hysteretic Characteristic Analysis of the Laminated Core 202 5.5.3 Computation of the Nonlinear Magnetic Field Based on the Combination of the Two Hysteresis Models 206 5.6 Parallel Computing of HBFEM in Multi-Frequency Domain 210 5.6.1 HBFEM in Multi-Frequency Domain 210 5.6.2 Parallel Computing of HBFEM 212 5.6.3 Domain Decomposition 212 5.6.4 Reordering and Multi-Coloring 213 5.6.5 Loads Division in Frequency Domain 214 5.6.6 Two Layers Hybrid Computing 217 References 217 6 HBFEM and Its Future Applications 222 6.1 HBFEM Model of Three-Phase Power Transformer 222 6.1.1 Three-Phase Transformer 222 6.1.2 Nonlinear Magnetic Material and its Saturation Characteristics 223 6.1.3 Voltage Source-Driven Model Connected to the Magnetic Field 224 6.1.4 HBFEM Matrix Equations, Taking Account of Extended Circuits 225 6.2 Magnetic Model of a Single-Phase Transformer and a Magnetically Controlled Shunt Reactor 231 6.2.1 Electromagnetic Coupling Model of a Single-Phase Transformer 231 6.2.2 Solutions of the Nonlinear Magnetic Circuit Model by the Harmonic Balance Method 233 6.2.3 Magnetically Controlled Shunt Reactor 235 6.2.4 Experiment and Computation 237 6.3 Computation Taking Account of Hysteresis Effects Based on Fixed-Point Reluctance 240 6.3.1 Fixed-Point Reluctance 240 6.3.2 Computational Procedure in the Frequency Domain 242 6.3.3 Computational Results and Analysis 243 6.4 HBFEM Modeling of the DC-Biased Transformer in GIC Event 245 6.4.1 GIC Effects on the Transformer 245 6.4.2 GIC Modeling and Harmonic Analysis 248 6.4.3 GIC Modeling Using HBFEM Model 249 6.5 HBFEM Used in Renewable Energy Systems and Microgrids 253 6.5.1 Harmonics in Renewable Energy Systems and Microgrids 253 6.5.2 Harmonic Analysis of the Transformer in Renewable Energy Systems and Microgrids 254 6.5.3 Harmonic Analysis of the Transformer Using a Voltage Driven Source 256 6.5.4 Harmonic Analysis of the Transformer Using a Current-Driven Source 258 References 261 Appendix 263 Appendix I & II 263 Matlab Program and the Laminated Core Model for Computation 263 Appendix III 265 FORTRAN-Based 3D Axi-Symmetrical Transformer with DC-Biased Excitation 265 Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisSurveys key advances in commercial satellite communications and what might be the implications and/or opportunities for end-users and service providers in utilizing the latest fast-evolving innovations in this field This book explores the evolving technical options and opportunities of satellite networks. Designed to be a self-contained reference, the book includes background technical material in an introductory chapter that will serve as a primer to satellite communications. The textdiscusses advances in modulation techniques, such as DBV-S2 extensions (DVS-S2X); spotbeam-based geosynchronous and medium earth orbit High Throughput Satellite (HTS) technologies and Internet applications; enhanced mobility services with aeronautical and maritime applications; Machine to Machine (M2M) satellite applications; emerging ultra HD technologies; and electric propulsion.The author surveys the latest innovations and service strategies and the resulting implications, which Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Author xv 1 Overview 1 1.1 Background 2 1.2 Industry Issues and Opportunities: Evolving Trends 6 1.2.1 Issues and Opportunities 6 1.2.2 Evolving Trends 9 1.3 Basic Satellite Primer 15 1.3.1 Satellite Orbits 15 1.3.2 Satellite Transmission Bands 22 1.3.3 Satellite Signal Regeneration 32 1.3.4 Satellite Communication Transmission Chain 34 1.4 Satellite Applications 38 1.5 Satellite Market View 42 1.6 Where is Fiber Optic Technology Going? 45 1.7 Innovation Needed 47 References 48 2 DVB-S2 Modulation Extensions and Other Advances 51 2.1 Part 1: A Review of Modulation and FEC Principles 52 2.1.1 Eb/No Concepts 52 2.1.2 FEC Basics 56 2.1.3 Filters and Roll-Off Factors 63 2.2 Part 2: DVB-S2 and DVB-S2 Extensions 71 2.2.1 DVB-S2 Modulation 71 2.2.2 DVB-S2 Extensions 77 2.3 Part 3: Other Ground-Side Advances 84 2.3.1 Carrier ID 84 2.3.2 Intelligent Inverse Multiplexing 87 2.3.3 Implications of H.265 Coding 91 References 93 3 High Throughput Satellites (HTS) and KA/KU Spot Beam Technologies 95 3.1 Overview 98 3.2 Multiple Access Schemes and Frequency Reuse 101 3.3 Spot Beam Approach 105 3.4 Frequency Colors 109 3.5 Frequency Bands of Operation 114 3.6 Losses and Rain Considerations 122 3.7 HTS Applications 124 3.8 Comparison Between Approaches 128 3.9 A View of KU-Based HTS Systems 131 3.10 HTS Design Considerations 134 3.11 Spot Beam Antenna Design Basics (Satellite Antenna) 135 3.11.1 Single Feed per Beam Antennas 138 3.11.2 Multiple Feeds per Beam Antennas 140 3.12 Examples of HTS 142 3.12.1 ViaSat-1 and -2 143 3.12.2 EchoStar 145 3.12.3 Eutelsat KA-SAT 147 3.12.4 Intelsat EPIC 149 3.12.5 Global Xpress 151 3.12.6 Other Traditional HTS 151 3.12.7 O3b 153 3.12.8 Wideband Global Satcom (WGS) 156 References 157 4 Aeronautical Mobility Services 161 4.1 Overview of the Mobility Environment 162 4.2 Aeronautical Systems 166 4.2.1 Market Opportunities 166 4.2.2 Technology Approaches to Aeronautical Connectivity 168 4.2.3 Aeronautical Antenna Technology and Regulatory Matters 175 4.2.4 Terminal Technology 178 4.2.5 A Specific Example of Antenna Engineering (ViaSat) 178 4.2.6 Beamforming and Ground-Based Beam Forming (GBBF) Systems 188 4.3 Technology Players and Approaches 192 4.3.1 Satellite Infrastructure Providers 192 4.3.2 Vertical Service Providers to Airlines 198 References 205 5 Maritime and Other Mobility Services 207 5.1 Approaches to Maritime Communication 207 5.2 Key Players 212 5.2.1 Inmarsat 212 5.2.2 ViaSat/KVH 212 5.2.3 Intelsat 213 5.2.4 O3b 213 5.3 Comms-On-The-Move Applications 216 5.4 HTS/Ka-Band Transportable Systems 217 References 219 6 M2M Developments and Satellite Applications 221 6.1 A General Overview of the Internet of Things and M2M 222 6.2 M2M Frameworks 233 6.3 M2M Applications Examples and Satellite Support 241 6.3.1 Examples of General Applications 242 6.3.2 Satellite Roles Context and Applications 254 6.3.3 Antennas for Satellite M2M Applications 255 6.3.4 M2M Market Opportunities for Satellite Operators 256 6.3.5 Key Satellite Industry Players and Approaches 263 6.4 Competitive Wireless Technologies 282 6.4.1 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) 291 6.4.2 Long-Term Evolution (LTE) 291 References 294 7 Ultra HD Video/TV and Satellite Implications 297 7.1 H.265 in the Ultra HD Context 298 7.2 Bandwidth/Transmission Requirements 313 7.3 Terrestrial Distribution 315 7.4 Satellite Distribution 316 7.5 Hybrid Distribution 317 7.6 Deployment Challenges Costs Acceptance 319 References 319 8 Satellite Technology Advances: Electric Propulsion and Launch Platforms 321 8.1 Basic Technology and Approach for Electric Propulsion 322 8.2 EP Engines 328 8.2.1 Ion Engines 330 8.2.2 Hall Effect Thrusters 330 8.2.3 MagnetoPlasma Dynamic Thruster 333 8.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of all-EP 335 8.4 Basics About Station-Keeping 337 8.5 Industry Approaches 340 8.6 New Approaches and Players for Launch Platforms 342 8.6.1 Space Exploration Technologies Corporation (SpaceX) 342 8.6.2 Sea Launch 344 8.6.3 Traditional Launchers 344 References 345 Appendix 8A Transponder Costs 347 8A.1 Typical SG&A and EBITDA for the General Commercial World and Satellite Firms 347 8A.2 Transponder Costs 354 References 356 Appendix A Partial Listing of System-Level US Patents for Spot-Beam/Multi-Beam Satellites 357 Appendix B Glossary of Key Satellite Concepts and Terms 367 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines current and prospective challenges surrounding global challenges of education, energy, healthcare, security, and resilience This book discusses issues in large-scale systems in the United States and around the world. The authors examine the challenges of education, energy, healthcare, national security, and urban resilience. The book covers challenges in education including America''s use of educational funds, standardized testing, and the use of classroom technology. On the topic of energy, this book examines debates on climate, the current and future developments of the nuclear power industry, the benefits and cost decline of natural gases, and the promise of renewable energy. The authors also discuss national security, focusing on the issues of nuclear weapons, terrorism and cyber security. Urban resilience is addressed in the context of natural threats such as hurricanes and floods. Studies the usage of a globalized benchmark for both studentTable of ContentsContributors xiii Introduction and Overview 1Elisabeth Paté-Cornell, William B. Rouse, and Charles M. Vest Can America Still Compete? 17Norman R. Augustine Section I Education 21 1 Introduction 23 Overview of Contributions 28 References 30 2 K-12 Education Reform in the United States 33Craig R. Barrett Great Teachers 35 High Expectations 36 Tension in the System 36 Intelligent use of Technology in the Classroom 37 Make Education Relevant for the Student 38 3 Secure America’s Economic Future by Investing in Young Children 41Deborah J. Stipek Reference 43 Recommended Readings 43 4 The Future of Teaching in the United States 45Linda Darling-Hammond References 48 5 The Conundrum of Controlling College Costs 49Lawrence S. Bacow References 52 6 Military Education 53William J. Perry Section II Energy 59 7 Introduction 61 Energy Demand 62 The Electric Grid 64 Nuclear Power 65 Renewable Energy 66 Role of Consumers 67 Overview of Contributions 69 References 71 8 The Future of the US Electric Grid 73Richard Schmalensee System Organization 73 Bulk Power 74 Distribution 76 Cybersecurity 78 Concluding Observations 78 9 The Revolution in Natural Gas 81John Deutch 10 The Future of Nuclear Power in the United States 85Richard A. Meserve 11 Renewable Energy: Balancing Risk and Reward 89Richard H. Truly and Michal C. Moore Section III Healthcare 93 12 Introduction 95 Driving Forces 96 Complexity of Decision Making 98 Value and Healthcare Delivery 98 Overview of Contributions 100 References 102 13 How to Move Toward Value-Based Healthcare? 105Denis A. Cortese and Robert K. Smoldt Recommended Readings 107 14 Delivering on the Promise to Reduce the Cost of Healthcare with Electronic Health Records 109William W. Stead Recommended Readings 112 15 Big Data in Health and Healthcare: Hopes and Fears for the Future 113Elizabeth A. McGlynn 16 Medical Education: One Size Does not Fit All 117Lloyd B. Minor and Michael M.E. Johns Section IV Security 121 17 Introduction 123 Emergence of Non-State Powers and Terrorist Groups 123 Resizing the US Nuclear Arsenal 124 Cybersecurity 125 Intelligence 126 Biological Weapons 126 US Defense Budget 127 Overview of Contributions 128 References 132 18 Vigilance in an Evolving Terrorism Landscape 133Michael E. Leiter 19 The Market’s Role in Improving Cybersecurity 139Herbert Lin References 144 20 On Nuclear Weapons 145George P. Shultz 21 The Nuclear Security Challenge: It is International 147Siegfried S. Hecker 22 Nuclear Weapon Reductions Must be Part of Strategic Analysis 151Henry A. Kissinger and Brent Scowcroft 23 Maintaining us Leadership in Science Technology and Innovation for National Security 155Jacques S. Gansler Section V Resilience 159 24 Introduction 161 Framework for Urban Resilience 162 Potential Approaches 163 Overview of Contributions 164 References 167 25 Urban Resilience: How Cities need to Adapt to Unanticipated and Sudden Change 169Michael Batty References 171 26 Buying Down Risks and Investing in Resilience 173Richard Reed References 177 27 Resilience from the Perspective of a Chief Urban Designer 179Alexandros Washburn 28 Engineering for Resilience: Ten Commandments of the Dutch Approach 183Theo Toonen System of Systems 186 Public Expertise 187 Crowded House 188 Co-Governance 188 Clear Direction 189 Executive Leadership 190 International Bat Strategy 191 Implementation Democracy 191 Shared Service 193 Checks and Balances 193 References 194 Conclusions 195 Index 197

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers the latest practices, challenges and theoretical advancements in the domain of balancing economic efficiency and operation risk mitigation This book examines both system operation and market operation perspectives, focusing on the interaction between the two. It incorporates up-to-date field experiences, presents challenges, and summarizes the latest theoretic advancements to address those challenges. The book is divided into four parts. The first part deals with the fundamentals of integrated system and market operations, including market power mitigation, market efficiency evaluation, and the implications of operation practices in energy markets. The second part discusses developing technologies to strengthen the use of the grid in energy markets. System volatility and economic impact introduced by the intermittency of wind and solar generation are also addressed. The third part focuses on stochastic applications, exploring new approaches of handling uncertainTable of ContentsFOREWORD ix PREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENT xiii CONTRIBUTORS xv PART I INTEGRATED SYSTEM AND MARKET OPERATION CHAPTER 1 BALANCE ECONOMIC EFFICIENCY AND OPERATION RISK MITIGATION 3Hong Chen and Jianwei Liu 1.1 Power System Operation Risk Mitigation: The Physics 4 1.2 Integrated System and Market Operation: The Basics 11 1.3 Economic Efficiency Evaluation and Improvement: The Economics 20 1.4 Final Remarks 35 Appendix 1.A Nomenclature 36 Appendix 1.B Electricity Market Model 37 References 39 Disclaimer 41 CHAPTER 2 MITIGATE MARKET POWER TO IMPROVE MARKET EFFICIENCY 4Ross Baldick 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Price Formation in Electricity Markets 50 2.3 Price and Offer Caps 52 2.4 Ability and Incentive to Exercise Market Power 53 2.5 Market Power Mitigation Approaches 57 2.6 Conclusion 65 Acknowledgments 65 References 65 PART II UNDER SMART GRID ERA CHAPTER 3 MASS MARKET DEMAND RESPONSE MANAGEMENT FOR THE SMART GRID 69Alex D. Papalexopoulos 3.1 Overview 69 3.2 Introduction 72 3.3 Distributed Computing-Based Demand Response Management Approach 74 3.4 The ColorPower Architecture and Control Algorithms 75 3.5 Integration with the Wholesale Energy Market 80 3.6 Equalizing Market Power Between Supply and Demand 83 3.7 Generalization Beyond Demand Response 84 3.8 A Numerical Example 87 3.9 Concluding Remarks 88 Appendix 3.A Nomenclature 89 References 89 CHAPTER 4 IMPROVE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WITH LARGE-SCALE VARIABLE GENERATION ADDITION 91Yuri V. Makarov, Pavel V. Etingov, and Pengwei Du 4.1 Review of Regulation and Ancillary Services 92 4.2 Day-Ahead Regulation Forecast at CAISO 93 4.3 Ramping and Uncertainties Evaluation at CAISO 99 4.4 Quantifying the Regulation Service Requirements at ERCOT 103 4.5 Conclusions 111 Appendix 4.A Nomenclature 112 References 113 PART III STOCHASTIC APPLICATIONS CHAPTER 5 SECURITY-CONSTRAINED UNIT COMMITMENT WITH UNCERTAINTIES 117Lei Wu and Mohammad Shahidehpour 5.1 Introduction 118 5.2 SCUC 119 5.3 Uncertainties in Emerging Power Systems 125 5.4 Managing the Resource Uncertainty in SCUC 134 5.5 Illustrative Results 155 5.6 Conclusions 163 Appendix 5.A Nomenclature 164 Acknowledgments 166 References 166 CHAPTER 6 DAY-AHEAD SCHEDULING: RESERVE DETERMINATION AND VALUATION 16Ruiwei Jiang, Antonio J. Conejo, and Jianhui Wang 6.1 The Need of Reserves for Power System Operation 169 6.2 Reserve Determination via Stochastic Programming 170 6.3 Reserve Determination via Adaptive Robust Optimization 179 6.4 Stochastic Programming vs. Adaptive Robust Optimization 182 6.5 Reserve Valuation 185 6.6 Summary, Concluding Remarks, and Research Needs 191 Appendix 6.A Nomenclature 192 References 193 PART IV HARNESS TRANSMISSION FLEXIBILITY CHAPTER 7 IMPROVED MARKET EFFICIENCY VIA TRANSMISSION SWITCHING AND OUTAGE EVALUATION IN SYSTEM OPERATIONS 197Kwok W. Cheung and Jun Wu 7.1 Background 197 7.2 Basic Dispatch Model for Market Clearing 198 7.3 Economic Evaluation of Transmission Outage 201 7.4 Optimal Transmission Switching 203 7.5 Selection of Candidate Transmission Lines for Switching and Implementation of OTS 206 7.6 Test Cases 210 7.7 Final Remarks 216 Appendix 7.A Nomenclature 216 References 217 CHAPTER 8 TOWARD VALUING FLEXIBILITY IN TRANSMISSION PLANNING 219Chin Yen Tee and Marija D. Ilíc 8.1 Introduction 219 8.2 Scale Economies of Transmission Technologies 221 8.3 Disconnect of Current Power System Operational, Planning, and Market Mechanisms 225 8.4 Impact of Operational and Market Practices on Investment Planning 225 8.5 Information and Risk Sharing in the Face of Uncertainties 230 8.6 Challenges in Designing Financial Rights for Flexibility 234 8.7 Conclusions 235 Appendix 8.A Nomenclature 236 Appendix 8.B Mathematical Models Used for Case Studies 238 Appendix 8.C Investment Cost 247 References 248 INDEX 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplains and resolves the electromagnetic compatibility challenges faced by engineers in transportation and communications This book is a mathematically-rich extension of courses required to maintain the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and the European Union certifications. The text provides an in-depth study of the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) issues related to specific topics in transportation and communications, including Light Rail Transit, shadow effects, and radio dead spots, through the analysis of real-world case studies in the United States and Europe. The author provides Cartesian, cylindrical, and spherical solutions that can be applied to Maxwell''s and Wave Equations. The book covers topics such as SCADA Systems, shielding, and complexities of radio frequencies and their effect on communication houses. The author also provides information for alternative industries to apply the solutions from the caTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Author xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 Definitions of Commonly Used Terms, 2 1.3 Book Sections and Content Overview, 8 1.4 Regulations, 10 1.5 Background, 16 1.6 EMC Testing Methods for FCC Part 15 Radiation Measurements, 17 1.7 Canadian Regulations, 24 1.8 European Union Regulations, 24 1.9 Review Problems, 57 1.10 Answers to Review Problems, 57 2 Fundamentals of Coupling Culprit to Victim 59 2.1 Radiation Effects on Equipment and Devices, 59 2.2 Various Types of Emission Coupling, 61 2.3 Intermodulation, 64 2.4 Common Mode Rejection Ratio, 67 2.5 Susceptibility and Immunity, 69 2.6 Filters for EMC, 79 2.7 Lightning Stroke Analysis, 81 2.8 Skin Effect in Wire, 83 2.9 Conclusion, 86 2.10 Review Problems, 86 2.11 Answers to Review Problems, 88 3 Introduction to Electromagnetic Fields 91 3.1 An Introduction to Electromagnetic Fields, 91 3.2 Wave Equation Solutions for Cylindrical Coordinate Systems, 98 3.3 Wave Equation Solutions for Spherical Coordinate Systems, 102 3.4 Review Problems, 113 3.5 Answers to Review Problems, 114 4 Case Studies and Analysis in Transportation Systems 115 4.1 Background Information for Subway Systems, 115 4.2 Case Studies, 118 4.3 Tunnel Radiation from a Temporary Antenna Installed on the Catwalk in a Tunnel, 142 4.4 Simulcast Interference at the End of the Cut and Cover Subway Tunnel, 145 4.5 Tracks Survey, 165 4.6 Leaky Radiating Coaxial Cable Analysis, 177 4.7 Effect of Rail on 26 Pair Cable Buried Along Right of Way, 187 4.8 Radiation Leakage from Way Side Communication Houses and Cabinets, 190 4.9 Lightning Rod Ground EMC Installation, 192 5 Case Studies and Analysis of LRT Vehicle and Bus Top Antenna Farm Emissions and Other Radio Related Case Studies 199 5.1 Introduction, 199 5.2 Circulation Currents in the Ground Plane, 201 5.3 Antenna Installation on a Radio Mast Case Study, 203 5.4 Unique Testing Technique for EMI and Police Vehicles, 210 5.5 Antenna Close to the Edge of the Ground Plane, 217 5.6 Case Study: Possible Fade Problem due to Antenna Reflections on the Rooftop of a Locomotive, 219 5.7 Case Study: Antenna Reflection and Diffraction at the Edge of the Ground Plane, 229 5.8 Antenna Application with Reflection also at the Edge of the Ground Plane, 234 5.9 Antenna Application with Reflection between Antennas in a Rooftop Antenna Farm, 239 5.10 Antenna Farm Application with Patch Antennas, 247 5.11 Review Problems, 253 5.12 Answers to Review Problems, 255 6 Case Studies and Analysis of Communications Equipment and Cable Shielding and Grounding for Bus and Ferry Operations 263 6.1 Introduction, 263 6.2 Communication System Overview, 264 6.3 Reflections (Ferry and Bus), 272 6.4 Review Problems, 279 6.5 Answers to Review Problems, 279 7 Health and Safety Issues with Exposure Limits for Maintenance Workers and the Public 281 7.1 Electromagnetic Emission Safety Limits, 281 7.2 EMI Prevention and Control, 290 7.3 Analysis of Rails as a Shock Hazard, 292 7.4 Lightning and Transient Protection, 293 7.5 Power Line Safety Calculations, 294 7.6 FCC Regulations, 297 7.7 Review Problems, 301 7.8 Answers to Review Problems, 302 8 Miscellaneous Information Test Plans and Other Information Useful for Analysis 305 8.1 Introduction, 305 8.2 EMC Plan, 306 8.3 EMC/EMI Performance Evaluation of Communications Equipment, 308 8.4 EMC/EMI Design Procedures, 317 8.5 Fresnel Zone Clearance, 333 8.6 Diffraction Losses, 335 8.7 Review Problems, 337 8.8 Answers to Review Problems, 338 9 Track Circuits and Signals 341 9.1 Introduction, 341 9.2 AF Track Circuits, 344 9.3 Loop Calculations, 352 9.4 Circuit Theory in Loop Calculations, 354 9.5 Review Problems, 359 9.6 Answers to Review Problems, 359 10 Useful Examples 361 10.1 Introduction, 361 10.2 Examples, 361 References 379 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisSubstation Automation Systems: Design and Implementation aims to close the gap created by fast changing technologies impacting on a series of legacy principles related to how substation secondary systems are conceived and implemented. It is intended to help those who have to define and implement SAS, whilst also conforming to the current industry best practice standards. Key features: Project-oriented approach to all practical aspects of SAS design and project development. Uniquely focusses on the rapidly changing control aspect of substation design, using novel communication technologies and IEDs (Intelligent Electronic Devices). Covers the complete chain of SAS components and related equipment instead of purely concentrating on intelligent electronic devices and communication networks. Discusses control and monitoring facilities for auxiliary power systems. Contributes significantly to the understanding of the sTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xvii List of Abbreviations xix 1 Historical Evolution of Substation Automation Systems (SASs) 1 1.1 Emerging Communication Technologies 4 1.1.1 Serial Communication 4 1.1.2 Local Area Network 4 1.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) 5 1.2.1 Functional Relays 5 1.2.2 Integrated Digital Units 5 1.3 Networking Media 5 1.3.1 Fiber]Optic Cables 5 1.3.2 Network Switches 5 1.4 Communication Standards 6 1.4.1 IEC Standard 61850 (Communication Networks and Systems for Power Utility Automation) 6 1.4.2 IEEE Standard 802.3 (Ethernet) 6 Further Reading 8 2 Main Functions of Substation Automation Systems 9 2.1 Control Function 14 2.2 Monitoring Function 15 2.3 Alarming Function 16 2.4 Measurement Function 17 2.5 Setting and Monitoring of Protective Relays 17 2.6 Control and Monitoring of the Auxiliary Power System 17 2.7 Voltage Regulation 18 Further Reading 18 3 Impact of the IEC 61850 Standard on SAS Projects 19 3.1 Impact on System Implementation Philosophy 21 3.2 Impact on User Specification 21 3.3 Impact on the Overall Procurement Process 23 3.4 Impact on the Engineering Process 23 3.5 Impact on Project Execution 23 3.6 Impact on Utility Global Strategies 24 3.7 The Contents of the Standard 24 3.8 Dealing with the Standard 24 Further Reading 27 4 Switchyard Level, Equipment and Interfaces 29 4.1 Primary Equipment 29 4.1.1 Switchgear 31 4.1.1.1 Circuit Breaker 31 4.1.1.2 Disconnector 32 4.1.1.3 Earthing Switch 33 4.1.2 Instrument Transformers 34 4.1.2.1 Voltage Transformer 34 4.1.2.2 Current Transformer 34 4.1.3 Power Transformers 35 4.1.4 Other Primary Equipment 38 4.2 Medium and Low Voltage Components 39 4.3 Electrical Connections between Primary Equipment 40 4.3.1 Incoming Circuits 42 4.3.2 Outgoing Circuits 42 4.3.3 The “Bay” Concept 43 4.4 Substation Physical Layout 43 4.5 Control Requirements at Switchyard Level 44 Further Reading 46 5 Bay Level: Components and Incident Factors 49 5.1 Environmental and Operational Factors 49 5.1.1 Lightning Strike 49 5.1.2 Switching Transients 50 5.1.2.1 Disconnector Operation 50 5.1.2.2 Circuit Breaker Operation 51 5.1.3 Electromagnetic Disturbance Phenomenon 51 5.1.4 Lightning Protection Practices 52 5.1.5 Typical Earthing Systems 54 5.1.6 Measures to Minimize Electromagnetic Effects 56 5.2 Insulation Considerations in the Secondary System 57 5.3 Switchyard Control Rooms 57 5.4 Attributes of Control Cubicles 59 5.4.1 Constructive Features 59 5.4.2 Earthquake Withstand Capability 59 5.4.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility 60 5.5 The Bay Controller (BC) 60 5.6 Other Bay Level Components 61 5.7 Process Bus 62 Further Reading 63 6 Station Level: Facilities and Functions 65 6.1 Main Control House 65 6.2 Station Controller 67 6.3 Human Machine Interface HMI 68 6.3.1 Start]Up Screen 69 6.3.2 Main Box Screen 69 6.3.3 Users Administrator Screen 69 6.3.4 Primary Circuit Screen (Process Screen) 71 6.3.5 SAS Scheme Screen 71 6.3.6 Event List Screen 71 6.3.7 Alarm List Screen 72 6.4 External Alarming 73 6.5 Time Synchronization Facility 74 6.6 Protocol Conversion Task 74 6.6.1 Briefing on Digital Communication Protocols 75 6.6.2 Premises for Developing Protocol Conversion 76 6.7 Station Bus 77 6.8 Station LAN 77 Further Reading 77 7 System Functionalities 79 7.1 Control Function 79 7.1.1 Control of Primary Switchgear 81 7.1.1.1 Symbols, Colors and Appearance Representing Primary Switchgear 81 7.1.1.2 Switching Command Implementation 81 7.1.1.3 Supervision of Circuit Breaker Trip Circuit 82 7.1.2 Check of Voltage Synchronization (Synchrocheck) 82 7.1.3 Checking Operative Constraint 83 7.1.3.1 Checking of Interlocking Conditions 83 7.1.3.2 Checking of Blocking Conditions 84 7.1.4 Voltage Regulation Task 84 7.1.5 Parallel Working of Power Transformers 85 7.1.6 Operation of Secondary Components 85 7.1.7 Facilities for Operation under Emergency Conditions 86 7.2 Monitoring Function 86 7.2.1 Event Handling 86 7.2.2 External Disturbance Recording 87 7.2.3 Alarming Management 87 7.3 Protection Function 88 7.4 Measuring Function 89 7.5 Metering Function 89 7.6 Report Generation Function 89 7.7 Device Parameterization Function 90 Further Reading 90 8 System Inputs and Outputs 91 8.1 Signals Associated with Primary Equipment 91 8.1.1 Switchgear 91 8.1.1.1 Signals Associated with Circuit Breakers 91 8.1.1.2 Signals Associated with Disconnectors 92 8.1.1.3 Signals Associated with Earthing Switches 92 8.1.2 Instrument Transformers 92 8.1.2.1 Signals Associated with Voltage Transformers 92 8.1.2.2 Signals Associated with Current Transformers 95 8.1.3 Power Transformers 95 8.2 Signals Associated with the Auxiliary Power System 95 8.2.1 Signals Associated with MV Circuit Breakers 95 8.2.2 Signals Associated with MV Distribution Transformers 97 8.2.3 Signals Associated with LV Circuit Breakers 97 8.2.4 Signals Associated with Distribution Center “A” 98 8.2.5 Signals Associated with Distribution Center “B” 98 8.2.6 Signals Associated with AC Distribution Cubicles for Essential Loads 98 8.2.7 Signals Associated with Diesel Generators 100 8.2.8 Signals Associated with AC Distribution Cubicles for Nonessential Loads 100 8.2.9 Signals Associated with DC Transfer Switches 101 8.2.10 Signals Associated with DC Distribution Cubicles 101 8.2.11 Signals Associated with Each Voltage Level of Batteries and Chargers 101 8.3 Signals Associated with Collateral Systems 102 9 System Engineering 103 9.1 Overall System Engineering 103 9.1.1 System General Concept 104 9.1.2 System Topology 104 9.1.3 Opportune Clarifications 105 9.1.4 Premises for Engineering Work 107 9.1.5 Signals Lists 109 9.1.5.1 Signals List Related to the Bay Controller 110 9.1.5.2 Signals List Related to Bay Controller of the Auxiliary Power System 110 9.1.5.3 Signals List Related to the Station Controller 110 9.1.5.4 Signals List for Communication with the NCC 110 9.1.5.5 Point to Point Signals List (For Each Bay) 110 9.1.5.6 Signals Lists Related to Equipment and Systems 111 9.2 Bay Level Engineering 111 9.3 Station Level Engineering 112 9.3.1 Engineering Related to the Station Controller 113 9.3.1.1 Definition and Implementation of the Station Level Database (Process Database) 113 9.3.1.2 Implementation of Redundant Solutions 114 9.3.2 Engineering Related to the Human Machine Interface 114 9.3.2.1 General Design Principles 115 9.3.2.2 Typical Screens 115 9.3.2.3 Operative Features 116 9.4 Functionalities Engineering 116 9.4.1 Interlocking Engineering 116 9.4.2 Voltage Regulation Engineering 117 9.4.3 Protection Engineering 117 9.4.4 Metering Engineering 117 9.4.5 Disturbance Recording Engineering 117 9.4.6 System Self]Monitoring Engineering 118 9.5 Auxiliary Power System Engineering 118 9.5.1 Design Concept 118 9.5.2 AC Voltage Distribution 118 9.5.3 DC Voltage Distribution 119 9.5.4 Batteries and Chargers 119 9.5.5 Medium Voltage Switchgear 119 9.5.6 Automatic Transfer Switches 119 9.6 Project Drawings List 120 9.7 The SAS Engineering Process from the Standard IEC 61850 Perspective 120 Further Reading 120 10 Communication with the Remote Control Center 123 10.1 Communication Pathway 123 10.2 Brief on Digital Communication 123 10.2.1 The OSI Reference Model 124 10.2.2 The IEC Enhanced Performance Architecture Model 127 10.3 Overview of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) 127 10.3.1 The Device Profile Document 128 10.3.2 The DNP3 Implementation Level 128 10.3.3 The DNP3 Implementation Document 128 Further Reading 129 11 System Attributes 131 11.1 System Concept 131 11.2 Network Topology 132 11.3 Redundancy Options 134 11.4 Quality Attributes 135 11.4.1 System Reliability and Availability 135 11.4.1.1 Considerations of the Standards 136 11.4.1.2 Example of an Availability Calculation 136 11.4.2 System Maintainability and Security 138 11.5 Provisions for Extendibility in Future 138 11.6 Cyber]Security Considerations 139 11.7 SAS Performance Requirements 139 Further Reading 140 12 Tests on SAS Components 141 12.1 Type Tests 141 12.1.1 Basic Characteristics Tests 141 12.1.2 Functional Tests 143 12.2 Acceptance Tests 143 12.3 Tests for Checking the Compliance with the Standard IEC 61850 144 Further Reading 144 13 Factory Acceptance Tests 145 13.1 Test Arrangement 145 13.2 System Simulator 145 13.3 Hardware Description 145 13.4 Software Identification 146 13.5 Test Instruments 146 13.6 Documentation to be Available 146 13.7 Checking System Features 146 13.7.1 Checking Basic Features 147 13.7.2 Checking Power Circuit Screens 147 13.7.3 Checking the SAS Scheme Screen 148 13.7.4 Checking Reports Screens (Each Type) 148 13.7.5 Checking Measurement Screens 148 13.7.6 Checking Time Synchronization Facilities 149 13.7.7 Checking of Self]Supervision Functions 149 13.7.8 Checking Peripheral Devices 149 13.7.9 Checking Collateral Subsystems 149 13.7.10 Checking Redundant Functionalities 149 13.8 Planned Testing Program for FAT 150 13.8.1 System Behavior in an Avalanche Condition 150 13.8.2 System Performance 150 13.8.3 Test of the Time Synchronization Mechanism 152 13.8.4 Test of Event Buffer Capability 152 13.8.5 Interlocking Logics 152 13.8.6 Synchronization Features 152 13.8.7 Operational Logic of Transfer Switch 152 13.8.8 Tests on the Communication Link for Technical Service 152 13.9 Nonstructured FATs 153 13.10 After FATs 153 Further Reading 153 14 Commissioning Process 155 14.1 Hardware Description 156 14.2 Software Identification 157 14.3 Test Instruments 157 14.4 Required Documentation 157 14.5 Engineering Tools 157 14.6 Spare Parts 157 14.7 Planned Commissioning Tests 158 14.7.1 System Start]Up 158 14.7.2 Displaying and Exploring the Main Menu Screen 158 14.7.3 Displaying and Dealing with Single]Line Diagrams 158 14.7.4 Displaying and Dealing with the SAS Scheme Screen 159 14.7.5 Displaying and Dealing with Report Screens 160 14.7.6 Displaying and Dealing with Measurement Screens 160 14.7.7 Displaying and Exploring the Alarm List Screen 160 14.7.8 Displaying and Exploring the Event List Screen 161 14.7.9 Checking Peripheral Components 161 14.7.10 Checking the Time Synchronization Mechanism 161 14.7.11 Testing Communication with the Remote Control Center 161 14.7.12 Checking System Performance 161 14.7.13 Testing Functional Performance 162 14.8 Nonstructured Commissioning Tests 162 14.9 List of Pending Points 162 14.10 Re]Commissioning 163 Further Reading 163 15 Training Strategies for Power Utilities 165 15.1 Project]Related Training 166 15.1.1 Station Level Module 166 15.1.2 Bay Level Module 167 15.1.3 Process Level Module 169 15.2 Corporate Training 169 15.2.1 General Purpose Knowledge 169 15.2.2 Learning from the Standard IEC 61850 171 15.2.3 Dealing with Engineering Tools 172 Further Reading 173 16 Planning and Development of SAS Projects 175 16.1 System Specification 176 16.2 Contracting Process 176 16.3 Definition of the Definitive Solution 178 16.4 Design and Engineering 178 16.5 System Integration 179 16.6 Factory Acceptance Tests 179 16.7 Site Installation 180 16.8 Commissioning Process 180 16.9 Project Management 181 16.10 Security Issues 182 16.10.1 Environmental Security 182 16.10.2 Electromagnetic Security 183 16.10.3 Physical Security 183 16.10.4 Information Security 183 16.10.5 Software Security 184 16.11 Documentation and Change Control 184 Further Reading 185 17 Quality Management for SAS Projects 187 17.1 Looking for Quality in Component Capabilities and Manufacturing 188 17.1.1 The Dilemma with Respect to Type Tests 188 17.1.2 The Importance of Factory Conformance Tests 189 17.2 Looking for Quality during the Engineering Stage 189 17.3 Looking for Quality in the Cubicle Assembly Stage 191 17.4 Looking for Quality during FAT 192 17.5 Looking for Quality during Installation and Commissioning 192 17.6 Use of Appropriate Device Documentation 192 Further Reading 196 18 SAS Engineering Process According to Standard IEC 61850 197 18.1 SCL Files 197 18.2 Engineering Tools 198 18.3 Engineering Process 199 Further Reading 202 19 Future Technological Trends 203 19.1 Toward the Full Digital Substation 203 19.1.1 Horizontal Communication as per IEC 61850 (GOOSE Messaging) 203 19.1.2 Unconventional Instrument Transformers 204 19.1.3 Process Bus as Defined by IEC 61850–9]2 204 19.2 Looking for New Testing Strategies on SAS Schemes 204 19.3 Wide Area Control and Monitoring Based on the IEC/TR 61850–90–5 205 19.4 Integration of IEC 61850 Principles into Innovative Smart Grid Solutions 206 Further Reading 206 Appendix A – Samples of Equipment and System Signal Lists 207 A.1 Signals List Related to Circuit Breakers (Each One) 207 A.2 Signals List Related to Collateral Devices 208 A.3 Signals List Related to the Auxiliary Power System 209 A.4 Signals List Related to the SAS Itself 210 Appendix B – Project Drawing List: Titles and Contents 211 B.1 General Interest Drawings 211 B.2 Electromechanical Drawings (High Voltage Equipment and Control Facilities) 213 B.3 Electromechanical Drawings (Control, Protection, Measurement and Communications) 215 B.4 Electromechanical Drawings (Auxiliary Power System) 223 Appendix C – Essential Tips Related to Networking Technology 231 C.1 Computer Network 231 C.1.1 Data 232 C.1.1.1 Meaning of Data, Information and Knowledge 232 C.1.1.2 Data Modeling 233 C.1.1.3 Data Type 234 C.1.1.4 Network Packet 234 C.2 Network Topology 235 C.2.1 Network Links 235 C.2.1.1 Wired Technologies 235 C.2.1.2 Wireless Technologies 235 C.2.2 Network Nodes 235 C.2.3 Network Interface Controllers 236 C.2.4 Repeaters and Hubs 236 C.2.5 Bridges 236 C.2.6 Switches 236 C.2.7 Routers 236 C.2.8 Modems 236 C.3 Network Structure 237 C.3.1 Common Network Layouts 237 C.4 Communication Protocols 237 C.4.1 Ethernet 237 C.4.2 The Internet Protocol Suite 238 C.4.3 SONET/SDH 238 C.4.4 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 238 C.4.5 Basic Requirements of Protocols 239 C.5 Geographical Scale of Network 240 C.5.1 Local Area Network 240 C.5.2 Backbone Network 240 C.5.3 Wide Area Network 241 C.5.4 Intranet 241 C.5.5 Extranet 241 C.6 Internetwork 241 C.6.1 Internet 241 C.6.2 Routing 242 C.6.3 Network Service 242 C.6.4 Network Performance 243 C.6.4.1 Quality of Service 243 C.6.4.2 Network Congestion 243 C.6.4.3 Network Resilience 243 C.6.5 Security Measures in Networks 243 C.6.5.1 Network Security 243 C.6.5.2 Network Surveillance 244 C.6.5.3 End]to]End Encryption 244 C.6.6 Views of the Network 244 C.7 Network Structure 245 C.8 Communication System 245 C.9 Object]Oriented Programming 245 C.10 Programming Tool or Software Development Tool 246 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplies the four-dimensional formalism with an extended toolbox of operation rules, allowing readers to define more general classes of electromagnetic media and to analyze EM waves that can exist in them. This book covers various properties of electromagnetic media in terms of which they can be set in different classes.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Multivectors and Multiforms 1 1.1 Vectors and One-Forms, 1 1.1.1 Bar Product | 1 1.1.2 Basis Expansions 2 1.2 Bivectors and Two-Forms, 3 1.2.1 Wedge Product ∧ 3 1.2.2 Basis Expansions 4 1.2.3 Bar Product 5 1.2.4 Contraction Products ⌋ and ⌊ 6 1.2.5 Decomposition of Vectors and One-Forms 8 1.3 Multivectors and Multiforms, 8 1.3.1 Basis of Multivectors 9 1.3.2 Bar Product of Multivectors and Multiforms 10 1.3.3 Contraction of Trivectors and Three-Forms 11 1.3.4 Contraction of Quadrivectors and Four-Forms 12 1.3.5 Construction of Reciprocal Basis 13 1.3.6 Contraction of Quintivector 14 1.3.7 Generalized Bac-Cab Rules 14 1.4 Some Properties of Bivectors and Two-Forms, 16 1.4.1 Bivector Invariant 16 1.4.2 Natural Dot Product 17 1.4.3 Bivector as Mapping 17 Problems, 18 2 Dyadics 21 2.1 Mapping Vectors and One-Forms, 21 2.1.1 Dyadics 21 2.1.2 Double-Bar Product || 23 2.1.3 Metric Dyadics 24 2.2 Mapping Multivectors and Multiforms, 25 2.2.1 Bidyadics 25 2.2.2 Double-Wedge Product ∧∧ 2.2.3 Double-Wedge Powers 28 2.2.4 Double Contractions ⌊⌊ and ⌋⌋ 30 2.2.5 Natural Dot Product for Bidyadics 31 2.3 Dyadic Identities, 32 2.3.1 Contraction Identities 32 2.3.2 Special Cases 33 2.3.3 More General Rules 35 2.3.4 Cayley–Hamilton Equation 36 2.3.5 Inverse Dyadics 36 2.4 Rank of Dyadics, 39 2.5 Eigenproblems, 41 2.5.1 Eigenvectors and Eigen One-Forms 41 2.5.2 Reduced Cayley–Hamilton Equations 42 2.5.3 Construction of Eigenvectors 43 2.6 Metric Dyadics, 45 2.6.1 Symmetric Dyadics 46 2.6.2 Antisymmetric Dyadics 47 2.6.3 Inverse Rules for Metric Dyadics 48 Problems, 49 3 Bidyadics 53 3.1 Cayley–Hamilton Equation, 54 3.1.1 Coefficient Functions 55 3.1.2 Determinant of a Bidyadic 57 3.1.3 Antisymmetric Bidyadic 57 3.2 Bidyadic Eigenproblem, 58 3.2.1 Eigenbidyadic C− 60 3.2.2 Eigenbidyadic C+ 60 3.3 Hehl–Obukhov Decomposition, 61 3.4 Example: Simple Antisymmetric Bidyadic, 64 3.5 Inverse Rules for Bidyadics, 66 3.5.1 Skewon Bidyadic 67 3.5.2 Extended Bidyadics 70 3.5.3 3D Expansions 73 Problems, 74 4 Special Dyadics and Bidyadics 79 4.1 Orthogonality Conditions, 79 4.1.1 Orthogonality of Dyadics 79 4.1.2 Orthogonality of Bidyadics 81 4.2 Nilpotent Dyadics and Bidyadics, 81 4.3 Projection Dyadics and Bidyadics, 83 4.4 Unipotent Dyadics and Bidyadics, 85 4.5 Almost-Complex Dyadics, 87 4.5.1 Two-Dimensional AC Dyadics 89 4.5.2 Four-Dimensional AC Dyadics 89 4.6 Almost-Complex Bidyadics, 91 4.7 Modified Closure Relation, 93 4.7.1 Equivalent Conditions 94 4.7.2 Solutions 94 4.7.3 Testing the Two Solutions 96 Problems, 98 5 Electromagnetic Fields 101 5.1 Field Equations, 101 5.1.1 Differentiation Operator 101 5.1.2 Maxwell Equations 103 5.1.3 Potential One-Form 105 5.2 Medium Equations, 106 5.2.1 Medium Bidyadics 106 5.2.2 Potential Equation 107 5.2.3 Expansions of Medium Bidyadics 107 5.2.4 Gibbsian Representation 109 5.3 Basic Classes of Media, 110 5.3.1 Hehl–Obukhov Decomposition 110 5.3.2 3D Expansions 112 5.3.3 Simple Principal Medium 114 5.4 Interfaces and Boundaries, 117 5.4.1 Interface Conditions 117 5.4.2 Boundary Conditions 119 5.5 Power and Energy, 123 5.5.1 Bilinear Invariants 123 5.5.2 The Stress–Energy Dyadic 125 5.5.3 Differentiation Rule 127 5.6 Plane Waves, 128 5.6.1 Basic Equations 128 5.6.2 Dispersion Equation 130 5.6.3 Special Cases 132 5.6.4 Plane-Wave Fields 132 5.6.5 Simple Principal Medium 134 5.6.6 Handedness of Plane Wave 135 Problems, 136 6 Transformation of Fields and Media 141 6.1 Affine Transformation, 141 6.1.1 Transformation of Fields 141 6.1.2 Transformation of Media 142 6.1.3 Dispersion Equation 144 6.1.4 Simple Principal Medium 145 6.2 Duality Transformation, 145 6.2.1 Transformation of Fields 146 6.2.2 Involutionary Duality Transformation 147 6.2.3 Transformation of Media 149 6.3 Transformation of Boundary Conditions, 150 6.3.1 Simple Principal Medium 152 6.3.2 Plane Wave 152 6.4 Reciprocity Transformation, 153 6.4.1 Medium Transformation 153 6.4.2 Reciprocity Conditions 155 6.4.3 Field Relations 157 6.4.4 Time-Harmonic Fields 158 6.5 Conformal Transformation, 159 6.5.1 Properties of the Conformal Transformation 160 6.5.2 Field Transformation 164 6.5.3 Medium Transformation 165 Problems, 166 7 Basic Classes of Electromagnetic Media 169 7.1 Gibbsian Isotropy, 169 7.1.1 Gibbsian Isotropic Medium 169 7.1.2 Gibbsian Bi-isotropic Medium 170 7.1.3 Decomposition of GBI Medium 171 7.1.4 Affine Transformation 173 7.1.5 Eigenfields in GBI Medium 174 7.1.6 Plane Wave in GBI Medium 176 7.2 The Axion Medium, 178 7.2.1 Perfect Electromagnetic Conductor 179 7.2.2 PEMC as Limiting Case of GBI Medium 180 7.2.3 PEMC Boundary Problems 181 7.3 Skewon–Axion Media, 182 7.3.1 Plane Wave in Skewon–Axion Medium 184 7.3.2 Gibbsian Representation 185 7.3.3 Boundary Conditions 187 7.4 Extended Skewon–Axion Media, 192 Problems, 194 8 Quadratic Media 197 8.1 P Media and Q Media, 197 8.2 Transformations, 200 8.3 Spatial Expansions, 201 8.3.1 Spatial Expansion of Q Media 201 8.3.2 Spatial Expansion of P Media 203 8.3.3 Relation Between P Media and Q Media 204 8.4 Plane Waves, 205 8.4.1 Plane Waves in Q Media 205 8.4.2 Plane Waves in P Media 207 8.4.3 P Medium as Boundary Material 208 8.5 P-Axion and Q-Axion Media, 209 8.6 Extended Q Media, 211 8.6.1 Gibbsian Representation 211 8.6.2 Field Decomposition 214 8.6.3 Transformations 215 8.6.4 Plane Waves in Extended Q Media 215 8.7 Extended P Media, 218 8.7.1 Medium Conditions 218 8.7.2 Plane Waves in Extended P Media 219 8.7.3 Field Conditions 220 Problems, 221 9 Media Defined by Bidyadic Equations 225 9.1 Quadratic Equation, 226 9.1.1 SD Media 227 9.1.2 Eigenexpansions 228 9.1.3 Duality Transformation 229 9.1.4 3D Representations 231 9.1.5 SDN Media 234 9.2 Cubic Equation, 235 9.2.1 CU Media 235 9.2.2 Eigenexpansions 236 9.2.3 Examples of CU Media 238 9.3 Bi-Quadratic Equation, 240 9.3.1 BQ Media 241 9.3.2 Eigenexpansions 242 9.3.3 3D Representation 244 9.3.4 Special Case 245 Problems, 246 10 Media Defined by Plane-Wave Properties 249 10.1 Media with No Dispersion Equation (NDE Media), 249 10.1.1 Two Cases of Solutions 250 10.1.2 Plane-Wave Fields in NDE Media 255 10.1.3 Other Possible NDE Media 257 10.2 Decomposable Media, 259 10.2.1 Special Cases 259 10.2.2 DC-Medium Subclasses 263 10.2.3 Plane-Wave Properties 267 Problems, 269 Appendix A Solutions to Problems 273 Appendix B Transformation to Gibbsian Formalism 369 Appendix C Multivector and Dyadic Identities 375 References 389 Index 395

Read more less